0% found this document useful (0 votes)

257 views

En Dev or User Guide

This documentation and related computer software program is for the end user's informational purposes only. This documentation is proprietary information of CA and protected by the copyright laws. Licensed users may print a reasonable number of copies of this documentation for their own internal use. To the extent permitted by applicable law, CA provides this documentation "as is" without warranty of any kind.

Uploaded by

André Deniz Hanai

Available Formats

Download as PDF, TXT or read online on Scribd

0% found this document useful (0 votes)

257 views

En Dev or User Guide

Uploaded by

André Deniz Hanai

Available Formats

Download as PDF, TXT or read online on Scribd

You are on page 1/ 344

AllFusion Endevor Change Manager

User Guide
r7 SP1

F00184-2E

This documentation and related computer software program (hereinafter referred to as the Documentation) is for the end users informational purposes only and is subject to change or withdrawal by Computer Associates International, Inc. (CA) at any time. This documentation may not be copied, transferred, reproduced, disclosed or duplicated, in whole or in part, without the prior written consent of CA. This documentation is proprietary information of CA and protected by the copyright laws of the United States and international treaties. Notwithstanding the foregoing, licensed users may print a reasonable number of copies of this documentation for their own internal use, provided that all CA copyright notices and legends are affixed to each reproduced copy. Only authorized employees, consultants, or agents of the user who are bound by the confidentiality provisions of the license for the software are permitted to have access to such copies. This right to print copies is limited to the period during which the license for the product remains in full force and effect. Should the license terminate for any reason, it shall be the users responsibility to return to CA the reproduced copies or to certify to CA that same have been destroyed. To the extent permitted by applicable law, CA provides this documentation as is without warranty of any kind, including without limitation, any implied warranties of merchantability, fitness for a particular purpose or noninfringement. In no event will CA be liable to the end user or any third party for any loss or damage, direct or indirect, from the use of this documentation, including without limitation, lost profits, business interruption, goodwill, or lost data, even if CA is expressly advised of such loss or damage. The use of any product referenced in this documentation and this documentation is governed by the end users applicable license agreement. The manufacturer of this documentation is Computer Associates International, Inc. Provided with Restricted Rights as set forth in 48 C.F.R. Section 12.212, 48 C.F.R. Sections 52.227-19(c)(1) and (2) or DFARS Section 252.227-7013(c)(1)(ii) or applicable successor provisions.

2005 Computer Associates International, Inc.

All trademarks, trade names, service marks, and logos referenced herein belong to their respective companies.

Contents
Chapter 1. Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.1 The Software Life Cycle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.1.1 Basic Operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.1.2 Emergency Operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.2 Endevor Logical Structure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.3 Setting Up Endevor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.3.1 Building the Inventory Structure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.3.1.1 Step 1: Determine Life Cycle Stages . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.3.1.2 Step 2: Decide Stages for Endevor Control . . . . . . . . 1.3.1.3 Step 3: Define Environments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.3.1.4 The Environment Map . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.3.1.5 Step 4: Define Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.3.1.6 Step 5: Define Subsystems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.3.1.7 Step 6: Define Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.4 Classifying Elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.5 Working with Elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.5.1 About Endevor Actions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.5.2 Actions by Job Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.5.3 Reporting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.5.4 Source and Output Management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.5.5 Creating Executable Forms of Elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.5.6 Audit Stamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.5.7 Packages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.5.8 Element Registration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.5.8.1 Controlling Duplicate Element Names at the System and Subsystem Level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.5.8.2 Controlling Duplicate Element Names at the Processor Group Level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.6 Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.6.1 Security Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.6.2 Endevor and Data Set Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.7 Other Capabilities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.8 Name Masking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.9 Syntax Conventions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.9.1 Sample Syntax Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.9.2 Syntax Diagram Explanation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.9.3 General Coding Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.9.3.1 Valid Characters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.9.3.2 Incompatible Commands and Clauses . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

1-1 1-2 1-2 1-3 1-4 1-7 1-7 1-7 1-7 1-8 1-8 1-9 1-9 1-10 1-11 1-13 1-13 1-14 1-15 1-15 1-15 1-16 1-16 1-17 1-17 1-19 1-22 1-22 1-22 1-23 1-24 1-26 1-29 1-29 1-31 1-32 1-33

Contents iii

1.9.3.3 Ending A Statement . . . . . . 1.9.3.4 SCL Parsing Information . . . 1.9.3.5 SCL Continuation Syntax Rules

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

1-33 1-33 1-33 2-1 2-2 2-2 2-3 2-4 2-5 2-5 2-5 2-5 2-6 2-7 2-10 2-10 2-11 2-11 2-12 2-13 2-14 2-16 2-17 2-19 2-20 2-20 2-21 2-22 2-22 2-23 2-23 2-24 3-1 3-2 3-2 3-2 3-3 3-3 3-4 3-4 3-5 3-6 4-1 4-2 4-3 4-4 4-4 4-5

Chapter 2. Endevor Basics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.1 Keyboard Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.1.1 ISPF Commands and Function Keys . . . . 2.1.2 Using the RETURN and JUMP Commands 2.1.3 Exiting Endevor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.2 Getting Help 2.2.1 Panel Help . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.2.2 Message Help . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.2.3 Foreground Execution Report Message . . 2.2.4 Tutorials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.3 The Primary Options Menu . . . . . . . . . . . 2.4 Endevor Panels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.4.1 Option Menus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.4.2 Request Panels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.4.3 Action Request Panels . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.4.4 Information Request Panels . . . . . . . . . 2.4.5 Definition Panels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.4.6 List Panels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.4.7 Browse Panels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.4.8 Example of Panel Interaction . . . . . . . . 2.4.9 Panel Field Values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.5 Name Masking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.5.1 Where Name Masking is Valid . . . . . . . 2.5.2 How to Use Name Masking . . . . . . . . . 2.6 Initiating Actions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.6.1 Foreground Processing . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.6.2 Batch Processing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.6.3 Package Processing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.6.4 Batch Package Processing . . . . . . . . . .

Chapter 3. Setting User Defaults and Options . . . 3.1 Setting User Defaults . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.1.1 The Endevor User Defaults Panel . . . . . . 3.1.2 Setting and Saving User Defaults . . . . . . 3.1.3 Work Data Set Allocation Information Fields 3.1.4 List Data Set Allocation Information Fields 3.1.5 Print Options Fields . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.1.6 Foreground Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.1.7 Job Statement Information Fields . . . . . . . 3.2 Adding User Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Chapter 4. Foreground and Batch Processing 4.1 Action Processing Selection . . . . . . . . . 4.2 The Foreground Options Menu Panel . . 4.3 The Batch Options Menu Panel . . . . . . 4.3.1 Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.3.2 Creating Batch Requests . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

iv User Guide

4.3.2.1 SCL Generation Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.3.2.2 SCL Generation Panel Options . . . . . . . . . . . 4.3.3 Editing Batch Requests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.3.4 Submitting Batch Jobs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.3.5 Validating Batch Requests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.3.6 Building Additional JCL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.4 The Confirmation Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.5 Selection Lists . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.5.1 System Selection List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.5.2 Subsystem Selection List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.5.3 Element and Member Selection Lists . . . . . . . . . . 4.5.4 Bypassing System and Subsystem Selection Lists . . . 4.5.5 ESORT Column Sorting Feature . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.5.6 EONLY Column Filtering Feature . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.5.6.1 Using Placeholder (%) and Wildcard (*) Characters 4.5.6.2 Using Dates with EONLY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.5.7 EPRINT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.5.8 Long Name Elements in Selection List . . . . . . . . . 4.6 The Action Prompt Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.7 The Batch Execution Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.7.1 The Syntax Request Report Section . . . . . . . . . . . 4.7.2 The Execution Report Section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.7.3 The Action Summary Report Section . . . . . . . . . . Chapter 5. Displaying Endevor Information . . 5.1 The Display Options Menu . . . . . . . . . . . 5.1.1 Display Options Menu Panel . . . . . . . 5.1.2 Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.2 Displaying Element Information . . . . . . . . 5.2.1 Display Elements/Component Lists Panel 5.2.2 Fields . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.2.2.1 Option Field . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.2.2.2 From Endevor Fields . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.2.2.3 List Options Fields 5.2.3 Element Selection List Panel . . . . . . . 5.2.4 Fields . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.2.5 Summary of Levels Panel . . . . . . . . . 5.2.6 Fields . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.2.6.1 Identification Fields . . . . . . . . . . 5.2.6.2 Source Level Information Fields . . 5.2.7 Element Master . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.2.8 Element Master Panel (1 of 2) . . . . . . . 5.2.9 Fields . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.2.9.1 Identification Fields . . . . . . . . . . 5.2.9.2 Last Element Action Fields . . . . . . 5.2.9.3 Current Source Fields . . . . . . . . . 5.2.9.4 Generate Fields . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.2.10 Element Master Panel (2 of 2) . . . . . . 5.2.11 Fields . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.2.11.1 Identification Fields . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

4-6 4-6 4-7 4-9 4-10 4-12 4-13 4-14 4-14 4-15 4-15 4-17 4-17 4-18 4-18 4-19 4-19 4-20 4-21 4-23 4-24 4-25 4-26 5-1 5-2 5-2 5-2 5-4 5-4 5-6 5-6 5-6 5-7 5-8 5-9 5-10 5-11 5-11 5-11 5-12 5-12 5-13 5-13 5-14 5-16 5-17 5-17 5-17 5-17

Contents v

5.2.11.2 Retrieve Fields . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.2.11.3 Base Fields . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.2.11.4 From Endevor Location Fields . . . . . . . . 5.2.12 Element Browse Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.2.13 Fields 5.2.13.1 Panel Title and Element Identification Fields 5.2.13.2 Source Level Information . . . . . . . . . . . 5.2.13.3 Element Statements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.2.14 Element Changes Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.2.15 Fields 5.2.15.1 Panel Title and Element Identification . . . 5.2.15.2 Source Level Information . . . . . . . . . . . 5.2.15.3 Element Statements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.2.16 Element History Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.2.17 Fields . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.2.17.1 Panel Title and Element Identification . . . 5.2.17.2 Source Level Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.2.17.3 Element Statements 5.3 Displaying Footprint Information . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.3.1 Endevor Footprint Display Panel . . . . . . . . . . 5.3.2 Fields . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.3.2.1 Option Field . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.3.2.2 From ISPF Library Fields . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.3.2.3 Other Partitioned or Sequential Data Set Field 5.3.3 Library Selection List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.3.4 Fields . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.3.4.1 Option Field . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.3.4.2 Member Field . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.3.4.3 Footprint Fields . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.3.5 Endevor Load Module IDR Display Panel . . . . 5.3.6 Fields . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.3.6.1 Option Field . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.3.6.2 CSECT Field . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.3.6.3 Footprint Fields . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.3.7 ISPF Browse Panel for a Footprinted Member . . 5.4 Displaying Site Definitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.4.1 Site Information Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.5 Fields . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.5.1.1 Customer Name Field . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.5.1.2 Function Controls Fields . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.5.1.3 Options Fields . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.5.1.4 Package Processing Fields . . . . . . . . . . . 5.5.1.5 Control Data Set Names Fields . . . . . . . . 5.5.1.6 Endevor Parmlib Information . . . . . . . . . 5.5.1.7 CA-7 Interface Values Fields . . . . . . . . . . 5.6 Displaying Stage Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.6.1 Stage Information Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.6.2 Fields . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.7 Displaying System Definitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.7.1 System Display Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.7.2 Fields . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

5-17 5-18 5-18 5-18 5-19 5-19 5-19 5-21 5-21 5-22 5-22 5-22 5-24 5-24 5-25 5-25 5-26 5-28 5-29 5-29 5-29 5-30 5-30 5-30 5-31 5-31 5-31 5-32 5-32 5-33 5-33 5-33 5-34 5-34 5-35 5-36 5-36 5-38 5-38 5-38 5-42 5-43 5-44 5-44 5-44 5-46 5-46 5-46 5-48 5-48 5-48

vi User Guide

5.7.3 System Definition Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.7.4 Fields . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.7.4.1 Identification Fields . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.7.4.2 General Options Fields . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.7.4.3 Element Registration Options Fields . . . . . 5.7.4.4 Signin/Signout Options Fields . . . . . . . . 5.7.4.5 Last System Backup Fields . . . . . . . . . . . 5.7.4.6 Processor Translation Output Libraries Fields 5.8 Displaying Subsystem Definitions . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.8.1 Subsystem Display Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.8.2 Fields . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.8.3 Subsystem Definition Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.8.4 Fields . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.9 Displaying Type Definitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.9.1 Type Display Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.9.2 Fields . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.9.3 Type Selection List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.9.4 Fields . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.9.5 Type Definition Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.9.6 Fields . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.9.6.1 Identification Fields . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.9.6.2 Description Field . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.9.6.3 Updated Field . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.9.6.4 Component List Options Fields . . . . . . . . 5.9.6.5 Library Fields . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.9.7 Acceptable PV/LB Language Values . . . . . . . 5.10 Displaying Processor Group Definitions . . . . . . . 5.10.1 Processor Group Display Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.10.2 Fields 5.10.3 Processor Group Selection List . . . . . . . . . . 5.10.4 Fields . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.10.5 Processor Group Definition Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.10.6 Fields 5.10.6.1 Processor Group Identification Fields . . . . 5.10.6.2 Output Management Information Fields . . 5.10.7 Processor Group Symbolics Panel . . . . . . . . 5.10.8 Fields . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.10.8.1 Identification Fields . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.10.8.2 Symbolic Identification Fields . . . . . . . . 5.10.9 Processor JCL Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.10.10 Fields . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.11 Displaying Approver Group Definitions . . . . . . . 5.11.1 Approver Group Display Panel . . . . . . . . . . 5.11.2 Fields . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.11.3 Approver Group Selection List . . . . . . . . . . 5.11.4 Fields . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.11.5 Approver Group Definition Panel . . . . . . . . 5.11.6 Fields . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.12 Displaying Approver Group Relation Definitions . . 5.12.1 Approver Group Relation Display Panel . . . .

5-49 5-49 5-49 5-50 5-51 5-52 5-53 5-54 5-55 5-55 5-55 5-56 5-56 5-57 5-57 5-57 5-58 5-58 5-59 5-59 5-59 5-60 5-60 5-63 5-64 5-64 5-66 5-66 5-67 5-67 5-68 5-68 5-69 5-69 5-70 5-72 5-73 5-73 5-73 5-74 5-74 5-76 5-76 5-76 5-77 5-77 5-78 5-78 5-80 5-80

Contents vii

5.12.2 Fields . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.12.3 Associating an Approver Group With an Entire Inventory Area 5.12.4 Approver Group Relationship List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.12.5 Fields . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.12.6 Approver Group Relationship Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.12.7 Fields . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.13 Displaying Environment Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.13.1 Environment Information Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.13.2 Fields . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.14 Site-Defined Symbolics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.14.1 Defining Site Symbolics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.14.2 Updating C1DEFLTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.15 Global Type Sequencing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.15.1 Global Type Sequence Processing Order . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.15.2 Global Type Processing Sequence Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Chapter 6. Action Processing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.1 Endevor Actions: An Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.2 Action Request Panel Fields . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.2.1 Sample Action Request Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.2.2 Option Field . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.2.3 Endevor Fields . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.2.4 ISPF Library Fields . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.2.5 Other Partitioned or Sequential Data Set Field . . . . . . 6.2.6 CCID and Comment Fields . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.2.7 List Options Fields . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.3 Impact of Actions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.3.1 Actions and Signout Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.3.2 Signout Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.3.3 Impact of Actions on CCIDs and Comments . . . . . . . . 6.4 Display Elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.5 Add Elements Action . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.5.1 Before You Begin . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.5.2 Add Considerations 6.5.3 Add/Update Elements Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.5.4 Fields . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.5.4.1 Option Field . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.5.4.2 To Endevor Fields . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.5.4.3 Comment Field . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.5.4.4 Action Options Fields . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.5.4.5 From ISPF Library Fields . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.5.4.6 From Other Partitioned or Sequential Data Set Field 6.5.4.7 List Options Field . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.5.5 Member Selection List for Add/Update Action . . . . . . 6.5.6 Fields . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.5.7 Impact of Add/Update Actions on CCIDs and Comments 6.5.8 Add Processing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.6 Archive Action . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.6.1 Before You Begin . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.6.2 Archive Elements Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.6.3 Fields . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

5-81 5-82 5-82 5-83 5-84 5-84 5-85 5-85 5-85 5-87 5-87 5-88 5-89 5-89 5-90 6-1 6-2 6-4 6-4 6-4 6-5 6-6 6-6 6-6 6-7 6-8 6-8 6-10 6-10 6-14 6-15 6-15 6-15 6-16 6-16 6-16 6-17 6-17 6-17 6-19 6-19 6-19 6-19 6-21 6-22 6-22 6-25 6-25 6-25 6-26

viii User Guide

6.6.3.1 Option Field . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.6.3.2 From Endevor Fields . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.6.3.3 Comment Field . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.6.3.4 To File Field . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.6.3.5 Action Options Field . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.6.3.6 List Options Field . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.6.4 Element Selection List for the Archive Action . . . . . . . 6.6.5 Archive Processing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.7 Copy Action . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.7.1 Before You Begin . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.7.2 Copy Processing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.8 Delete Action . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.8.1 Before You Begin . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.8.2 Delete Elements Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.8.3 Fields . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.8.3.1 Option Field . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.8.3.2 From Endevor Fields . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.8.3.3 Comment Field . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.8.3.4 Action Options Fields . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.8.3.5 List Options Fields . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.8.4 Delete Processing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.9 Generate Action . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.9.1 Before You Begin . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.9.2 Generate Elements Panel 6.9.3 Fields . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.9.3.1 Option Field . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.9.3.2 From Endevor Fields . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.9.3.3 Comment Field . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.9.3.4 Action Options Fields . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.9.3.5 List Options Fields . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.9.4 Impact of Generate Action on CCIDs/Comments . . . . . 6.9.5 Generating Elements Without Copyback . . . . . . . . . . 6.9.6 Generating Elements with Copyback . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.10 List Element Action . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.10.1 Before You Begin . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.10.2 List Element Action Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.10.3 Fields . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.10.3.1 Option Field . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.10.3.2 From Endevor Fields . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.10.3.3 List Options Fields . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.10.3.4 Text String Field . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.10.3.5 Scan Columns Fields . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.10.3.6 Action To Be Generated When List Is Created Field 6.10.3.7 Write List to Output Data Set Field . . . . . . . . . . 6.10.3.8 Where Component Eq Field . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.10.4 Element Selection List for the List Element Action . . . 6.10.5 List Output Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.11 List Member Action . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.11.1 Before You Begin . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.11.2 List Members Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

6-26 6-26 6-26 6-26 6-27 6-27 6-28 6-29 6-30 6-30 6-30 6-31 6-31 6-31 6-32 6-32 6-32 6-32 6-33 6-33 6-34 6-35 6-35 6-35 6-36 6-36 6-36 6-37 6-37 6-37 6-38 6-38 6-39 6-41 6-41 6-42 6-42 6-42 6-43 6-43 6-44 6-44 6-44 6-44 6-45 6-45 6-45 6-46 6-46 6-46

Contents ix

6.11.3 Fields . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.11.3.1 Option Field . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.11.3.2 From ISPF Library Fields . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.11.3.3 From Other Partitioned or Sequential Data Set Field . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.11.3.4 List Options Field 6.11.3.5 Text String Field . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.11.3.6 Scan Columns Fields . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.11.3.7 Action To Be Generated When List Is Created Field . . . 6.11.3.8 Write List to Output Data Set Field . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.11.4 Member Selection List Panel for the List Member Action Field 6.11.5 List Output Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.11.6 List Processing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.12 Move Elements Action . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.12.1 Before You Begin . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.12.2 Move Elements Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.12.3 Fields . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.12.3.1 Option Field . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.12.3.2 From Endevor Fields 6.12.3.3 Comment Field . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.12.3.4 List Options Fields . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.12.4 Impact of Move Action on CCIDs/Comments . . . . . . . . . 6.12.5 Moves Using a Generate Processor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.12.6 Moves Using Delete from Element Option . . . . . . . . . . . 6.12.7 Move Processing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.12.8 Moving Elements With History . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.12.9 Moving Elements Without History . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.12.10 Restarting Moves . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.13 Print Elements Action . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.13.1 Before You Begin 6.13.2 Print Elements Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.13.3 Fields . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.13.3.1 Option Field . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.13.3.2 From Endevor Fields . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.13.3.3 List Option Fields 6.13.4 Considerations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.14 Print Members Action . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.14.1 Before You Begin . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.14.2 Print Members Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.14.3 Fields . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.14.3.1 Option Field . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.14.3.2 From ISPF Library Fields . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.14.3.3 From Other Partitioned or Sequential Data Set Field . . 6.14.3.4 List Options Field . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.14.4 Member Selection List for the Print Members Panel . . . . . . 6.15 Restore Elements Action . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.15.1 Before You Begin . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.15.2 Restore Processing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.16 Retrieve Elements Action . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.16.1 Before You Begin . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.16.2 Retrieve Elements Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.16.3 Fields . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

6-47 6-47 6-47 6-47 6-47 6-47 6-48 6-48 6-48 6-48 6-50 6-50 6-51 6-51 6-51 6-52 6-52 6-52 6-52 6-54 6-55 6-55 6-56 6-56 6-56 6-59 6-59 6-60 6-60 6-61 6-61 6-61 6-62 6-62 6-63 6-64 6-64 6-64 6-64 6-64 6-65 6-65 6-65 6-65 6-67 6-67 6-67 6-69 6-69 6-69 6-70

x User Guide

6.16.3.1 Option Field . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.16.3.2 From Endevor Fields . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.16.3.3 Comment Field . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.16.3.4 Action Options Fields . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.16.3.5 To ISPF Library Fields . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.16.3.6 To Other Partitioned or Sequential Data Set Field 6.16.3.7 List Options Fields . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.16.4 Element Selection List for the Retrieve Action . . . . . 6.16.5 Retrieving Prior Versions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.16.6 Impact of Retrieve Action on Signout IDs . . . . . . . . 6.16.7 Impact of Retrieve Action on CCIDs/Comments . . . 6.16.8 Retrieve Processing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.17 Signin Elements Action . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.17.1 Before You Begin 6.17.2 Signin Elements Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.17.3 Fields . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.17.3.1 Option Field . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.17.3.2 From Endevor Fields . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.17.3.3 Action Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.17.3.4 List Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.17.4 Impact of Signin on Signout IDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.17.5 Impact of Signin on CCIDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.17.6 Signin Processing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.18 Transfer Elements Action . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.18.1 Before You Begin . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.18.2 Transfer Elements Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.18.3 Fields . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.18.3.1 Option Field . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.18.3.2 From Endevor Fields 6.18.3.3 To Endevor Fields . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.18.3.4 Comment Field . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.18.3.5 List Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.18.3.6 Action Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.18.4 Element Selection List for the Transfer Panel . . . . . . 6.18.5 Impact of Transfers on CCIDs and Comments . . . . . 6.18.6 Transfers Using a Move Processor . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.18.7 Transfers Using Delete from Element Option . . . . . . 6.18.8 Transfer Processing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.18.9 Transferring from Endevor to Endevor . . . . . . . . . 6.18.10 Transferring with History . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.18.11 Transferring Without History . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.18.12 Restarting Transfers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.18.13 Archive Data Set or Unload Tape to Endevor . . . . . 6.18.14 Endevor to Archive Data Set or Unload Tape . . . . . 6.19 Update Elements Action . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.19.1 Before You Begin . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.19.2 Update Element Processing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.19.3 Trailing Blanks in Input Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Appendix A. Actions and Processor Groups

6-70 6-70 6-71 6-71 6-72 6-72 6-72 6-73 6-74 6-74 6-74 6-74 6-76 6-76 6-76 6-77 6-77 6-77 6-78 6-78 6-79 6-79 6-79 6-80 6-80 6-81 6-81 6-81 6-82 6-82 6-82 6-82 6-83 6-85 6-86 6-86 6-87 6-87 6-88 6-89 6-91 6-91 6-92 6-92 6-93 6-93 6-93 6-94 A-1

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Contents xi

A.1 Processor Group Behavior: An Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A.1.1 How to Avoid Surprise and Confusion A.1.2 How the Tables Are Set Up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A.1.3 Table Contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A.1.4 Variables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A.1.5 Rules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A.1.6 Example Criteria . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A.2 Add Action and Processor Groups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A.2.1 Impact . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A.2.2 Example: Case 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A.3 Add/Update Actions and Processor Groups . . . . . . . . . . . . . A.3.1 Impact . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A.3.2 Example: Case 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A.3.3 Example: Case 3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A.4 Delete Action and Processor Groups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A.4.1 Impact . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A.4.2 Example: Case 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A.5 Generate Action and Processor Groups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A.5.1 Impact . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A.5.2 Example: Case 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A.5.3 Example: Case 4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A.6 Generate with Copyback and Processor Groups . . . . . . . . . . . A.6.1 Impact . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A.6.2 Example: Case 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A.7 Restore Action and Processor Groups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A.7.1 Impact . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A.7.2 Example: Case 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A.8 Move Action Using Move Processor and Processor Groups . . . . A.8.1 Impact . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A.8.2 Example: Case 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A.8.3 Example: Case 7 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A.9 Move Action Using Generate Processor and Processor Groups . . A.9.1 Impact . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A.9.2 Example: Case 3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A.9.3 Example: Case 5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A.10 Transfer Action Using Move Processor and Processor Groups . . A.10.1 Impact . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A.10.2 Example: Case 1 (A1) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A.10.3 Example: Case 7 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A.11 Transfer Action Using Generate Processor and Processor Groups A.11.1 Impact . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A.11.2 Example: Case 1 (A2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A.11.3 Example: Case 8 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Glossary Index

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

A-2 A-2 A-2 A-3 A-4 A-5 A-5 A-7 A-7 A-8 A-9 A-9 A-10 A-10 A-11 A-11 A-11 A-12 A-12 A-13 A-13 A-14 A-14 A-14 A-15 A-15 A-16 A-17 A-17 A-19 A-20 A-21 A-21 A-23 A-24 A-25 A-25 A-28 A-29 A-30 A-30 A-34 A-34 X-1 X-15

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

xii User Guide

Chapter 1. Overview
AllFusion Endevor Change Manager (Endevor) is an integrated set of management tools used to automate, control, and monitor your applications' development process. With Endevor, you can: Automatically compare and track your changes against production, creating an online change history. This speeds up the debugging process and enables you to always know what was changed, by whom, and why. Prevent conflicting changes to the same system component. Browse and manipulate all components relating to an application from a single screen, saving you time and ensuring that changes are complete. Automate the creation of executables. Ensure that the source, executable, and any other output associated with (for example, listings) an element correspond. Apply the same procedures (including automating compiles, impact analyses, and standards checking functions) to any component type, dramatically simplifying this process. Put change packages and approvals online, eliminating change-related paperwork. View or retrieve prior levels of any element. Report on element definition, content, and change history. Enforce change control procedures. Endevor is implemented and run under MVS, within the TSO ISPF environment, and in batch.

Chapter 1. Overview 1-1

1.1 The Software Life Cycle

Endevor allows you to automate and control the movement of software through your software life cycle. Software life cycles are site-specific. A representative life cycle might consist of five stages: DEVELOPMENT--Programs are developed. TEST--Programs are unit tested. QA--Applications are system tested. EMERGENCY--Fixes are applied to production code. PROD--Production applications are stored. Note: This example illustrates one life cycle. Endevor can be implemented to adapt to any software life cycle requirements.

1.1.1 Basic Operations

Normal change procedures include: Retrieving elements from production to a development library. Making changes to elements. Adding/updating elements in the test stage. Moving elements to QA. Moving elements back into production. The following diagram shows normal change procedures in a software life cycle.

1-2 User Guide

1.1 The Software Life Cycle

1.1.2 Emergency Operations

Emergency change procedures include: Retrieving elements from production. Making changes to elements. Adding/updating elements into the emergency stage. Moving elements to production. The following diagram illustrates emergency change procedures in a software life cycle.

Chapter 1. Overview 1-3

1.2 Endevor Logical Structure

Endevor helps to manage the software life cycle by providing a consistent and flexible logical structure for classifying software inventory. There are six components to this inventory structure: environments, stages, systems, subsystems, types, and elements. Environments, stages, systems, subsystems, and types are set up by the Endevor administrator. Users act on elements. These terms are defined next. This Endevor term Environment Refers to Functional areas within an organization. For example, there might be separate development and production environments. There is no limit to the number of environments that may be defined. The stages in the software life cycle. (For an example, see the preceding section.) There must be exactly two stages for each environment. Stages have a name, representing their place in the life cycle (for example TEST) and an ID (1 or 2). Stages are referred to in this manual as Stage 1 (the first stage in an environment) and Stage 2 (the second stage in an environment). Stages can be linked together to establish unique promotion routes for program inventory within and between environments. These routes make up the map for a site. The applications at a site. For example, there might be financial and manufacturing applications. A system must be defined to each environment in which it will be used.

Stage

System

1-4 User Guide

1.2 Endevor Logical Structure

This Endevor term Subsystem

Refers to A specific application within a system. For example, there might be purchase order and accounts payable applications within the financial system. Keep in mind that: There must be at least one subsystem per system. A subsystem must be defined to each system in which it will be used. For example, if you plan to have subsystem PO within system Finance, and define system Finance to environments TEST, QA, and PROD, then you must also define subsystem PO to system Finance in each environment. A subsystem can have the same name as the system to which you define it.

Type

Categories of source code. For example, you might create the following types: COBOL (for COBOL code); COPYBOOK (for copybooks); or JCL (for JCL streams). You must define a type for each stage, even if the stage won't be used. You can have as many as 99 types for each system and stage. Endevor uses JCL streams called processors to automate creating executables. Endevor invokes a delete, generate, or move processor based on the selected action. The specific processor invoked depends on the processor group associated with the element's type. A processor group identifies: The specific delete, generate, and move processor Endevor should invoke for the element The symbolic overrides for the processors' JCL. For more information, see Creating Executable Forms of Elements, later in this chapter, as well as the Extended Processors Guide.

Chapter 1. Overview 1-5

1.2 Endevor Logical Structure

This Endevor term Element

Refers to Partitioned data set (PDS or PDS/E) members, AllFusion CA-Panvalet or AllFusion CA-Librarian members, or sequential data sets that have been placed under control of Endevor. Generally, the element name is the member name. Each element is classified by system, subsystem, and type. Its environment and stage determine its location in the software life cycle.

Using the Inventory Structure: The Endevor inventory structure allows you to: Work with program modules without having to know where they are physically located, or how they are compiled. List all the program components that make up an application, regardless of type. Determine the location(s) of an element simply by entering the element name on a display screen. Act on a cross section of your program inventory. For example, Endevor allows you to list all COBOL code in your shop, or promote an entire new release of the payroll application with a single command. There are many other ways to use this structure to your advantage.

1-6 User Guide

1.3 Setting Up Endevor

The Endevor administrator builds an inventory structure based on the stages in your site's software life cycle.

1.3.1 Building the Inventory Structure

There are six steps in setting up an inventory structure: 1. Determine the stages in the software life cycle. 2. Decide which stages should be put under the control of Endevor. 3. Define two-stage environments based on the decisions in Steps 1 and 2, and link these environments/stages together to form the map. 4. Define applications (systems) for each stage. 5. Define specific applications (subsystems) within each system. 6. Define the types present in each stage and processors for each. These steps are discussed briefly in the following sections. For details, see the Administration Guide.

1.3.1.1 Step 1: Determine Life Cycle Stages

Software life cycles are site-specific. For this example, consider a five-stage life cycle: DEVELOPMENT UNITTEST QA EMERGENCY PROD

1.3.1.2 Step 2: Decide Stages for Endevor Control

Your Endevor administrator can decide to put some or all of the stages in your life cycle under control of Endevor. In this example, assume that the last four stages of the life cycle are under the control of Endevor: UNITTEST QA EMER PROD

This means that program development takes place outside of Endevor. While this is a fairly typical life cycle, keep in mind that Endevor can be adapted to any life cycle requirements.

Chapter 1. Overview 1-7

1.3 Setting Up Endevor

1.3.1.3 Step 3: Define Environments

Environment is the Endevor term for functional areas in your organization. In this example, assume that the TEST and QA stages in the life cycle are part of the development function, and that production applications and their maintenance are part of a function called production. The administrator defines environment TEST to include Stage UNITTEST and QA, and a second environment called PROD, that includes Stage EMERGENCY and Stage PROD. Development activities take place in a development library, outside of Endevor.

1.3.1.4 The Environment Map

The Endevor administrator might decide to establish the following route for inventory at this site that promotes inventory from Stage TEST to Stage QA to Stage PROD.

Fixes would be moved from Stage EMERGENCY to Stage PROD.

1-8 User Guide

1.3 Setting Up Endevor

1.3.1.5 Step 4: Define Systems

Your Endevor administrator must define a system to each environment in which it will be used. There are two systems in this example: FINANCE and MFG (manufacturing).

1.3.1.6 Step 5: Define Subsystems

Your Endevor administrator must define at least one subsystem for each system. In addition, he or she must define a particular subsystem to each system in which it will be used. In this example, system FINANCE has two subsystems: PO and AP, and system MFG has one subsystem, MFG.

Chapter 1. Overview 1-9

1.3 Setting Up Endevor

1.3.1.7 Step 6: Define Types

Your Endevor administrator must define types to each system/stage combination in which you plan to use them. All subsystems defined to a system can use the types defined to that system. In this example, system FINANCE has available the types COBOL (COBOL code), JCL (JCL streams), and COPYBOOK (copybooks). System MFG has available the types ASSEM (Assembler code), JCL, and MACRO (Macros).

1-10 User Guide

1.4 Classifying Elements

Endevor classifies elements according to the inventory structure your Endevor administrator sets up. Each element is described uniquely in terms of its: Location in the software life cycle, determined by the environment and stage where it resides. Inventory classification, determined by the system, subsystem, and type with which it is associated. This is illustrated by the following diagram.

For example, in this diagram: This module PROG01 Is located in Environment TEST Stage UNITTEST Environment TEST Stage QA Environment TEST Stage QA Is classified as Type COBOL Subsystem PO System FINANCE Type JCL Subsystem MFG System MFG Type COPYBOOK Subsystem AP System FINANCE

JCL22Q COPY33

Chapter 1. Overview 1-11

1.4 Classifying Elements

Querying the Endevor Structure: The Endevor classification scheme allows users to produce lists of elements by environment, stage, system, subsystem, type, or any combination of these categories. For example, using the preceding example, you could query the system for the following lists: This query Show me all the JCL in the shop Show me all the software currently in QA Produces JCL56 JCL008 JCL22Q PROGX JCL008 COPY33 PGM00 JCL22Q MAC02 PGMA1 PGMA2 MAC02

Show me all the manufacturing software currently being unit tested

1-12 User Guide

1.5 Working with Elements

This section describes how to work with elements in Endevor.

1.5.1 About Endevor Actions

You manipulate Endevor inventory by executing commands called actions. Some actions are available in both foreground and in batch, while others are available only in batch. Batch actions are also available when you build packages. This manual explains how to execute actions in foreground and submit batch action requests. The SCL Reference Guide contains the syntax for Endevor's Software Control Language (SCL). SCL allows you to code Endevor batch action requests. The following table summarizes Endevor actions and identifies whether they can be executed in foreground, batch, or both. This action... Add Archive Copy Is available in... Foreground / Batch Batch Batch And does this... Puts an external data set member under Endevor's control. Writes the current version of an element to a sequential data set. Copies an element from an archive data set to a data set external to Endevor. Erases base and delta forms of an element and removes related information from a Master Control File. Displays information about an element. Creates an executable form of an element. Creates a list of elements that meet specific selection criteria. One effective use of this function is to perform impact analysis. Moves elements between stages, within or across environments. Prints element or member information.

Delete

Foreground / Batch

Display Generate List

Foreground Foreground / Batch Batch

Move Print

Foreground / Batch Foreground / Batch

Chapter 1. Overview 1-13

1.5 Working with Elements

This action... Restore Retrieve Signin Transfer

Is available in... Batch Foreground / Batch Foreground / Batch Batch

And does this... Restores elements to Endevor from an archive data set. Copies elements from Endevor to an external data set. Removes the user signout associated with an element. Moves elements between locations that are not on the same map route. Updates an element from an external data set.

Update

Foreground / Batch

1.5.2 Actions by Job Function

A typical site might include the following job functions: Development QA/Test Turnover Auditing Management Endevor administration The following table summarizes, for each job function, the actions that someone might perform: Action Add/ Update Archive Copy Delete Display Generate List Move Print x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x Dev x QA/Test x Turnover Auditing Mgmnt Admin x x x x x

1-14 User Guide

1.5 Working with Elements

Action Restore Retrieve Signin Transfer

Dev

QA/Test

Turnover

Auditing

Mgmnt

Admin x

x x

x x x x

1.5.3 Reporting
Endevor provides a full set of standard reports, as well as the capability to create custom API reports. For more information, see the Reports Guide, API Guide, and the chapter "Comma Separated Value (CSV) Utility" in the Utilities Guide.

1.5.4 Source and Output Management

As it executes each action request, Endevor categorizes the processing as source management or output management. Source management deals with that aspect of processing that maintains the element source and MCF definitions; that is, updates to the Master Control File and to the base and delta libraries. Output management relates to any processing that creates or maintains data sets related to the element being processed. These data sets include the source output libraries, processor listing and load libraries (applicable for element type PROCESS only), user-defined libraries, and Include libraries.

1.5.5 Creating Executable Forms of Elements

Endevor uses OS JCL streams called processors to create executable forms of source code, including source modules, object modules, load modules, and listings. There are three kinds of processors: Generate processors execute when an element is added or updated in Endevor, or generated in a stage. Optionally, generate processors execute when an element is restored or transferred to Endevor from an archive data set. Typically, the generate processor creates an executable form of the element, together with any associated outputs (such as listings). Delete processors execute when an element is deleted, transferred, moved, or archived. Generally, the delete processor deletes any output that was created by the corresponding generate processor. Move processors move elements from one stage in the life cycle to another. Move processors generally copy all the output previously created for the element, or re-create those outputs in the target stage.

Chapter 1. Overview 1-15

1.5 Working with Elements

A processor group identifies the specific generate, delete, and move processor Endevor should use to process a particular element type. It also specifies the symbolic overrides that Endevor should use in the processors' JCL. So, for example, you can write a set of processors for your assembly language programs, combine those processors into one processor group, and then associate that group with element type ASM. For details about processors, see the Extended Processors Guide. Note: If you move or transfer an element from one processor group to another, Endevor executes the delete processors associated with the source location, not the target location.

1.5.6 Audit Stamps

Endevor can place an encrypted audit stamp, called a footprint, in the output source, object, or load modules that are created by processors. The footprint provides an integrity check between the source form of an element and its executable form. (For more information about footprints, see the Footprints Guide.)

1.5.7 Packages
Endevor packages allow you to formalize your use of actions by: Creating sets of actions that can be tracked, maintained, and reused as a unit. Establishing approval procedures for packages. For information on approver groups, see the Packages Guide. Centralizing package locations, facilitating their reuse across environments. Shipping packages to remote locations. For more information on packages, see the Packages Guide.

1-16 User Guide

1.5 Working with Elements

1.5.8 Element Registration

The element registration feature enables you to choose whether you want to allow the use of duplicate element names. Duplicate element names can be problematic if both elements are written to the same library. However, there are situations in which they are desirablefor example, when the same element name is used for a program as well as its JCL. To account for both situations, Endevor provides two options that enable you to allow or disallow duplicate element names. One option enables you to control the use of duplicate element names at the system and subsystem level. The other option enables you to control the use of duplicate element names at the processor group level. You can implement one or both of these options as described next.

1.5.8.1 Controlling Duplicate Element Names at the System and Subsystem Level
The element registration feature enables you to control whether duplicate element names are allowed across subsystems within the same system. During action processing, when the processor group associated with the element is validated, Endevor checks the element registration option to see if duplicate element names are allowed. When element registration is enabled, if Endevor finds two elements that have the same name, and which exist in different subsystems of the same system, Endevor issues a message and optionally terminates action processing.

Chapter 1. Overview 1-17

1.5 Working with Elements

The System Definition panel parameter DUPLICATE ELEMENT NAME CHECK governs the status of element registration at the system and subsystem level. To activate the checking of duplicate names at the system and subsystem level, enter a Y in this field, which is highlighted in the following example:

---------------------------- SYSTEM DEFINITION -------------------------------COMMAND ===> CURRENT ENV: SMPLTEST NEXT ENV: SMPLPROD SYSTEM: ADMIN NEXT SYSTEM ===> ADMIN SYSTEM TITLE ===> ENDEVOR ADMINISTRATION APPLICATIONS UPDATED: 15OCT 1 14:36 BY USER 7 GENERAL OPTIONS: COMMENT ===> Y (Y/N) CCID ===> Y (Y/N) REQ ELM JUMP ACK ===> Y (Y/N) ELEMENT REGISTRATION OPTIONS: DUPLICATE ELEMENT NAME CHECK ===> Y (Y/N) MSG SEVERITY LVL ===> E (W/C/E) DUPLICATE PROC O/P TYPE CHECK ===> N (Y/N) MSG SEVERITY LVL ===> (W/C/E) SIGN-IN/SIGN-OUT OPTIONS: ACTIVATE OPTION ===> Y (Y/N) VALIDATE DATA SET ===> N (Y/N) PROCESSOR TRANSLATION OUTPUT LIBRARIES: STAGE 1 LOAD LIBRARY ===> CA.ENDEVOR.SMPLEMER.PRCSLOAD STAGE 1 LIST LIBRARY ===> CA.ENDEVOR.SMPLEMER.PRCSLIST STAGE 2 LOAD LIBRARY ===> CA.ENDEVOR.SMPLPROD.PRCSLOAD STAGE 2 LIST LIBRARY ===> CA.ENDEVOR.SMPLPROD.PRCSLIST -------------------------------------------------------------------------------

Once you have activated element registration at the system and subsystem level, you must indicate the action you want Endevor to take upon encountering two identically named elements. This is done by setting the MSG SEVERITY LVL parameter next to the DUPLICATE ELEMENT NAME CHECK parameter in the System Definition panel, shown in the previous example.

1-18 User Guide

1.5 Working with Elements

You can specify the following message severity levels if the check finds that the same element name exists within another subsystem under the same system: Value W (Warning) C (Caution) E (Error) Description The action is performed, and a warning message is issued. The action is performed, and a caution message is issued. The action is not performed and an error message is issued.

Note: Make sure that you select the same message severity level for the system in each environment in which it appears. If you do not, element actions may behave in an unpredictable manner. Similarly, if you activate element registration for a system, make sure that you activate it in each environment in which it appears.

1.5.8.2 Controlling Duplicate Element Names at the Processor Group Level

The element registration feature also enables you to control whether elements that have the same name and processor output type, but a different element type, can exist within the same system or different systems. However, the check across different (non-mapped) systems is only in effect if you have turned on the optional feature ELM_REG_CHK_OUTPTYPE_ACROSS_SYSTEMS=ON in the optional features table (ENCOPTBL). Through the use of the processor output type field, described later in this section, you have the ability to classify the type of output produced by a processor group. When element registration is enabled at the processor group level, Endevor performs an additional check during action processing; namely, if an element that already exists within the system has the same processor output type as the element being acted upon, Endevor issues a message and optionally terminates action processing. To activate this option, you need to set the appropriate parameter in the System Definition panel. Then, you must define the output type for the processor group. Both tasks are described next.

Chapter 1. Overview 1-19

1.5 Working with Elements

The System Definition panel parameter DUPLICATE PROC O/P TYPE CHECK governs the status of element registration at the processor group level. To activate the checking of duplicate processor output types, enter a Y in this field, which is highlighted in the following example:

---------------------------- SYSTEM DEFINITION -------------------------------COMMAND ===> CURRENT ENV: SMPLTEST NEXT ENV: SMPLPROD SYSTEM: ADMIN NEXT SYSTEM ===> ADMIN SYSTEM TITLE ===> ENDEVOR ADMINISTRATION APPLICATIONS UPDATED: 15OCT 1 14:36 BY USER 7 GENERAL OPTIONS: COMMENT ===> Y (Y/N) CCID ===> Y (Y/N) REQ ELM JUMP ACK ===> Y (Y/N) ELEMENT REGISTRATION OPTIONS: DUPLICATE ELEMENT NAME CHECK ===> N (Y/N) MSG SEVERITY LVL ===> (W/C/E) DUPLICATE PROC O/P TYPE CHECK ===> Y (Y/N) MSG SEVERITY LVL ===> W (W/C/E) SIGN-IN/SIGN-OUT OPTIONS: ACTIVATE OPTION ===> Y (Y/N) VALIDATE DATA SET ===> N (Y/N) PROCESSOR TRANSLATION OUTPUT LIBRARIES: STAGE 1 LOAD LIBRARY ===> CA.ENDEVOR.SMPLEMER.PRCSLOAD STAGE 1 LIST LIBRARY ===> CA.ENDEVOR.SMPLEMER.PRCSLIST STAGE 2 LOAD LIBRARY ===> CA.ENDEVOR.SMPLPROD.PRCSLOAD STAGE 2 LIST LIBRARY ===> CA.ENDEVOR.SMPLPROD.PRCSLIST -------------------------------------------------------------------------------

Once you have activated element registration at the processor group level, you must indicate the action you want Endevor to take upon encountering two elements in the same system that have the same processor output type. This is done by setting the MSG SEVERITY LVL parameter located next to the DUPLICATE PROC O/P TYPE CHECK parameter, shown in the previous example. You can specify the following message severity levels if the check finds that the element having the same name and processor output type, but different element type, exists within the same system; or the element with same name and processor output type, but different element type, exists in a different system: Value W (Warning) C (Caution) E (Error) Description The action is performed, and a warning message is issued. The action is performed, and a caution message is issued. The action is not performed, and an error message is issued.

1-20 User Guide

1.5 Working with Elements

After you have enabled element registration at the processor group level and selected the message severity level, you need to define the output type. The default output type is a concatenation of the element type and processor group names. Using the default value will ensure that there are no registration conflicts. Alternately, you can define the output type using the Processor Group Definition panel. The output type field, PROCESSOR O/P TYPE, supports up to 16 characters. In the following example, we use LOADMODULE as the output type for the generate processor. The output type is copied to the element catalog record segment when the element is added or updated.

DISPLAY ---------------COMMAND ===> CURRENT ENV: NEXT ENV: I4 I4

PROCESSOR GROUP DEFINITION STAGE ID: STAGE ID: 1 2 SYSTEM: SYSTEM:

------------------------TYPE: TYPE: ASMPGM ASMPGM

NDVRMVS NDVRMVS

PROCESSOR GROUP: DESCRIPTION: NEXT PRCS GROUP: UPDATED:

ASMIRUAL PROCESSOR O/P TYPE: LOADMODULE INTERNAL - ASSEM REUSABLE AUTHORIZED ASMIRUAL 13MAR 1 11: 6 BY USER 1 -----------------------

-----------------------

OUTPUT MANAGEMENT INFORMATION G (M/G) G (M/G)

PROCESSOR TO USE FOR MOVE ACTION: PROCESSOR TO USE FOR TRANSFER ACTION: S - Browse Symbolics GENERATE PROCESSOR: DELETE PROCESSOR: MOVE PROCESSOR: GASM DPDSMBR NOPROC

L - List Processor FOREGROUND : Y : Y : Y EXECUTION (Y/N) (Y/N) (Y/N)

You can implement the processor group option for selected inventory. For the inventory that should not be checked, leave the output value as it is originally set; that is, a concatenation of the element type and processor group names. Using the default value will ensure that there are no registration conflicts.

Chapter 1. Overview 1-21

1.6 Security

1.6 Security
This section describes the security features provided by Endevor.

1.6.1 Security Options

Endevor provides two functional security options: A native security facility The Endevor External Security Interface (Endevor ESI) A native security facility comes with Endevor. It enables you to secure Endevor functions (access and actions) by using security tables. For more information, see the Security Guide. The External Security Interface is an optional feature of Endevor that enables you to secure Endevor functions through the MVS Security Access Facility (SAF) and in conjunction with the installation security package on your system. Endevor ESI does this by allowing you to define the rules for function security in your installation security package (IBM RACF, eTrust CA-ACF2 Security, eTrust CA-Top Secret Security) rather than in the native tables supplied with Endevor. For more information on enabling and using Endevor ESI, see the Security Guide.

1.6.2 Endevor and Data Set Security

Endevor does not provide data set security. Data set security is performed by an installation security package, such as: IBM RACF eTrust CA-ACF2 Security eTrust CA-Top Secret Security Computer Associates recommends that you implement data set security to prevent unauthorized access to the data sets controlled by Endevor. For information on how to accomplish this using your installation security package, see the Security Guide.

1-22 User Guide

1.7 Other Capabilities

Using other Computer Associates products, Endevor can provide: Configuration management, using the Endevor Automated Configuration Manager (ACM). For more information, see the Automated Configuration Option Guide. Parallel development controls using the Endevor Parallel Development Manager (PDM). For more information, see the Parallel Development Option Guide. Automated coordination of all DB2 processes, using Endevor DB2 Application Manager. For more information, see the Endevor for DB2 Administrator Guide. Footprint synchronization at remote sites. For more information, see the Footprints Guide. Interfaces to: IBM's Information/Management System. For more information, see the Interface for IBM Information/Management Administration Guide. CA-Roscoe. For more information, see the Interface for CA-Roscoe Guide. AllFusion CA-Panvalet and AllFusion CA-Librarian. CA-Netman In addition, using Endevor workstation products, you can develop applications on workstations, then move the applications to Endevor using Endevor Link.

Chapter 1. Overview 1-23

1.8 Name Masking

A name mask allows you to specify all names, or all names beginning with a particular string, to be considered when performing an action. Name masks are valid on: Element names System, subsystem, and type names within FROM clauses Report syntax ISPF panels API requests Name masks are not valid on: Environment names Element names in the following situations: When entering a LEVel in a statement When using the MEMber clause with a particular action When building a package Usage: There are three ways to mask names: by using the wildcard character (*), by using the placeholder character (%), and by using both together. The wildcard (*) can be used in one of two ways to specify external file names: When coded as the only character of a search string, Endevor returns all members of the search field. For example, if you coded the statement ADD ELEMENT *, all elements would be added. When coded as the last character of a search string, Endevor returns all members of the search field beginning with the characters in the search string preceding the wildcard. For example, the statement ADD ELEMENT UPD* would add all elements beginning with "UPD", such as UPDATED or UPDATE. Note: You cannot use more than one wildcard in a string. The statement ADD ELEMENT U*PD* would result in an error.

1-24 User Guide

1.8 Name Masking

The placeholder (%) can also be used in one of two ways: When coded as the last character in a string, Endevor returns all members of the search field, beginning with the characters in the search string preceding the placeholder, but which have no more characters than were coded in the search string. If you coded the statement ADD ELEMENT UPD%, only those elements with four-character-long names beginning with "UPD" (UPD1 or UPDA, for example) would be added. It is also possible to use the placeholder multiple times in a single search string. The statement ADD ELEMENT U%PD% would return all elements with five-character-long names that have U as the first character, and PD third and fourth. The wildcard and the placeholder can be used together, provided that the wildcard appears only at the end of the search string and is used only once. An example of a statement using both the wildcard and the placeholder is ADD ELEMENT U%D*. This statement would add elements with names of any length that have U as the first character and D as the third.

Chapter 1. Overview 1-25

1.9 Syntax Conventions

Endevor uses the IBM standard for representing syntax. The following table explains the syntax conventions: Syntax Explanation Represents the beginning of a syntax statement. Represents the end of a syntax statement. Represents the continuation of a syntax statement to the following line. Represents the continuation of a syntax statement from the preceding line. Represents a required keyword. Only the uppercase letters are necessary. Represents a required user-defined variable. Represents an optional keyword. Optional keywords appear below the syntax line. If coded, only the uppercase letters are necessary. Represents an optional user-defined variable. Optional variables appear below the syntax line. Represents a choice of required, mutually exclusive keywords. You must choose one and only one keyword. Represents a choice of required, mutually exclusive, user-defined variables. You must choose one and only one variable. Represents a choice of optional, mutually exclusive keywords. Optional keywords appear below the syntax line.

KEYword

variable KEYword

variable

KEYword ONE KEYword TWO KEYword THRee

variable one variable two variable three

KEYword ONE KEYword TWO KEYword THRee

1-26 User Guide

1.9 Syntax Conventions

Syntax variable one variable two variable three KEYword ONE KEYword TWO KEYword THRee

Explanation Represents a choice of optional, mutually exclusive, user-defined variables. Optional variables appear below the syntax line. Represents a choice of optional keywords. The stars () indicate that the keywords are not mutually exclusive. Code no keyword more than once. Represents a choice of optional user-defined variables. The stars () indicate that the variables are not mutually exclusive. Code no variable more than once. Represents a choice of required, mutually exclusive keywords, one of which is the default. In this example, KEYword ONE is the default keyword because it appears above the syntax line. Represents a choice of required, mutually exclusive, user-defined variables, one of which is the default. In this example, variable one is the default variable because it appears above the syntax line. Represents a choice of optional, mutually exclusive keywords, one of which is the default. In this example, KEYword ONE is the default keyword because it appears above the syntax line. Represents a choice of optional, mutually exclusive, user-defined variables, one of which is the default. In this example, variable one is the default variable because it appears above the syntax line. Represents a required variable that can be repeated. Separate each occurrence with a comma and enclose any and all variables in a single set of parenthesis.

variable one variable two variable three

KEYword ONE KEYword TWO KEYword THRee

variable one variable two variable three

KEYword ONE KEYword TWO KEYword THRee

variable one variable two variable three

, (variable)

Chapter 1. Overview 1-27

1.9 Syntax Conventions

Syntax , (variable)

Explanation Represents an optional variable that can be repeated. Separate each occurrence with a comma and enclose any and all variables in a single set of parenthesis. Represents a variable which must be enclosed by parenthesis. Represents a variable which must be enclosed by single quotes. Represents a variable which must be enclosed by double quotes. Represents a reference to a syntax fragment. Fragments are listed on the lines immediately following the required period at the end of each syntax statement. Represents a syntax fragment. Represents the period required at the end of all syntax statements.

(variable) 'variable' "variable" FRAGMENT REFERENCE

FRAGMENT: KEYwordvariable .

1-28 User Guide

1.9 Syntax Conventions

1.9.1 Sample Syntax Diagram

A sample syntax diagram is shown next: ARChive ELEmentelement-name THRoughelement-name THRu FROmEVNironmentenv-nameSYStemsys-name SUBsystemsubsys-nameTYPetype-name STAgestage-idTOFILedd-name STAge NUMberstage-no DDName WHEre CCID PRO . OPTions CCIdccid COMmentcomment OVErride SIGNOut BYPass ELEment DELete CCID: EQual , CCId(ccid) CURrent = OFALL RETrieve PRO: , PROcessor GROupEQual(group name) =

1.9.2 Syntax Diagram Explanation

The following table explains the previous syntax diagram: Syntax ARChive ELEment element-name Explanation The keyword ARChive ELEment appears on the main line, indicating that it is required. The variable element-name, also on the main line, must be coded. The keywords THRough and THRu appear below the main line, indicating that they are optional. They are also mutually exclusive. Each keyword and variable in this segment appear on the main line, indicating that they are required.

THRough / THRu element-name FROm ENVironment ... TYPe type-name

Chapter 1. Overview 1-29

1.9 Syntax Conventions

Syntax STAge stage-id / STAge NUMber stage-no TO ... dd-name

Explanation The keywords STAge and STAge NUMber appear on and below the main line, indicating that they are required, mutually exclusive keywords. The keyword TO appears on the main line, indicating that it is required. The keywords FILe and DDName appear on and below the main line, indicating that they are required, mutually exclusive keywords. The variable dd-name also appears on the main line, indicating that it is required. This clause appears below the main line, indicating that it is optional. The keyword WHEre appears on the main line of the clause, indicating that it is required. CCID and PRO are syntax fragments that appear below the main line, indicating that they are optional. The stars () indicate that they are not mutually exclusive. For details on the CCID and PRO fragments, see the bottom of this table. This clause appears below the main line, indicating that it is optional. The keyword OPTion appears on the main line of the clause, indicating that it is required. The keywords CCId, COMment, OVErride SIGNOut, and BYPass ELEment DELete all appear below the main line, indicating that they are optional. The stars () indicate that they are not mutually exclusive.

WHEre clause

OPTion clause

1-30 User Guide

1.9 Syntax Conventions

Syntax CCID fragment

Explanation The keyword CCId appears on the main line, indicating that it is required. The OF clause appears below the main line, indicating that it is optional. If you code this clause, you must code the keyword OF, as it appears on the main line of the clause. CURrent, ALL, and RETrieve appear above, on, and below the main line of the clause, indicating that they are required, mutually exclusive keywords. CURrent appears above the main line, indicating that it is the default. If you code the keyword OF, you must choose one and only one of the keywords. The keywords EQual and = appear above and below the main line, indicating that they are optional, mutually exclusive keywords. EQual appears above the main line, indicating that it is the default. You can include only one. The variable ccid appears on the main line, indicating that it is required. The arrow indicates that you can repeat this variable, separating each instance with a comma. Enclose any and all variables in a single set of parenthesis.

PRO fragment

The keyword PROcessor GROup appears on the main line, indicating that it is required. The keywords EQual and = appear on and below the main line, indicating that they are required, mutually exclusive keywords. You must include one. The variable group name appears on the main line, indicating that it is required. The arrow indicates that you can repeat this variable, separating each instance with a comma. Enclose any and all variables in a single set of parenthesis.

1.9.3 General Coding Information

In coding syntax, you must adhere to certain rules and guidelines regarding valid characters, incompatible commands and clauses, and ending statements. In addition, knowing how the SCL parser processes syntax will help you resolve errors and undesired results. The following sections outline these rules and guidelines.

Chapter 1. Overview 1-31

1.9 Syntax Conventions

1.9.3.1 Valid Characters

The following characters are allowed when coding syntax: Uppercase letters Lowercase letters Numbers National characters Hyphen (-) Underscore (_) The following characters are allowed when coding syntax, but must be enclosed in either single (') or double (") quotation marks: Space Tab New line Carriage return Comma (,) Period (.) Equal sign (=) Greater than sign (>) Less then sign (<) Parenthesis ( ) Single quotation marks Double quotation marks A string containing single quotation marks must be enclosed in double quotation marks. A string containing double quotation marks must be enclosed in single quotation marks. To remove information from an existing field in the database, enclose a blank space in single or double quotation marks. For example, the following statement removes the default CCID for user TCS: DEFINE USER TCS DEFAULT CCID " ". The characters "*" and "%" are reserved for name masking. For more information, see the section Name Masking in this chapter.

1-32 User Guide

1.9 Syntax Conventions

1.9.3.2 Incompatible Commands and Clauses

The following commands and clauses are mutually exclusive: THRough and MEMber clauses within any action except LIST Endevor location information (environment, system, subsystem, type, and stage) and data set names (DSName) File names (DDName) and data set names (DSName) The stage id (STAge / STAge ID) and the stage number (STAge NUMber) The SET TO Endevor location information and the SET TO MEMber clause

1.9.3.3 Ending A Statement

You must enter a period at the end of each statement. If no period is found, you receive an error message and the job terminates.

1.9.3.4 SCL Parsing Information

The SCL parser does not look for information in columns 73-80 of the input. Therefore, be sure that all relevant information is coded in columns 1-72. The SCL parser does not catch duplicate clauses coded for an SCL request. If you code the same clause twice, SCL uses the Boolean "AND" to combine the clauses. If the result is invalid, you receive an error message. If you enter an asterisk (*) in column 1, the remainder of the line is considered a comment by the SCL parser and is ignored during processing. Any value found to the right of the period terminating the SCL statement is considered a comment by the SCL parser and is ignored during processing.

1.9.3.5 SCL Continuation Syntax Rules

SCL keyword parameters cannot span multiple lines; however, the parameter values can span multiple lines. All SCL parameter values that span multiple lines must be enclosed in single or double quotes. The syntax required to span a parameter value must start with a single or double quote at the beginning of the specification and a trailing single or double quote at the end of the value. Spaces at the beginning or end of the spanned lines, must be surrounded by non-blank characters in order to be included in the text string. Example: ADD ELEMENT 'Spanned ElementName' CCID 'CC ID 1' This would result in an element value of "SpannedElementName" and a CCID value of "CCID001".

Chapter 1. Overview 1-33

1.9 Syntax Conventions

1-34 User Guide

Chapter 2. Endevor Basics

Endevor is implemented and run under a valid supported IBM operating system, either in the TSO ISPF environment or in batch. In ISPF, it makes use of standard ISPF facilities whenever possible. The sections on using Endevor panels, getting help, and keyboard functions show you how to navigate through Endevor.

Chapter 2. Endevor Basics 2-1

2.1 Keyboard Functions

From any Endevor ISPF panel, you can use standard ISPF commands and function keys. (For more information on the commands or key assignments, see your ISPF documentation.)

2.1.1 ISPF Commands and Function Keys

The ISPF commands and function keys you can use are shown next: Command ENTER REFRESH HELP END Key Usually Assigned ENTER PA2 PF1 PF3 Used to: Process the panel. Refresh the screen. Expand the abbreviated message displayed in the upper right. Return to the previous logical panel. From the (highest level) Endevor Primary Options Menu panel, return to ISPF or TSO, as appropriate. Return to the ISPF Primary Option Menu. See the section Using the RETURN and JUMP Commands for more information. Scroll up one page to see lines that are not visible at the top of the panel. Scroll down one page to see lines that are not visible at the bottom of the panel. Scroll left. Scroll right.

RETURN

PF4

PF7

DOWN

PF8

LEFT RIGHT

PF10 PF11

2-2 User Guide

2.1 Keyboard Functions

2.1.2 Using the RETURN and JUMP Commands

Individual users can instruct Endevor how to handle ISPF RETURN and JUMP commands. To do so, you provide a value in the INTERCEPT ISPF RETURN CMD field on the Endevor User Defaults panel. (For more information, see chapter Setting User Defaults and Options.) Specify N (no; default) if you do not want Endevor to intercept ISPF RETURN (usually PF4) and JUMP commands. When this option is set to N and you use the RETURN (usually PF4) or JUMP command, Endevor terminates and the ISPF Primary Option Menu appears. Specify Y (yes) if you want Endevor to intercept RETURN and JUMP command processing. When this option is set to Y and you use the RETURN (usually PF4) or JUMP command, the Endevor Primary Options Menu appears rather than the ISPF Primary Option Menu. Usage Notes: Keep the following points in mind when using RETURN or JUMP commands. These notes also apply to PF key assignments and the equal (=) command. 1. If you use RETURN ( usually PF4) or JUMP (=) from the Endevor Primary Options Menu, the ISPF Primary Option Menu appears. 2. When INTERCEPT ISPF RETURN =Y, and you use the RETURN or JUMP command from any Endevor panel other than the Endevor Primary Options Menu, the Endevor Primary Options Menu appears. You can specify any string of options from there. 3. END (PF3) processing is unaffected. The Environment Selection panel displays when you use the END command from the Endevor Primary Options Menu. 4. If you use the JUMP command from within Endevor when INTERCEPT ISPF RETURN = Y, any command you use after the equal sign (=) will be ignored by ISPF. In other words, if you use JUMP from any panel in the Endevor dialog other than the Endevor Primary Options Menu, the Primary Options Menu appears. Note: If you use JUMP from the Endevor Primary Options Menu, you will jump to the desired application, regardless of the INTERCEPT ISPF RETURN option setting.

Chapter 2. Endevor Basics 2-3

2.1 Keyboard Functions

2.1.3 Exiting Endevor

There are several ways to exit Endevor. To terminate the Endevor dialog, you can do the following: Type X in the OPTION field on the Endevor Primary Options Menu to terminate Endevor immediately. When CANCEL RETURN =N, use RETURN or JUMP from any Endevor panel to terminate Endevor immediately. When CANCEL RETURN =N or Y, use RETURN or JUMP from the Endevor Primary Options Menu to terminate Endevor immediately. Type END in the OPTION field on the Endevor Primary Options Menu, then type END, RETURN or JUMP in the OPTION field on the Environment Selection panel.

2-4 User Guide

2.2 Getting Help

Endevor provides three kinds of help: Panel help Message help Tutorials

2.2.1 Panel Help

To access help text about a panel, press Help (PF1) when the panel is displayed, then press Enter.

2.2.2 Message Help

Endevor system messages display to the far right on the first line of a panel. If this abbreviated message is not enough, press HELP (PF1) to expand the message into a full line. The full message displays on the third line of the panel. If you press HELP (PF1) again when a message is displayed, you access panel help.

2.2.3 Foreground Execution Report Message

After you execute a foreground processing request, Endevor sometimes displays the message: Browse userid.C1TEMPRn.Esysid.MSGS where userid.C1TEMPRn.Esysid.MSGS is the name of the file containing the Execution Report for the requested action. The userid statement in the file name will be your ISPF user ID, and the n statement will be a system-assigned number between 1 and 9. The sysid will be the TSO system on which Endevor is executing. To view the Execution Report, type EMSGS (or EM, or TSO %MSGS) in the COMMAND field or use the ISPF Browse facility. To view the Execution Report automatically whenever the return code from an action is greater or equal to a threshold value, enter the threshold in the DISPLAY MSGS WHEN RC GE field of the Endevor User Defaults panel. Whenever the return code from the action processing is greater than or equal to this threshold value, Endevor automatically displays the Execution Report file.

Chapter 2. Endevor Basics 2-5

2.2 Getting Help

2.2.4 Tutorials
To access the Endevor tutorials, type T in the OPTION field on the Endevor Primary Options Menu and press Enter.

2-6 User Guide

2.3 The Primary Options Menu

The Primary Options Menu is the first panel Endevor displays once you have chosen an environment. The selected environment's name appears in the CURRENT ENVIRONMENT field. This section summarizes the options available on this menu, and refers you to detailed discussions of the option in the Endevor documentation.

--------------Option ===> 1 2 3 4 5 6 U T C X

AllFusion Endevor Primary Options Panel -

---------------------

DEFAULTS DISPLAY FOREGROUND BATCH ENVIRONMENT PACKAGE BATCH PACKAGE USER MENU TUTORIAL CHANGES EXIT

Specify Endevor ISPF default parameters Perform Display functions Execute Foreground Actions Perform Batch Action processing Define or Modify Environment information Perform Foreground Package processing Perform Batch Package SCL Generation Display user option menu Display information about Endevor Display summary of changes for this release of Endevor Exit the Endevor dialog

Current environment: Q4 (C) 2 2 Computer Associates International, Inc.

Use the EXIT option to terminate Endevor

Available Options: The following list summarizes the options available on the Primary Options Menu. Note: For security reasons, all of these options may not be available to all users at a site. This Option 0 Defaults Provides Access To... The User Defaults panel, which allows users to specify default data set allocation, print options, and jobcard information. It also allows users to specify whether Endevor must intercept ISPF RETURN or JUMP commands. For more information, see Chapter 3, "Setting User Defaults and Options."

Chapter 2. Endevor Basics 2-7

2.3 The Primary Options Menu

This Option 1 Display

Provides Access To... The Display Options Menu, from which you can display element, footprint, approver group, and other environmental information. The Foreground Options Menu, from which you can request Endevor actions in foreground. The Batch Options Menu, from which you can generate SCL to perform Endevor actions in batch, edit the SCL for these jobs, and to submit them. The Environment Options Menu, from which you can display environment and stage information, and define and maintain systems, subsystems, types, processor groups, processing sequences for types, approver groups and approver group relationships. For more information, see the Administration Guide. The Package Options Menu, from which you can perform Endevor package processing online. For more information, see the Packages Guide. The Batch Package Options Menu, from which you can generate SCL to perform all Endevor package functions in batch, edit the SCL for these jobs, and submit them. The User Options Menu, from which you can build, edit, and submit report JCL in foreground.

2 Foreground

3 Batch

4 Environment

5 Package

6 Batch Package

U User Menu

2-8 User Guide

2.3 The Primary Options Menu

This Option T Tutorial C Changes X Exit

Provides Access To... Endevor tutorials. Summaries of the new features in the current release of Endevor. Exit Endevor. This option returns you to the ISPF/PDF Primary Options Menu.

Note: If you press End to exit Endevor's Primary Options Menu, Endevor redisplays the Environment Selection List. You can select another environment by typing it's number in the OPTION field and pressing Enter, or you can end your Endevor session and return to the ISPF/PDF Primary Options Menu by pressing End a second time.

Chapter 2. Endevor Basics 2-9

2.4 Endevor Panels

Foreground processing in Endevor uses five kinds of panels: Option Menu panels Request panels Definition panels List panels Browse panels Most foreground processing actions use a combination of these five kinds of panels. The next sections describe these panels in detail.

2.4.1 Option Menus

Within a given Endevor environment, there is a hierarchical menu structure. Once you logon, the first menu Endevor displays is the Primary Options Menu, as described in the previous section. Each option on the Primary Options Menu enables you to access a secondary options menu, such as the Foreground Options Menu and the Package Options Menu. The secondary menus provide access to the request and definition panels that you use to perform actions, such as the Add/Update Request panel and the Cast Package panel. For example, if you choose option 1, DISPLAY, on the Primary Options Menu, Endevor displays the Display Options Menu, as shown next:

--------------------------OPTION ===> 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 A E S T ELEMENT FOOTPRINT SITE STAGE SYSTEM SUBSYSTEM TYPE PROCESSOR GROUP APPROVER GROUP RELATE GROUP ENVIRONMENT SITE SYMBOLS TYPE SEQUENCE -

DISPLAY OPTIONS MENU

----------------------------

Display Display Display Display Display Display Display Display Display Display Display Display Display

element/component list information footprinted members and compressed listings site information stage information system definitions subsystem definitions type definitions processor group definitions approver groups inventory area/approver group relationships information about the current environment site symbols definitions site type processing sequence

The first line of an Endevor options menu displays the menu title. System messages appear in the message area to the far right of the title.

2-10 User Guide

2.4 Endevor Panels

The OPTION field appears on the second line of an Endevor menu. Use the OPTION field to select the processing option you want to use, or to specify standard ISPF commands such as END or CANCEL. To select an option, type the appropriate code (1-9, A, or E on the Display Options Menu) in the OPTION field and press Enter.

2.4.2 Request Panels

There are two kinds of Endevor request panels: Action request panels. Information request panels. Both kinds of request panels allow you to specify a processing option and qualifying information. This information is usually the Endevor element(s) that you want to process and/or the current location and target location of the elements to be processed. The next two sections describe these panels in detail.

2.4.3 Action Request Panels

You use action request panels to request Endevor actions such as ADD, MOVE or DELETE. You access request panels from the Foreground, Batch, Package, and Batch Package Option Menus. The following figure shows a typical action request panel:

---------------------------OPTION ===> blank - Member list TO Endevor: ENVIRONMENT SYSTEM SUBSYSTEM ELEMENT TYPE COMMENT ===> DEMO ===> FINANCE ===> ACCTREC ===> ===> ===>

ADD/UPDATE ELEMENTS A - Add an element

------------------------U - Update an element ===> ===> ===> ===> ===> ===> ===>

ACTION OPTIONS: CCID GENERATE ELEMENT DELETE INPUT SOURCE NEW VERSION OVERRIDE SIGNOUT PROCESSOR GROUP UPDATE IF PRESENT

Y (Y/N) N (Y/N) N (Y/N) N (Y/N)

FROM ISPF LIBRARY: PROJECT ===> BST LIBRARY ===> C1DEMO TYPE ===> CNTL MEMBER ===>

LIST OPTIONS: DISPLAY LIST ===> Y (Y/N) THRU MEMBER ===>

FROM OTHER PARTITIONED OR SEQUENTIAL DATA SET: DATA SET NAME ===>

The first line of an Endevor request panel displays the menu title. System messages appear in the message area to the right of the title.

Chapter 2. Endevor Basics 2-11

2.4 Endevor Panels

The OPTION field appears on the second line of an Endevor request panel. To select an option, type the appropriate option code (Blank, A or U on this panel) in the OPTION field and press Enter. You can qualify your request by entering some or all of the information in the target (TO Endevor) and source (FROM ISPF LIBRARY) fields. The panel that appears next depends on how you complete the request panel, as follows: If you specify all of the information necessary to request a Endevor action, then Endevor executes the request when you press ENTER. If you do not provide all the necessary information, Endevor displays one or more list panels that allow you to complete the specification, then executes the request. To cancel the request and return to the previous panel, press End.

2.4.4 Information Request Panels

You use information request panels to identify components (system, subsystem, type, processor group, or stage) of Endevor environments that you want to display or change. Display and environment definition processing use this kind of request panel. You access information request panels from the Environment Options Menu. The following figure shows a typical information request panel:

----------------------------OPTION ===> blank - Display # - Delete type C - Create type U - Update type

TYPE REQUEST

-------------------------------

type definition definition definition definition

ENVIRONMENT ===> DOC SYSTEM TYPE STAGE ===> ADMIN ===> PROCESS ===> A A - TEST B - PROD

You can qualify your request by entering some or all of the information in the panel fields, as follows: If you specify all of the information necessary to identify a component of an Endevor environment, then Endevor displays a definition panel when you press Enter. If you do not completely identify a component, Endevor displays one or more list panels that allow you to complete the specification, then displays a definition panel.

2-12 User Guide

2.4 Endevor Panels

2.4.5 Definition Panels

You can use definition panels to: Display current information. You cannot change the information on the panel when you use a definition panel this way. Create new objects. Update existing objects. Delete existing objects. The following figure shows a Type definition panel:

DISPLAY ---------------------COMMAND ===> CURRENT ENV: NEXT ENV: DESCRIPTION: UPDATED: QA1 QA1

TYPE DEFINITION 1 B SYSTEM: SYSTEM:

-----------------------------PDS PDS TYPE: TYPE: COBOL COBOL

STAGE ID: STAGE ID:

COBOL TYPE WITH PROCESSOR 3MAY 2 9:59 BY MONJO 6B ----------------- ELEMENT OPTIONS ------------------FWD/REV/IMG DELTA: R (F/R/I) COMPRESS BASE/ENCRYPT NAME: Y (Y/N) DFLT PROC GRP: COBOUT REGRESSION PCT: REGR SEV: I (I/W/C/E) SOURCE LENGTH: 8 COMPARE FROM: 7 COMPARE TO: 72 AUTO CONSOL: Y LANGUAGE: COBOL PV/LB LANG: COBOL REMOVE/CONSOL AT LVL: 96 HFS RECFM: (COMP/CR/CRLF/F/LF/NL/V) LVLS TO REMOVE/CONSOL: 5 DATA FORMAT: B FILE EXT: aTzATZ 9 ------------- COMPONENT LIST OPTIONS ---------------FWD/REV DELTA: F (F/R) AUTO CONSOL: Y (Y/N) CONSOL AT LVL: 96 LVLS TO CONSOL: 5 -------------------LIBRARIES --------------------BASE/IMAGE LIBRARY: BST.&C1EN.&C1ST1..&C1SY..&C1TY..PERM.BASE DELTA LIBRARY: BST.&C1EN.&C1ST1..&C1SY..&C1TY..PERM.DLTA INCLUDE LIBRARY: BST.&C1EN.&C1ST1..&C1SY..&C1TY..PERM.INCL SOURCE O/P LIBRARY: BST.&C1EN.&C1ST1..&C1SY..&C1TY..PERM.OUTP EXPAND INCLUDES: N (Y/N)

The first line of an Endevor definition panel displays three items: a processing indicator (DISPLAY, CREATE, UPDATE, or DELETE) appears to the left; the menu title appears in the center; and a message area appears to the right of the title. The COMMAND field appears on the second line of an Endevor definition panel. In keeping with standard ISPF operation, you can enter single commands at the prompt, or you can stack commands to facilitate screen navigation through Endevor panels. For example, if you are using the Type Definition panel and want to access the Add/Update panel, you must press End repeatedly until you reach the Primary Options panel. From there you would select the FOREGROUND option, and then the ADD/UPDATE option.

Chapter 2. Endevor Basics 2-13

2.4 Endevor Panels

The following command stack, however, would bring you immediately to the Add/Update panel: COMMAND===>END;END;END;2;2 For information about the COMMAND field and command stacking, see your ISPF documentation. The rest of a definition panel displays existing information about the system, subsystem, or type you have specified. If you have selected the CREATE option, the definition panel displays default information. You must enter information in the remaining appropriate fields. If you have selected the DISPLAY or DELETE options, existing information about the system, subsystem, or type displays. You cannot change any of this information. If you have selected the UPDATE option, existing information about the system, subsystem, or type displays. You can change this information. To cancel a request or return to the previous panel, press End.

2.4.6 List Panels

You use list panels to select an environment, and systems, subsystems, types, elements, members, or processor groups when specifying a Endevor action request. Note: Endevor supports the Locate command on Element and Member Selection lists. List panels display when you do not specify the requested information on information or action request panels, or specify the information using a name mask. If you do not specify the requested information, the list panel displays all the environments, systems, subsystems, types, or processor groups that have been defined. If you specify the requested information using a name mask, the list panel displays all names that meet the name mask criteria. For more information on specifying a mask character, see Name Masking in this chapter. You can select one or more items on these list panels for processing. When you select more than one item, Endevor processes them consecutively.

2-14 User Guide

2.4 Endevor Panels

The following example illustrates the selection list panel that would be displayed if you entered a panel without specifying a system.

-------------------------COMMAND ===> CURRENT ENV: NEXT ENV: SYSTEM ADMIN ADMINAW FINANCE TESTING VAUGHAN DEMO

SYSTEM SELECTION LIST

----------- ROW 1 OF 13 SCROLL ===> PAGE

SYSTEM TITLE ADMINISTRATION OF Endevor - PROCS,TOOLS ETC... ADMINISTRATION OF Endevor - PROCS,TOOLS ETC... FINANCIAL CONTROL SYSTEMS TEST FOR BT ACCOUNTING SYSTEM BOTTOM OF DATA

The first line of a list panel displays: The panel title, centered, which describes the contents of the list. The amount of information shown on the current panel. This is identified on the far right of line 1, using one of the following formats: LINE nnnnnn COL nnn nnn ROW n of nn Identifies the starting line and the column range displayed. or Identifies the starting row and the total number of rows in the list.

The second line of a list panel displays: The COMMAND===> prompt. For more information about the COMMAND field, see your ISPF documentation. The scroll amount. If the scroll amount is set to "PAGE," you can press UP to scroll back one page, or DOWN to scroll forward one page. When a list panel appears, select the list item(s) you want to process. To do this, type an S (or other character specific to the panel) in the far left column, next to the name. Then press Enter to continue. The following message marks the end of the list: BOTTOM OF DATA

Chapter 2. Endevor Basics 2-15

2.4 Endevor Panels

2.4.7 Browse Panels

You use browse panels to review Endevor element information before executing an Endevor action. You can access a browse panel from the ISPF Primary Options Menu, many of the action request panels, and many of the display panels. You cannot change information on a browse panel. The following figure shows an Element Browse panel.

BROWSE -- ZSXJXM2.C1TEMPR.LIST -------------------- LINE COMMAND ===> TOP OF DATA

COL 1 8 SCROLL ===> PAGE

ELEMENT BROWSE ENVIRONMENT: DOC ELEMENT: PROCXREF SIGNED OUT TO:USER 1 SYSTEM: ADMIN TYPE: PROCESS

8FEB 1 16:2 SUBSYSTEM: STAGE ID: STANDARD 1

------------------------- SOURCE LEVEL INFORMATION ------------------------VV.LL SYNC USER DATE TIME STMTS CCID COMMENT ----- ---- -------- ------- ----- ----- ------------ ----------------------1. ZSXLDG1 1 JAN 1 15:37 6 ADDING A PROCESSOR GENERATED ZSXLDG1 1 JAN 1 15:37 6 ............ ADDING A PROCESSOR + // + // THIS PROCESSOR IS EXECUTED WHEN A JCL PROC IS CHANGED. IT WILL + // CREATE A LIST OF ALL JCL ELEMENTS THAT EXECUTE THE PROC AND STORE

The first line of a browse panel displays: The panel title, which describes the contents of the list. The processing indicator "BROWSE," which appears to the left of the panel title. The amount of information shown on the current panel. This is identified on the far right of line 1, using one of the following formats: LINE nnnnnn COL nnn nnn ROW n of nn Identifies the starting line and the column range displayed. or Identifies the starting row and the total number of rows in the list.

2-16 User Guide

2.4 Endevor Panels

2.4.8 Example of Panel Interaction

You may use all five kinds of panels in a typical Endevor session. The following example shows you how to access the Move Elements panel, from which you might want to move certain elements from Stage 1 to Stage 2. The example assumes that you have access to more than one environment. Move elements, example of 1. Access the ISPF/PDF Primary Option Panel according to the procedures used at your site and select Endevor. Endevor displays the Environment Selection Panel.
-------- Endevor Environment Selection -------------Option ===> ROW 1 TO 19 OF 2 Scroll ===> PAGE

Select an environment to continue. Enter the END command to exit. -- ----------------------------------------------1 DEV Development Environment 2 QAS Quality Assurance Testing

2. Select the environment in which you want to work by typing the environment number in the OPTION field and pressing ENTER. Endevor displays the Primary Options Menu.
--------------Option ===> 1 2 3 4 5 6 U T C X AllFusion Endevor Primary Options Panel ---------------------

DEFAULTS DISPLAY FOREGROUND BATCH ENVIRONMENT PACKAGE BATCH PACKAGE USER MENU TUTORIAL CHANGES EXIT

Current environment: Q4 (C) 2 2 Computer Associates International, Inc.

Use the EXIT option to terminate Endevor

Chapter 2. Endevor Basics 2-17

2.4 Endevor Panels

3. Select Option 2, FOREGROUND ACTIONS, by typing 2 in the OPTIONS field and pressing Enter. Endevor displays the Foreground Options Menu.
------------------------OPTION ===> 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 DISPLAY ADD/UPDATE RETRIEVE GENERATE MOVE DELETE PRINT SIGNIN FOREGROUND OPTIONS MENU ----------------------

Display an element Add or update an element into entry stage Retrieve or copy an element Execute the Generate Processor for this element Move an element to the next inventory location Delete an element Print elements, changes and detail change history Explicitly sign-in an element

4. Select MOVE by typing 5 in the OPTION field and pressing ENTER. Endevor displays the Move Elements panel.
------------------------------OPTION ===> blank - Element list O - Move element FROM Endevor: ENVIRONMENT SYSTEM SUBSYSTEM ELEMENT TYPE STAGE Q COMMENT ===> ===> ===> ===> ===> ===> QA ===> LIST OPTIONS: DISPLAY LIST WHERE CCID EQ WHERE PROC GRP EQ BUILD USING MAP ===> Y (Y/N) ===> ===> ===> N (Y/N) DEMO INTERNAL NEWTPE D P - PROD MOVE ELEMENTS ---------------------------H - History

ELEMENT DISPLAY OPTIONS: S - Summary B - Browse M - Master C - Changes

ACTION OPTIONS: CCID SYNC WITH HISTORY RETAIN SIGNOUT SIGNOUT TO ACKNOWLEDGE ELM JUMP DELETE 'FROM' ELEMENT

===> ===> ===> ===> ===> ===> ===>

N (Y/N) N (Y/N) N (Y/N) N (Y/N) N (Y/N)

From the Move Elements panel you can: Execute the move request by filling in the FROM Endevor, LIST OPTIONS, and ACTION OPTIONS fields as necessary. Access any combination of the following kinds of panels to assist you in specifying your request: List panels (system, subsystem, type, and/or processor group selection lists) to assist you in specifying your request. Browse panels for the element(s) you select. Definition panels (Summary of Levels, Element Master, Changes, Element History) to verify information before executing your request.

2-18 User Guide

2.4 Endevor Panels

2.4.9 Panel Field Values

When you enter values in the fields on Endevor panels, Endevor uses that information to set the default values for those fields. When the same fields appear on subsequent panels, Endevor fills in the default value. To specify a new default for that field, type over the current default and submit the request. All default values remain in effect for the session. In addition, some field values are saved in an ISPF variable pool, and remain in effect from session to session. Whether this occurs depends on the panel field. For example, the values for the FROM and TO fields, such as system, subsystem, type and stage, are saved between sessions. But action option fields such as OVERRIDE SIGNOUT and DELETE INPUT SOURCE are reset to the system default values when you begin a new session.

Chapter 2. Endevor Basics 2-19

2.5 Name Masking

Endevor's name masking capabilities support the use of both the asterisk (*) as a wildcard character and the percent sign (%) as a placeholder character. Use the asterisk to specify all names, or all names beginning with a particular character string. Use the percent sign as a substitute for a single character in a name.

2.5.1 Where Name Masking is Valid

You can use the name masks on ISPF panels, in SCL, report syntax, and API requests. Enter the asterisk or percent sign in any of the eligible fields, including element name, system name, subsystem name, type name, and stage. Name masks are valid on: Element names System, subsystem, and type names within FROM clauses RESTRICT and REMOVE RESTRICTION clauses of the DEFINE CCID and DEFIN SECURITY CLASS statements Report syntax ISPF panels API requests CSV SCL requests Package IDs Historical report environment names Name masks are not valid on: Environment names, except in the following situations: API and CSV SCL requests and on requests for historical reports in the LIST action's FROM ENVIRONMENT field of the WHERE COMPONENETS EQUAL clause. Element names in the following situations: When entering a LEVel in a statement When using the MEMber clause with a particular action When building a package

2-20 User Guide

2.5 Name Masking

2.5.2 How to Use Name Masking

There are three ways to mask names: by using the wildcard character (*), by using the placeholder character (%), and by using both together. Use a wildcard (*) only The wildcard (*) can be used in one of two ways to specify external file names: When coded as the only character of a search string, Endevor returns all members of the search field. For example, if you coded the statement ADD ELEMENT *, all elements would be added. When coded as the last character of a search string, Endevor returns all members of the search field beginning with the characters in the search string preceding the wildcard. For example: The statement ADD ELEMENT UPD* would add all elements beginning with "UPD", such as UPDATED or UPDATE. PKG* would return all package IDs beginning with PKG. Note: You cannot use more than one wildcard in a string. The statement ADD ELEMENT U*PD* would result in an error. Use placeholders (%) only The placeholder (%), which represents any single character in a string, can also be used in one of two ways: When coded as the last character in a string, Endevor returns all members of the search field, beginning with the characters in the search string preceding the placeholder, but which have no more characters than were coded in the search string. If you coded the statement ADD ELEMENT UPD%, only those elements with four-character-long names beginning with "UPD" (UPD1 or UPDA, for example) would be added. PKG% returns PKGS, PKGB, PKGC, and so on. It is also possible to use the placeholder multiple times in a single search string. The statement ADD ELEMENT U%PD% would return all elements with five-character-long names that have U as the first character, and PD third and fourth. Use a wildcard and placeholder together The wildcard and the placeholder can be used together, provided that the wildcard appears only at the end of the search string and is used only once. For example: The statement ADD ELEMENT U%D*, which uses both the wildcard and the placeholder, would add elements with names of any length that have U as the first character, any one character as the second character, and D as the third character. P%G* returns PKGABCD, POGS, PIGGY, PPG1234NDVR, and so on.

Chapter 2. Endevor Basics 2-21

2.6 Initiating Actions

You can perform four different types of action processing from the Endevor Primary Options Menu: Option 2, FOREGROUND, enables you to execute foreground actions. Option 3, BATCH, enables you to generate SCL to perform actions in batch. Option 5, PACKAGE, enables you to perform package processing. Option 6, BATCH PACKAGE, enables you to generate SCL to perform package functions in batch. This section provides an overview of all four processing options.

2.6.1 Foreground Processing

From the Primary Options Menu, select option 2, FOREGROUND, to access the Foreground Options Menu.

-------------------------OPTION ===> 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 DISPLAY ADD/UPDATE RETRIEVE GENERATE MOVE DELETE PRINT SIGNIN -

FOREGROUND OPTIONS MENU

-----------------------

2-22 User Guide

2.6 Initiating Actions

2.6.2 Batch Processing

From the Primary Options Menu, select option 3, BATCH, to access the Batch Options Menu.

BATCH ----------------------OPTION ===> 1 2 3 4 5 BUILD SCL EDIT SUBMIT VALIDATE BUILD JCL -

BATCH OPTIONS MENU

----------------------------

Build batch SCL actions Edit request data set Submit job for batch processing Check request data set for syntax errors Enter additional JCL to be included with the job APPEND ===> N (Y/N) INCLUDE JCL ===> N (Y/N) <<< This field is for the scl only

REQUEST DATA SET: PROJECT ===> BST GROUP ===> DOC TYPE ===> JCLLIB MEMBER ===>

OTHER PARTITIONED OR SEQUENTIAL DATA SET: DSNAME ===> JOB STATEMENT INFORMATION: ===> ===> ===> ===>

2.6.3 Package Processing

From the Primary Options Menu, select option 5, PACKAGE, to access the Package Options Menu.

---------------------- Package Foreground Options Menu -----------------------Option ===> 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 DISPLAY CREATE/MODIFY CAST REVIEW EXECUTE SHIP BACKOUT COMMIT UTILITIES Display Package Information Create or Modify Package Prepare Package for Review Approve or Deny Package Submit or Execute Package Ship Packages Perform Backout or Backin Processing Clear Backout Information Reset, Delete, or Export Package

Package ID ===> Limit selection list options. These options are used by the DISPLAY and UTILITIES functions: In-Edit......... In-Approval..... Denied.......... Approved........ Y Y Y Y In-Execution.... Executed........ Committed....... Enterprise Pkg.. Y Y Y A

Chapter 2. Endevor Basics 2-23

2.6 Initiating Actions

2.6.4 Batch Package Processing

From the Primary Options Menu, select option 6, BATCH PACKAGE, to access the Batch Package Options Menu.

------------------------------- Batch Package ------------------------------Command ==> Enter the SCL data set name and select an action: _ 1. Build SCL 2. Edit SCL 5. Build Additional JCL 3. Browse SCL 6. Submit JCL

SCL data set name: Project.. ________ Group.... ________ Type..... ________ Member... ________ Other sequential or partitioned data set: Data set name.. _____________________________________________________ SCL processing options: Append to existing SCL.. _ (Y/N) Include additional JCL.. _ (Y/N) JCL JOB statements _________________________________________________________________________ _________________________________________________________________________ _________________________________________________________________________ _________________________________________________________________________

For more information on packages, see the Packages Guide.

2-24 User Guide

Chapter 3. Setting User Defaults and Options

This chapter describes how to set user defaults and add user options to Endevor.

Chapter 3. Setting User Defaults and Options 3-1

3.1 Setting User Defaults

This section describes how to set user defaults.

3.1.1 The Endevor User Defaults Panel

When you type 0 in the OPTION field of the Primary Options Menu and press Enter, Endevor displays the User Defaults panel.

UPDATE ----------------COMMAND ===>

ENDEVOR USER DEFAULTS

------------------------------

WORK DATASET ALLOCATION INFORMATION: LIST DATASET ALLOCATION INFORMATION: PRIMARY QUANTITY ===> 1 PRIMARY QUANTITY ===> 1 SECONDARY QUANTITY ===> 1 SECONDARY QUANTITY ===> 1 SPACE UNITS ===> CYL (TRK/CYL/BLK) UNIT NAME ===> SYSDA VOLUME SERIAL ===> (BLANK FOR DEFAULT) PRINT OPTIONS: SYSOUT CLASS LINES PER PAGE ===> ===> 6 FOREGROUND OPTIONS: DISPLAY MSGS WHEN RC GE INTERCEPT ISPF RETURN CMD ISPF BROWSE OR VIEW MODE ===> ===> N ===> B

JOB STATEMENT INFORMATION: ===> //JOBNAME JOB (ACCOUNT) ===> // ===> // ===> //

Use the User Defaults panel to: Allocate space for work and browse data sets used in foreground processing. Define printer output class and page size settings for use in foreground processing. Set a threshold return code above which the Execution Report for actions requested in foreground will display automatically. Record jobcard settings for use when submitting batch print jobs. Specify whether Endevor is to intercept ISPF RETURN and JUMP commands.

3.1.2 Setting and Saving User Defaults

These default specifications remain in effect until you change them again in this session or a subsequent session. Allocation information should be set initially for each user ID, and need not be changed unless there are considerations specific to your site that warrant the change.

3-2 User Guide

3.1 Setting User Defaults

Once you identify the defaults you want, press Enter to save your default values. To cancel the request and return to your previous defaults, press End. In either case, Endevor returns to the Primary Options panel.

3.1.3 Work Data Set Allocation Information Fields

The work data set allocation information fields contain information to define the default allocation for your work areas. Field Primary Quantity Description Number of units of space (defined by SPACE UNITS, below) in the primary allocation. Number of units of space in each secondary allocation. Units in which space is allocated: Tracks (TRK) Cylinders (CYL) Blocks (BLK) Unit Name Descriptive name of the disk device. You can specify any value appropriate in the UNIT= parameter of DD (JCL) statements at your site. Volume serial number of the specific device you want to use for your work areas. Leave blank to use the installation default.

Secondary Quantity Space Units

Volume Serial

3.1.4 List Data Set Allocation Information Fields

The list data set allocation information fields contain information to define the primary and secondary allocations for your foreground print requests. All other specifications are assumed to be the same as those set for the Work Data Set Allocation Information. Field Primary Quantity Secondary Quantity Description Number of units of space (defined by SPACE UNITS) in the primary allocation. Number of units of space in each secondary allocation.

Chapter 3. Setting User Defaults and Options 3-3

3.1 Setting User Defaults

3.1.5 Print Options Fields

The Print Options fields contain information to define the default printer output class and page size. Field SYSOUT Class Lines Per Page Description Default SYSOUT class to which your printed output is routed. Number of lines per page for printed output.

3.1.6 Foreground Options

Use these fields to set a threshold return code above which the Execution Report for actions requested in foreground will display automatically, and to specify whether Endevor will intercept and cancel the RETURN operation to ISPF. Field Display MSGS When RC GE Description This return code establishes a threshold. Whenever the return code from a foreground processing action (Primary Options Menu, option 2) is greater than or equal to this threshold value, Endevor automatically displays the Execution Report file for that action. Acceptable values for this field are 00, 04, 08, 12, 16. The default return code is 12.

3-4 User Guide

3.1 Setting User Defaults

Field Intercept ISPF Return CMD

Description This option enables individual users to instruct Endevor how to handle the ISPF RETURN and JUMP commands. Modifications to this field will take effect as soon as you return to the Endevor Primary Options Menu. Specify N (no; default) if you do not want Endevor to intercept ISPF RETURN (usually PF4) and JUMP commands. When this option is set to N and you use the RETURN (PF4) or JUMP command, Endevor will terminate and the ISPF Primary Option Menu will appear. Specify Y (yes) if you want Endevor to "cancel" RETURN and JUMP command processing. When this option is set to Y and you use the RETURN (usually PF4) or JUMP command, the Endevor Primary Options Menu will appear rather than the ISPF Primary Option Menu. For more details about this option, see Using the RETURN and JUMP Commands in Chapter, "Endevor Basics."

ISPF BROWSE OR VIEW MODE

This option determines whether the Endevor Browse function presents information in ISPF view or browse mode. Specify B for browse (the default), or specify V for view.

3.1.7 Job Statement Information Fields

The Job Statement Information fields allow you to enter jobcard settings for use with jobs submitted in batch. Enter all jobcard parameters, including the job name, time, message parameters, remote print information, and any other standards in use at your installation.

Chapter 3. Setting User Defaults and Options 3-5

3.2 Adding User Options

This section describes how to add user-defined functions to Endevor. The Endevor User Options Menu: The User Options Menu facility allows the Endevor administrator to attach user-defined functions to the Endevor TSO/ISPF front end. When you type U in the OPTION field of the Primary Options Menu and press Enter, Endevor displays the User Options Menu.

------------------------Option ===> 1 2 3 REPORTS ACMQ DB2 BATCH

Endevor User Options Menu

-------------------------

- Build Endevor Report Requests - Endevor ACM Query Facility - Endevor for DB2 Batch Processing

Enter END to return to the Endevor Primary Options Menu

The User Options Menu facility comes with the capability to build, in foreground, Endevor report jobs for execution in batch. For details on how to build report JCL, see the Reports Guide. You may define additional options that you want to appear on the User Options Menu. The Administration Guide explains how to customize the User Options Menu facility.

3-6 User Guide

Chapter 4. Foreground and Batch Processing

This chapter describes the Foreground Options Menu, Batch Options Menu, Confirmation panel, Selection Lists, Action Prompt panel, and the Batch Execution Report.

Chapter 4. Foreground and Batch Processing 4-1

4.1 Action Processing Selection

You perform action processing using the FOREGROUND and BATCH options on the Primary Options Menu. These options are shown in the following panel:

--------------Option ===> 1 2 3 4 5 6 U T C X

AllFusion Endevor Primary Options Panel -

---------------------

DEFAULTS DISPLAY FOREGROUND BATCH ENVIRONMENT PACKAGE BATCH PACKAGE USER MENU TUTORIAL CHANGES EXIT

Current environment: Q4 (C) 2 2 Computer Associates International, Inc.

Use the EXIT option to terminate Endevor

When you use... Foreground processing Batch processing

Your Endevor requests are... Performed online (except for the PRINT option). Placed in a request data set and submitted for processing at a later time.

4-2 User Guide

4.2 The Foreground Options Menu Panel

When you select option 2, FOREGROUND, from the Primary Options Menu, Endevor displays the Foreground Options Menu, which lists the actions that can be performed in foreground mode. Note: Due to the security options in effect at your installation, not all actions may be available to you in foreground. Therefore, your Foreground Options Menu may differ from the menu shown and discussed on the following pages.

-------------------------OPTION ===> 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 DISPLAY ADD/UPDATE RETRIEVE GENERATE MOVE DELETE PRINT SIGNIN -

FOREGROUND OPTIONS MENU

-----------------------

Options: Select the action you want to perform by typing the action's number in the OPTION field and pressing Enter. Use this option 1 Display 2 Add/Update 3 Retrieve 4 Generate 5 Move 6 Delete 7 Print To: Display element information. Add or update an element. Copy an element to a user data set. Generate an element. Move an element. Remove an element and/or an element component list from Endevor. Print any of several detailed element reports showing the content of the element, the history of the element, or changes made to the element. Remove a signout ID from an element.

8 Signin

Chapter 4. Foreground and Batch Processing 4-3

4.3 The Batch Options Menu Panel

When you select option 3, BATCH, from the Primary Options Menu, Endevor displays the Batch Options Menu.

BATCH ----------------------OPTION ===> 1 2 3 4 5 BUILD SCL EDIT SUBMIT VALIDATE BUILD JCL -

BATCH OPTIONS MENU

--------------------------

REQUEST DATA SET: PROJECT ===> BST GROUP ===> SUPPORT TYPE ===> SRCLIB MEMBER ===>

OTHER PARTITIONED OR SEQUENTIAL DATA SET: DSNAME ===> JOB STATEMENT INFORMATION: ===> ===> ===> ===>

4.3.1 Options
Select the action you want to perform by typing the action's number in the OPTION field and pressing Enter. Use this option 1 Build SCL To: Create action (SCL) requests and place them in a request data set. You can display element information before creating action requests that relate to the element. Edit a request data set, either to change existing requests or to add new requests. Submit a job that will execute the action requests in batch. Before submitting the job, you can use option 5 to specify DD statements to be included with the job. Validate the SCL syntax in the request data set. Endevor will edit the request to see if proper SCL syntax conventions are followed. Define JCL (generally DD statements) to be included with the JCL submitted in option 3.

2 Edit 3 Submit

4 Validate

5 Build JCL

4-4 User Guide

4.3 The Batch Options Menu Panel

4.3.2 Creating Batch Requests

To create Endevor action requests (such as ADD or UPDATE) for batch processing you need an allocated partitioned or sequential data set. After you have allocated the data set, go to the Batch Options Menu. Select option 1, BUILD SCL, specify the data set name, and press Enter. You can also specify the following information: Field Request Data Set Description Use these fields to define the data set to which you want to write the action requests. This data set must be a partitioned data set or a sequential file, and must be allocated prior to referencing it on this panel. As an alternative, you can use the OTHER PARTITIONED OR SEQUENTIAL DATA SET field. Append Use this field to indicate whether you want to add new requests to the end of an existing data set or library member Y (yes) or overwrite any data currently in the data set or library member N (no). The default is N. Use this field to indicate whether you want to include JCL in addition to the standard execution JCL. Acceptable values are: N-- Default. Do not include additional JCL. Y-- Include additional JCL. This JCL must already have been defined. This is used in conjunction with Option 5 - Build JCL. STOPRC Use this field to insert a SET STOPRC value. Valid values range from 4 to 99. Changing the STOPRC value on the panel will override the system default value of 16. Endevor will stop processing actions when a previous action has a return code equal to or higher than the defined STOPRC. Note: If you append SCL to existing SCL and the existing SCL already contains a SET STOPRC card, then this option will not modify the existing SET STOPRC card. Other Partitioned or Sequential Data Set Use this field to define the data set by entering the appropriate data set name (and member, if a library) in the following format: 'dataset(member)'.

Include JCL

Chapter 4. Foreground and Batch Processing 4-5

4.3 The Batch Options Menu Panel

Field Job Statement Information

Description These fields allow you to provide jobcard settings for submitting batch jobs. Provide all jobcard parameters, including job name, time, message parameters, remote print information, and any other standards in use at your site.

4.3.2.1 SCL Generation Panel

When you select option 1 and press Enter, Endevor displays the SCL Generation panel. This panel allows you to select the type of action request you want to generate, or to request an element display. The request data set and append information defined on the Batch Options Menu appear at the bottom of the screen.

-----------------------------OPTION ===> 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 1 11 12 13

SCL GENERATION

-----------------------------

DISPLAY - Display an element ADD/UPDATE - Add or update an element into entry stage RETRIEVE - Retrieve or copy an element GENERATE - Execute the Generate Processor for this element MOVE - Move an element to the next inventory location DELETE - Delete an element PRINT ELEMENT - Print elements, changes and detail change history SIGNIN - Explicitly sign-in an element TRANSFER - Transfer elements between two ENDEVOR locations PRINT MEMBER - Print a compressed listing or member LIST ELEMENT - Create List actions for ENDEVOR elements LIST MEMBER - Create List actions for external members ARCHIVE - Archive elements REQUEST DATA SET: BST.SUPPORT.SRCLIB(SCL) APPEND: Y

4.3.2.2 SCL Generation Panel Options

Specify the option number that corresponds to the action you wish to perform. Your choices are as follows: Use this option 1 Display 2 Add/Update 3 Retrieve 4 Generate 5 Move To Display element information before writing action requests for the element. Add or update elements. Copy elements to a user data set. Generate elements. Move elements from one map location to another.

4-6 User Guide

4.3 The Batch Options Menu Panel

Use this option 6 Delete 7 Print Element

To Remove elements and/or element component lists from either stage. Print any of several detailed element reports showing element source, the history of the element, changes made to the element, summary of levels for the element, or Master Control File information about the element. Remove signout IDs from elements. Move elements from a map location to a location not on the map. Print or browse footprinted members from a library. List elements from the Master Control File, where the list takes the form of action requests. List or browse footprinted members from a library. Again, the list takes the form of action requests. Write the current version of elements to a sequential file (known as an archive data set), generally deleting it following the archive.

8 Signin 9 Transfer 10 Print Member 11 List Element 12 List Member 13 Archive

After you press Enter, Endevor displays the appropriate action panel.

4.3.3 Editing Batch Requests

To edit an existing request data set, select option 2, EDIT, from the Batch Options Menu. EDIT uses the standard ISPF Edit facility. When you select EDIT, you must also specify the data set you want to edit using the REQUEST DATA SET or OTHER PARTITIONED OR SEQUENTIAL DATA SET fields on the Batch Options Menu. Note: The ISPF Edit Recovery facility is not available for this function. If your TSO session crashes, then any changes made, but not saved, will be lost. You can, however use the ISPF/PDF Edit RECOVERY ON/OFF command to control whether a recovery data set is associated with the element. The RECOVERY ON command is used in conjunction with the UNDO Edit command.

Chapter 4. Foreground and Batch Processing 4-7

4.3 The Batch Options Menu Panel

A sample Batch Options Menu is shown next:

BATCH ----------------------OPTION ===> 2 1 2 3 4 5 BUILD SCL EDIT SUBMIT VALIDATE BUILD JCL -

BATCH OPTIONS MENU

-------------------------

REQUEST DATA SET: PROJECT ===> BST GROUP ===> SUPPORT TYPE ===> SRCLIB MEMBER ===>

OTHER PARTITIONED OR SEQUENTIAL DATA SET: DSNAME ===> JOB STATEMENT INFORMATION: ===> ===> ===> ===>

After you have specified the data set, press Enter. Endevor displays an edit panel showing the contents of the data set.

EDIT ---- BST.C1DEMO.SCL ------------------------------------ COLUMNS 1 72 COMMAND ===> SCROLL ===> PAGE TOP OF DATA 1 ADD ELEMENT 'BC1JACCT' 2 FROM DSNAME 'BST.C1DEMO.CNTL' 3 TO ENVIRONMENT 'DEMO' SYSTEM 'FINANCE' SUBSYSTEM 'ACCTREC' 4 TYPE 'COPYBOOK' 5 OPTIONS CCID 'SAMDEMO' COMMENTS 'ADDING BATCH' 6 UPDATE 7 . 8 ADD ELEMENT 'BC1JCMPR' 9 FROM DSNAME 'BST.C1DEMO.CNTL' 1 TO ENVIRONMENT 'DEMO' SYSTEM 'FINANCE' SUBSYSTEM 'ACCTREC' 11 TYPE 'COPYBOOK' 12 OPTIONS CCID 'SAMDEMO' COMMENTS 'ADDING BATCH' 13 UPDATE 14 . 15 ADD ELEMENT 'BC1JDEFT' 16 FROM DSNAME 'BST.C1DEMO.CNTL' 17 TO ENVIRONMENT 'DEMO' SYSTEM 'FINANCE' SUBSYSTEM 'ACCTREC' 18 TYPE 'COPYBOOK' 19 OPTIONS CCID 'SAMDEMO' COMMENTS 'ADDING BATCH' 2 UPDATE 21 .

Use this panel to review the action requests in the data set, or to modify the data set. For additional information about coding the batch requests, see the SCL Reference Guide.

4-8 User Guide

4.3 The Batch Options Menu Panel

4.3.4 Submitting Batch Jobs

To submit a job that executes action requests in batch, select option 3, SUBMIT, from the Batch Options Menu. Before submitting the job, you can: Validate the request data set using option 4, VALIDATE. Specify DD statements to be included with the job using option 5, BUILD JCL. When you select option 3, you must specify the data set containing the Endevor actions that you want to process in either the REQUEST DATA SET or OTHER PARTITIONED OR SEQUENTIAL DATA SET fields, as described next.
BATCH ----------------------OPTION ===> 3 1 2 3 4 5 BUILD SCL EDIT SUBMIT VALIDATE BUILD JCL BATCH OPTIONS MENU ------------------------

Build batch SCL actions Edit request data set Submit job for batch processing Check request data set for syntax errors Enter additional JCL to be included with the job APPEND ===> Y (Y/N) INCLUDE JCL ===> N (Y/N)

REQUEST DATA SET: PROJECT ===> BST GROUP ===> SUPPORT TYPE ===> SRCLIB MEMBER ===>

OTHER PARTITIONED OR SEQUENTIAL DATA SET: DSNAME ===> 'BST.C1DEMO.SCL' JOB STATEMENT INFORMATION: ===> ===> ===> ===>

The following table describes the SUBMIT option fields: Field Request Data Set Description Use these fields to identify the request data set you want to submit for execution. Alternatively, use the OTHER PARTITIONED OR SEQUENTIAL DATA SET field. Data set name (and member name if the data set is a library) of the request data set you want to submit for execution: 'data set (member name)' format.

Other Partitioned or Sequential Data Set

Chapter 4. Foreground and Batch Processing 4-9

4.3 The Batch Options Menu Panel

Field Include JCL

Description Indicate whether you want to include JCL in addition to the standard execution JCL: Y (yes) or N (no). If you specify Y, you must have defined the additional JCL already, using option 5. The default is N. Jobcard to be submitted with the execution.

Job Statement Information

After you specify the necessary information, press Enter. Endevor builds the JCL to submit the job dynamically, including the jobcard from the Batch Options Menu, a standard job stream provided during installation, and any additional JCL. TSO displays a message similar to the following example to let you know the job has been submitted: IKJ5625 I JOB ZSXJMA1A(JOB 2433) SUBMITTED

4.3.5 Validating Batch Requests

To validate the SCL in an action request data set and the JOB STATEMENT INFORMATION filled in on the screen, select option 4, VALIDATE, from the Batch Options Menu. When you validate the SCL, Endevor checks the syntax of the action requests just as if it were going to run the job, and returns an appropriate message(s) if there are errors. The ISPF/PDF Browse facility shows syntax errors within SCL statements defined in the REQUEST DATA SET, if any. It is a good idea to use the validate option before submitting a job to execute the action requests (SUBMIT option).

4-10 User Guide

4.3 The Batch Options Menu Panel

When you select VALIDATE, you must also specify the data set you want to validate using the REQUEST DATA SET or OTHER PARTITIONED OR SEQUENTIAL DATA SET fields on the Batch Options Menu.

BATCH ----------------------OPTION ===> 4 1 2 3 4 5 BUILD SCL EDIT SUBMIT VALIDATE BUILD JCL -

BATCH OPTIONS MENU

--------------------------

REQUEST DATA SET: PROJECT ===> BST GROUP ===> SUPPORT TYPE ===> SRCLIB MEMBER ===>

OTHER PARTITIONED OR SEQUENTIAL DATA SET: DSNAME ===> 'BST.C1DEMO.SCL' JOB STATEMENT INFORMATION: ===> ===> ===> ===>

After you have filled in the necessary information, press Enter. Endevor validates the action request data set and jobcard. If there are errors, the system returns a panel similar to the one shown next:

BROWSE -- ZSXJMA1.C1TEMPR1.MSGS -------------------- LINE COL 1 8 COMMAND ===> SCROLL ===> CSR TOP OF DATA 16:42:5 C1Y 15I STARTING PARSE OF REQUEST CARDS STMT #1 RADD ELEMENT 'BC1JACCT' FROM BNVPPARS: E 4 INVALID COMMAND WORDING, FOUND: RADD DSNAME 'BST.C1DEMO.CNTL' TO BNVPPARS: E 4 INVALID COMMAND WORDING, FOUND: DSNAME ENVIRONMENT 'DEMO' SYSTEM 'FINANCE' SUBSYSTEM 'ACCTREC' BNVPPARS: E 4 INVALID COMMAND WORDING, FOUND: ENVIRONMEN BNVPPARS: E 4 INVALID COMMAND WORDING, FOUND: TYPE

Chapter 4. Foreground and Batch Processing 4-11

4.3 The Batch Options Menu Panel

4.3.6 Building Additional JCL

To define JCL to be included with other batch requests (for example, if an action request references a source or target file by DDname, or identifies an archive data set): 1. Select option 5, BUILD JCL, from the Batch Options Menu and press ENTER. Endevor displays JCL To Be Included In Batch Job panel.
----------------- JCL TO BE INCLUDED WITH BATCH JOB --------------------------COMMAND ===> .........1.........2.........3.........4.........5.........6.........7.. ===> //INDD ===> ===> ===> ===> ===> ===> ===> ===> ===> ===> ===> ===> ===> ===> ===> ===> ===> ===> ===> DD DSN=BST.C1DEMO.ABC,DISP=SHR

2. Fill in the JCL (complete statements) you want to include with the batch job, and press PF3 to return to the Batch Options Menu.

4-12 User Guide

4.4 The Confirmation Panel

If DISPLAY LIST = N and the selection list contains more than one element or member, Endevor displays a confirmation panel when you press Enter.

------------------------------COMMAND ===> PLEASE NOTE:

CONFIRMATION

-------------------------------

GENERATE action requested. 82 elements have been selected for processing .

INSTRUCTIONS: Press the ENTER key to process all elements selected. Enter END command to cancel the request.

Options: The information that appears on this panel depends on the information you have entered on the action request panel. In this case, 82 elements have been selected for generate processing. The Confirmation panel provides two options: You can confirm that you want to continue processing your request. Press Enter and Endevor redisplays the Confirmation panel. The panel reflects the number of elements processed, as processing takes place. When processing is complete, the original request screen displays with a message in the upper right corner that indicates the total number of elements that have been processed. You can end processing for this request by typing END at the COMMAND line. Note: Use caution when requesting actions with DISPLAY LIST = N. Once you press Enter with the Confirmation panel displayed, you cannot cancel the processing until all selected elements or members have been processed. If you have not specified a CCID and/or comment and one is required, an Action Prompt panel appears when you press Enter at the Confirmation panel.

Chapter 4. Foreground and Batch Processing 4-13

4.4 The Confirmation Panel

4.5 Selection Lists

If you leave the system, subsystem, or element fields blank or use a name mask on an action panel, and DISPLAY LIST = Y, Endevor returns System, Subsystem, Element, or Member Selection lists to allow you to specify your request fully. For more information on specifying a mask character, see Name Masking in the chapter Endevor Basics. Note: If you specify fully all search criteria except stage, provide an option, and the resultant list has only one element, Endevor does not display the Element Selection List. Once you have selected the elements or members against which you want to execute the action, and press Enter, Endevor: Executes the action if you are working in foreground. Builds SCL requests in a request data set if you are working in batch. These selection lists are shown in this section. Reference this section as necessary when reviewing the action explanations in Chapter 6, "Action Processing."

4.5.1 System Selection List

The System Selection List allows you to select a system for your request.

-------------------------COMMAND ===> SYSTEM s FINANCE INVENTOR PERSONEL PROCESS

SYSTEM SELECTION LIST

-------------- ROW 1 OF 4 SCROLL ===> CSR COMMENTS CCID REQ'D REQ'D Y Y Y Y N N Y Y

SYSTEM TITLE FINANCIAL CONTROL SYSTEMS INVENTORY CONTROL SYSTEM PERSONNEL SYSTEM PROCESSORS BOTTOM OF DATA

The following list describes the System Selection List fields: Field Selection (untitled) System System Title Comments Req'd Description Select the system you want to use by typing an S in this column, next to the appropriate system. System name. Descriptive title for the system. Indicates whether comments are required for actions requested in this system: Y (yes) or N (no).

4-14 User Guide

4.5 Selection Lists

Field CCID Req'd

Description Indicates whether a CCID is required for actions requested in this system: Y (yes) or N (no).

4.5.2 Subsystem Selection List

The Subsystem Selection List allows you to select a subsystem for your request.

-----------------------COMMAND ===> SYSTEM FINANCE s FINANCE FINANCE SUBSYSTEM ACCTPAY ACCTREC GENLEDG

SUBSYSTEM SELECTION LIST SUBSYSTEM TITLE ACCOUNTS PAYABLE ACCOUNTS RECEIVABLE GENERAL LEDGER BOTTOM OF DATA

------------ ROW 1 OF 3 SCROLL ===> CSR

The following list describes the Subsystem Selection List fields: Field Selection (no title) System Subsystem Subsystem Title Description Type an S in this column next to the subsystem you want to select. Name of the system being processed. Subsystem name. Descriptive title for the subsystem.

4.5.3 Element and Member Selection Lists

Endevor supports the Locate command on Element and Member Selection lists. Note: Element Selection lists are sorted alphabetically by element name, stage, system, subsystem, and type. Whenever possible, you should fully qualify a system when requesting the selection list. If you cannot fully specify a system, carefully examine the Endevor location (environment/stage) and classification information (system/subsystem/type) associated with a located element to make sure it is the element you want.

Chapter 4. Foreground and Batch Processing 4-15

4.5 Selection Lists

The Element Selection List for the MOVE action is shown next. Element Selection Lists for the DELETE, GENERATE, LIST ELEMENT, PRINT ELEMENT, RETRIEVE, SIGNIN, and TRANSFER actions are similar.

MOVE -----------------------COMMAND ===> ELEMENT @WRKTYDS AC1PSERV ASMUSERT BAIODSCT BASICDEL BASICDEL BASICGEN BASICGEN BC1DXFPI BC1DXFPR BC1JACCT BC1JANLZ BC1JCMPR BC1JCONV BC1JDB2R BC1JDEFT BC1JELIB BC1JFUP1

ELEMENT SELECTION LIST ENVIRON BST BST BST BST BST BST BST BST BST BST BST BST BST BST BST BST BST BST S P P P P P P P P P P P P P P P P P P SYSTEM NDVR25 NDVR25 NDVR25 NDVR25 NDVR25 NDVR25 NDVR25 NDVR25 NDVR25 NDVR25 NDVR25 NDVR25 NDVR25 NDVR25 NDVR25 NDVR25 NDVR25 NDVR25

------

ROW 281 OF 2412 SCROLL ===> PAGE VV.LL 1. 1 1. 4 1. 1. 1 1. 1. 1. 1. 1. 1 1. 1 1. 1. 1 1. 1. 2 1. 1. 7 1. 1. 2 RC

TYPE ASMIMAC LNKIRN24 CNTLE COBCOPY ASMIPGMR LNKERENT ASMIPGMR LNKERENT XFPEOBJ XFPEOBJ CNTLE CNTLE CNTLE CNTLE CNTLE CNTLE CNTLE CNTLE

SUBSYSTEM INTERNAL INTERNAL INTERNAL INTERNAL INTERNAL INTERNAL INTERNAL INTERNAL INTERNAL INTERNAL INTERNAL INTERNAL INTERNAL INTERNAL INTERNAL INTERNAL INTERNAL INTERNAL

4 4 4 4 12 4 4 4

From this list, you can: Select one or more elements by typing a designated character to the left of each element to be selected. (To see a list of designated characters, press HELP). Request a detailed element display for one or more elements by placing the appropriate character (S-Summary of Levels, M-Element Master, B-Element Browse, C-Element Changes, or H-Element History) to the left of each element. When you press Enter, Endevor performs the processing requested and returns the panel with a message next to each selected element. For more information, browse the listing data set userid.C1TEMPRn.MSGS. Field Selection (no title) Element Message (no title) Description Use this field to select an element for processing. An element name eligible for selection. This field displays messages, such as *DELETED. This field has the header NEW NAME for the RETRIEVE action, and the header TO NAME for the TRANSFER action, and is used to provide a different name for the element at the targets of those actions. The type associated with the element.

Type

4-16 User Guide

4.5 Selection Lists

Field Environ S System Subsystem VV.LL RC

Description The name of the environment where the element is located. The ID of the stage where the element is located. The system to which the element is defined. The subsystem to which the element is defined. The version/level for the element. The return code for the most recent action performed against the element.

4.5.4 Bypassing System and Subsystem Selection Lists

The ENCOPTBL option ENHOPT NO_SYS_SBS_SELECTION_LIST enables the processing of all element selection lists to always bypass both the System and Subsystem lists and display a consolidated element selection list. Activation of this option is controlled through the Endevor Optional Feature Table (ENCOPTBL). For more information on using ENCOPTBL, see the chapter Optional Features in the Administrator Guide.

4.5.5 ESORT Column Sorting Feature

ESORT allows you to sort any selection list in Endevor. You can sort a selection list by any column in either ascending or descending order. By default, lists are sorted in ascending order. To sort a column in ascending order, type ES followed by the first three letters of the column heading (for example, ES DAT) on the command line, then press Enter. To sort a column in descending order, type ES followed by the first three letters of the column heading preceded by a minus sign (for example, ES -DAT) on the command line, then press Enter. To sort the selection list to the default sequence (usually the first column), simply type ES on the command line, and then press Enter. It can also be invoked with TSO ESORT. To activate ESORT, please add iprfx.iqual.ISPTLIB to your ISPTLIB section of the CLIST you use to invoke Endevor.

Chapter 4. Foreground and Batch Processing 4-17

4.5 Selection Lists

4.5.6 EONLY Column Filtering Feature

EONLY allows you to filter any selection list in Endevor by either including or excluding rows that match the column filter value that you specify. Before using EONLY, you must build a select list for one of Endevor's scrollable list panels. To filter all rows beginning with a certain column value, type EONLY columnname value on the command line, where columnname is the name of the column you want to filter, and value is the value that every row must have. Conversely, to filter all rows not beginning with a certain column value, type EONLY -columnname value (note the minus sign), where columnname is the name of the column you want to filter, and value is the value that no row can have. Notes: When entering the column name, only the first three characters of the column name are required. A maximum of six characters can be entered. The value field supports placeholders. Refer to the section in this guide on placeholders for more information. The EONLY command can be invoked with EONLY or EO, provided that the supplied CTLICMDS table is in use. It can also be invoked with TSO EONLY. Once you have filtered a list, the only way to remove the filter is to use the PF3 key to back out of the list, which must then be rebuilt.

4.5.6.1 Using Placeholder (%) and Wildcard (*) Characters

The EONLY command supports use of the placeholder character (%), which represents any single character in a string. You can use the placeholder character (%) multiple times in a single field, for example, C%CC%C. However, any value that you enter in the value field is treated as if it ends in the wildcard character. Therefore, the EONLY command cannot be used for filtering rows containing a specific number of characters less than the maximum six characters. For example, the values C, C%, and C%%%%% would return the same result. The EONLY command does not support the wildcard character (*). The asterisk (*) is treated as a character and not as a wildcard. For example, the value C* would produce an empty list, unless there is an occurrence that contains an asterisk (*) in the second position. For more information about wildcards and placeholders, see Name Masking in the chapter Endevor Basics.

4-18 User Guide

4.5 Selection Lists

4.5.6.2 Using Dates with EONLY

Dates and date ranges can be specified in the value field of EONLY. The date must be entered in the following format: DDMMMYY See the following example: 3 SEP 1 You can also filter for all rows that have dates earlier than or later than the date in the value field, as well as for those rows that fall within the range of two dates specified in the value field. For example, to filter for all rows containing a date later than December 31, 2001, use the greater than sign (>) as in the following example: EO DAT >31DEC 1 To filter for all rows containing a date earlier than January 1, 2002, use the less than sign (<) as in the following example: EO DAT < 1JAN 2 To filter for all rows containing a date between January 1, 2001 and June 30, 2001, use a dash to separate the two dates, as in the following example: EO DAT 1JAN 1-3 JUN 1

4.5.7 EPRINT
This command allows you to print a selection list. Simply enter EPRINT on the command line, and the output will be sent to your ISPF listing data set. This command can also be invoked with TSO EPRINT.

Chapter 4. Foreground and Batch Processing 4-19

4.5 Selection Lists

4.5.8 Long Name Elements in Selection List

In ISPF selection lists, element names longer than 10 characters appear in a truncated form. The format is: {longn...} where "longn" is the first five characters of the name. See the following example:

--------------------------COMMAND ===> ELEMENT {longn...} ELEM 1 FINCPY1 TESTELM1 TESTELM2 TYPE COPY COPY COPY COPY COPY

ELEMENT SELECTION LIST

-------------- Row 1 of 9 SCROLL ===> CSR VV.LL 1. 1. 1. 1. 1. ---- DATES ---CURRENT GENERATE 16MAY 1 16MAY 1 16MAY 1 16MAY 1 16MAY 1 16MAY 1 16MAY 1 16MAY 1 16MAY 1 16MAY 1

ENVIRON QA1 QA1 QA1 QA1 QA1

S SYSTEM SUBSYSTEM 1 PDS PDSSUB 1 PDS PDSSUB 1 PDS PDSSUB 1 PDS PDSSUB 1 PDS PDSSUB Bottom of data

You cannot work with long name elements from an ISPF selection list. Access to long name elements is only available through AllFusion Endevor Webstation. Note: If more than one long name element starts with the same five characters, ISPF displays only one entry.

4-20 User Guide

4.6 The Action Prompt Panel

If you do not specify a CCID and/or comment on the action request panel when one and/or the other is required for an action, Endevor displays the Action Prompt panel before executing the action.

------------------------------COMMAND ===> Specification Required: CCID: Y (Y/N) COMMENT: Y (Y/N) Action: RETRIEVE Environment: DEV Type: COBOL CCID ===> COMMENT ===>

ACTION PROMPT

-----------------------------

Element: PROG 1 System: FINANCE Stage: D

Subsystem: PO

Fields: To complete your action request, type a valid CCID and/or comment on this screen and press Enter. The CCID and COMMENT fields are the only fields in which you can enter information; the remaining fields are display only. Field Specification required: CCID and Comment Action Element Environment System Subsystem Type Stage Description Indicates whether a CCID and/or comment is required for this action. Name of the requested action. Name of the element against which the action has been requested. Name of the current environment. Name of the current system. Name of the current subsystem. Name of the current type. ID of the current stage.

Chapter 4. Foreground and Batch Processing 4-21

4.6 The Action Prompt Panel

Field CCID

Description Enter a valid CCID for the named action and element. This CCID remains as the required CCID until you change it or until the end of the Endevor session. Enter a comment for the named action and element. This comment remains as the required comment until you change it or until the end of the Endevor session.

Comment

Note: When you select multiple elements from a selection list, the Action Prompt panel appears once for each selected element. When you press Enter after providing a CCID and/or comment for the first selected element, the name of the second selected element appears in the ELEMENT field. The CCID and comment remain, allowing you to accept the same CCID and comment, or to change them before pressing ENTER.

4-22 User Guide

4.7 The Batch Execution Report

As the batch job is processed, Endevor writes a Batch Execution Report, which documents the actions requested, as well as the actual processing that occurs. The report consists of three sections: The Syntax Request Report section. The Execution Report section. The Action Summary Report section. Endevor initially validates the syntax in the batch job and produces the Syntax Request Report. If your SCL requests have been parsed successfully, Endevor continues and produces the Execution Report and the Action Summary Report. If you want Endevor to save the Action Summary report section in a separate data set from the Syntax Request and Execution Reports, you can specify that data set name to Endevor's Batch Execution program with the C1MSGS2 parameter. You can view the Execution Report sections: Automatically, by establishing a low threshold return code on the DISPLAY MESSAGES WHEN RC GE field on the User Defaults panel. By browsing the file userid.C1TEMPRn.MSGS, where userid is your ISPF user ID, and n is the number of the session in which Endevor is running or key TSO MSGS (a CLIST provided to display the C1TEMPRnMSGS.) In the C1MSGS1 member on the batch run SYSOUT printout. Optionally, in the C1MSGS2 member on the batch run SYSOUT printout.

Chapter 4. Foreground and Batch Processing 4-23

4.7 The Batch Execution Report

4.7.1 The Syntax Request Report Section

When you submit your requests, Endevor validates the SCL syntax in the action request data set and assigns a statement number to each SCL statement coded. (The validation process is the same as the procedure followed if you select the VALIDATE option from the Batch Options Menu.)
29MAR 1 12:32 PAGE 1 E N D E V O R S Y N T A X R E Q U E S T R E P O R T REL X.XX SERIAL XXXX REQUESTED BY: ZSXGMG1Z 12:32:14 C1Y 15I STARTING PARSE OF REQUEST CARDS STMT #1 ADD ELEMENT 'TESTELEM' FROM DSNAME 'BST.SGENCOB 1' TO ENVIRONMENT 'QA' SYSTEM 'GMGTEST' SUBSYSTEM 'GMGTEST' TYPE 'GMGCONW' OPTIONS CCID 'ZSXGMG1' COMMENTS 'TEST' UPDATE . STMT #2 EOF STATEMENT GENERATED 12:32:15 C1Y 16I REQUEST CARDS SUCCESSFULLY PARSED

The Syntax Request Report lists every SCL statement (a statement begins with an action and ends with a period) in the order it was coded, and flags any syntax errors. If no EOF statement is found, the system will generate one. When all requests have been validated, Endevor checks for errors. If no errors are detected, processing continues and the Execution and Action Summary Reports are produced. If errors do exist, processing is terminated at this point. Refer to the Error Codes and Messages Guide for an explanation of any Syntax Request Report messages received.

4-24 User Guide

4.7 The Batch Execution Report

4.7.2 The Execution Report Section

The Execution Report is shown after the execution is complete. This section of the Batch Execution Report expands each action request listed on the Syntax Request Report to include complete Endevor location information (system, subsystem, type, and stage) for each element, as well as all selected options.
29MAR 1 12:32 E N D E V O R REQUESTED BY: ZSXGMG1Z 12:32:21 C1G 12:32:21 C1G 12:32:21 C1G 12:32:21 C1G 12:32:21 C1G 12:32:21 C1G 12:32:21 C1G 12:32:25 C1G 12:32:25 C1G 12:32:26 C1G 12:32:27 C1G 12:32:27 C1G 12:32:27 C1G 12:32:27 C1G 12:32:27 C1G 12:32:27 C1G 12:32:27 C1G 12:32:27 C1G 12:32:27 C1G 12:32:27 C1G 12:32:27 C1G 12:32:27 C1G 12:32:27 C1G 12:32:27 C1G 12:32:27 C1G 12:32:27 C1G 12:32:27 C1G 12:32:27 C1G 12:32:27 C1G 12:32:27 C1G 12:32:27 C1G 12:32:27 C1G 12:32:27 C1G 12:32:27 C1G 12:32:27 C1G 12:32:27 C1G 12:32:27 C1G 12:32:27 C1G 12:32:27 C1G 12:32:27 C1G 12:32:27 C1G 12:32:27 C1G 12:32:27 C1G 12:32:27 C1G 12:32:27 C1G 12:32:28 C1X 12:32:28 C1X 12:32:28 C1G 12:32:31 C1G 12:32:31 C1X 2 2I 2 3I 2 5I 2 4I 232I 232I 232I 29W 1 5I 143I 246I 247I 248I 249I 249I 249I 249I 249I 249I 249I 249I 249I 249I 249I 249I 249I 249I 249I 249I 249I 249I 249I 6I 7I 7I 7I 11I 9I 9I 9I 9I 9I 9I 9I 9I 12I 13I 23I 132I 1 I E X E C U T I O N R E P O R T REL: PAGE 1 X.XX SERIAL XXXX

ACTION #1 / STMT #1 ADD ELEMENT TESTELEM FROM DSNAME: BST.SUPPORT.SRCLIB TO ENVIRONMENT: QA SYSTEM: GMGTEST SUBSYSTEM:GMGTEST TYPE: GMGCONW OPTIONS: UPDATE, SOURCE MEMBER CCID: ZSXGMG1 COMMENT: TEST NO ELEMENT SOURCE CHANGES DETECTED ELEMENT TESTELEM 1. NOT UPDATED BY BST.SUPPORT.SRCLIB(GENCOB 1) BEGINNING EXECUTION OF GENERATE PROCESSOR GMGCONW OF GROUP GMGCONW. PROCESSOR GMGCONW LOADED FROM BST.QATEST.PRC1LOAD FOOTPRINT: ENV: QA SYS: PROCESS SBS: PROCESS ELM: GMGCONW TYPE: PROCESS STG NBR: 1 VER: 1. DATE: 29MAR 1 11:48 //TEST PROC CONWPARM='EXPINCL(Y)', // CONLPARM='STORE', // UNIT='SYSDA' // // RUN A CONWRITE STEP // //STEP1 EXEC PGM=CONWRITE,PARM=&CONWPARM //C1OUT1 DD DSN=&&OUTPUT,DISP=(,PASS), // SPACE=(TRK,(1,1),RLSE),UNIT=&UNIT, // DCB=(RECFM=FB,LRECL=8 ,BLKSIZE=312 ) // // RUN A CONLIST STEP // //STEP1 EXEC PGM=CONLIST,MAXRC= ,PARM=STORE //C1LLIBO DD DSN=BST.QATEST.LISTING&C1STGNUM,DISP=SHR, // MONITOR=COMPONENTS //C1BANNER DD UNIT=&UNIT,SPACE=(TRK,(1,1)), // DCB=(RECFM=FBA,LRECL=121,BLKSIZE=6171) //LIST 1 DD DSN=&&OUTPUT,DISP=(OLD,DELETE) SYMBOLIC SUBSTITUTION: SYMBOLIC CONLPARM DEFINED BY PROCESSOR: STORE SYMBOLIC CONWPARM DEFINED BY PROCESSOR: EXPINCL(Y) SYMBOLIC UNIT DEFINED BY PROCESSOR: SYSDA PROCESSOR SYMBOLIC SUBSTITUTION OCCURRED ORIGINAL : &CONWPARM SUBSTITUTED : EXPINCL(Y) ORIGINAL : &UNIT SUBSTITUTED : SYSDA ORIGINAL : BST.QATEST.LISTING&C1STGNUM SUBSTITUTED : BST.QATEST.LISTING1 ORIGINAL : &UNIT SUBSTITUTED : SYSDA STEP STEP1 INVOKING PROGRAM CONWRITE PARM=EXPINCL(Y) INCLUDE EXPANSION REQUESTED, BUT INCLUDE LIBRARIES HAVE NOT BEENINED FOR TYPE GMGCONW. ELEMENT TESTELEM 1. WRITTEN TO DDNAME C1OUT1 STEP STEP1 PROGRAM CONWRITE COMPLETED, RC=

STAGE: 1

The above Execution Report is for statement 1 on the Endevor Syntax Request Report in the previous section. The report lists each step in the execution of the processor GMGCONW.

Chapter 4. Foreground and Batch Processing 4-25

4.7 The Batch Execution Report

4.7.3 The Action Summary Report Section

The Action Summary Report consists of one line of information for each action performed, and provides: An overview of the job submitted, highlighting any "FAILED" requests in the left-most column (untitled). The name of the action performed and the name of the element it was performed on in the ACTION and ELEMENT fields. The processor return code in the PROC RC field. This is the highest return codes that the processor encountered during processing for that action. The Endevor return code in the NDVR RC field. This is the highest return code that Endevor encountered during processing for that action. FROM information for the element in the FROM INFORMATION fields. These fields indicate the location of the element prior to the action being performed. FROM information can be either a data set name (DSNAME=) or Endevor location, which consists of the environment, system, subsystem, type, and stage for the element. The time the action was completed in the ACTION TIME field. The action number assigned to this request in the Batch Execution Report in the ACTION NUMBER field. The statement number assigned to this statement in the Syntax Request Report in the STATEMENT NUMBER field. The number of statements written by a LIST action in the SCL WRITTEN field. In the following example, note in the report that the add processing for element TESTELEM was successful, and its highest ENDEVOR RC was 0004. To find detail information for this element, look at action number 1 in the Batch Execution Report, and statement number 1 in the Syntax Request Report.
29MAR 1 12:32 E N D E V O R REQUESTED BY: ZSXGMG1Z PROC NDVR ACTION ELEMENT RC RC ADD TESTELEM 4 END OF JOB. HIGHEST ENDEVOR RC = +-------------- FROM INFORMATION ENVIRONMENT SYSTEM SUBSYSTEM DSNAME=BST.SUPPORT.SRCLIB 4 --------------+ TYPE STAGE ACTION TIME 12:32:21 ACTION NUMBER 1 STMT SCL NUMBER WRITTEN 1 A C T I O N S U M M A R Y R E P O R T REL: X.XX PAGE 1 SERIAL XXXX

4-26 User Guide

Chapter 5. Displaying Endevor Information

This chapter describes how to display element information, footprint information, site definitions, stage information, system definitions, subsystem definitions, type definitions, processor group definitions, approver group definitions, approver group relation definitions, and environment information. Additional information is provided about site-defined symbolics and the Global Type Sequencing option.

Chapter 5. Displaying Endevor Information 5-1

5.1 The Display Options Menu

You can display information for any of several inventory components, using the Display Options Menu. To access the Display Options Menu, select option 1 on the Primary Options Menu.

5.1.1 Display Options Menu Panel

The Display Options Menu is shown next:

--------------------------OPTION ===> 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 A E S T ELEMENT FOOTPRINT SITE STAGE SYSTEM SUBSYSTEM TYPE PROCESSOR GROUP APPROVER GROUP RELATE GROUP ENVIRONMENT SITE SYMBOLS TYPE SEQUENCE -

DISPLAY OPTIONS MENU

----------------------------

Display Display Display Display Display Display Display Display Display Display Display Display Display

5.1.2 Options
Use this panel to select the type of information you want: Use this option 1 Element To display: Element changes or a summary of the change history for an element, the contents of an element, or Master Control File information for an element. Footprint stored in load or source modules. Optionally display information from the corresponding element, which can be traced by the content of the footprint. You can also use this option to display any non-load module data set member, such as listing, CA-Panvalet libraries, and CA-Librarian libraries. 3 Site 4 Stage 5 System 6 Subsystem Information about the current site. Stage definitions for the current environment. System definitions. Subsystem definitions.

2 Footprint

5-2 User Guide

5.1 The Display Options Menu

Use this option 7 Type 8 Processor Group 9 Approver Group A Relate Group E Environment S Site Symbols T Type Sequence

To display: Type definitions. Processor group definitions. Approver group definitions. Inventory area/approver group relationships. Information about the current environment. Site symbols definitions Site level type processing sequence (if active at your site)

Chapter 5. Displaying Endevor Information 5-3

5.2 Displaying Element Information

This section describes how to display element information.

5.2.1 Display Elements/Component Lists Panel

To display element information, type 1 (ELEMENT) on the Display Options Menu and press Enter. Endevor displays the Display Elements/Component Lists panel. Note: The Display Elements/Component Lists panel shown here is the panel that displays for Endevor ACM users. If you do not have Endevor ACM at your site, this panel is called the Display Elements panel, and it does not allow you to display component list information. All of the element fields are the same.

------------------OPTION ===>

Display Elements/Component Lists

---------------------

blank - Display selection list S - Display summary of levels M - Display element master info

B - Browse element current level C - Display changes current level H - Display history current level

Enter SX, BX, CX or HX to display component list information FROM Endevor: ENVIRONMENT SYSTEM SUBSYSTEM ELEMENT TYPE STAGE LIST OPTIONS: DISPLAY PROC GROUP NAME ===> N (Y/N) DISPLAY LIST ===> Y (Y/N) WHERE CCID EQ ===> WHERE PROC GRP EQ ===> DISPLAY SYS/SBS LIST ===> N (Y/N) BUILD USING MAP ===> N (Y/N) D - CSTAGE P - CPROD

===> DOC ===> FINANCE ===> ===> ===> ===>

Proceed as follows: 1. Identify the element and the information that you want to display on this panel, and press Enter. The panel that Endevor displays next depends on the value in the DISPLAY SYS/SBS LIST field. 2. If you provided a wildcard in the SYSTEM and/or SUBSYSTEM fields and DISPLAY SYS/SBS LIST = Y, Endevor displays a System and/or Subsystem Selection List. Make selections as necessary. 3. Element Name Prompt You set the element name prompt option at the site-level by assembling the Endevor Customization table ENCOPTBL as follows: ENHOPT ELMNM_PROMPT=ON

5-4 User Guide

5.2 Displaying Element Information

The following prompt panel displays when the element name is omitted from the ISPF panel and "Build Using Map = Y" in the ISPF panel:
-------------------------COMMAND ===> Element Name Prompt ------------------------------

You omitted the element name from the previous panel with 'Y' specified for search map. A significant delay may occur while Endevor searches for elements that meet your selection criteria. If you wish to return to specify an element name, enter the END command. Otherwise, press the ENTER key to continue...

4. If you provided a wildcard in the ELEMENT field, Endevor displays an Element Selection List or Confirmation panel, as indicated in the following table: DISPLAY LIST = Y BUILD USING MAP = Y Endevor displays a selection list of all elements in all map environments that meet search criteria. Endevor displays a confirmation panel, indicating the number of elements selected (from all environments). BUILD USING MAP = N Default. Endevor displays a selection list of all elements in the current environment that meet search criteria Endevor displays a confirmation panel, indicating the number of elements selected (from the current environment).

Use DISPLAY LIST = N with caution, especially in conjunction with BUILD USING MAP = Y. When you press Enter at a Confirmation panel, you will have to view all the elements that have been selected. 5. The next step depends on the panel that appears: If a Confirmation panel appears, press Enter to view the requested display for the number of elements indicated on the Confirmation panel. If an Element Selection List appears, use it to display information for one or more elements. Available displays include Summary of Levels, Element Master, Element Browse, Element Changes, or Element History. Each of these displays are discussed later in this chapter. To return to the Display Options Menu, press End.

Chapter 5. Displaying Endevor Information 5-5

5.2 Displaying Element Information

5.2.2 Fields
The Display Element/Component Lists panel fields are described next.

5.2.2.1 Option Field

Use option codes to specify the information you wish to display. To view component list information with Endevor ACM, append an "X" to option S, B, C, or H. Select This Option Blank S To Display A list appropriate to the information supplied on the panel, as described earlier. A Summary of Levels panel, showing a summary of change history for the element requested. From this panel, you can select a specific level of the element for display, using option B, C, or H. An Element Master panel, showing Master Control File (MCF) information related to the element requested. An Element Browse panel, showing all statements in the current level of the element, and the level at which each statement was inserted. An Element Changes panel, showing all inserts and deletions made to the element as of the current level. An Element History panel, showing all statements in all levels of the element, from the base level through the current level. The display shows the level at which each insertion/deletion occurred

5.2.2.2 From Endevor Fields

These fields contain information to describe the Endevor location of the element. Field Environment Description Name of the environment under which the element is defined (initially, the current environment). If the element is in a different environment, enter the environment's name in this field. Name of the system under which the element is defined.

System

5-6 User Guide

5.2 Displaying Element Information

Field Subsystem Element Type Stage

Description Name of the subsystem under which the element is defined. Name of the element for which you want to display information. Name of the element's type. ID of the stage in which the element resides. This must be one of the values shown to the right of the field (unless you are changing environments).

5.2.2.3 List Options Fields

These options allow you to specify further the information you want to display. Field Display Proc Grp Name Display List Description Specifies whether the name of the processor group associated with the element is displayed on the Element Selection list: Y (yes) or N (no). Indicates whether you want to use list panels when requesting this action: Y (yes) or N (no). The default is Y. Specifies a CCID that Endevor uses to limit the selection list to only those elements whose last CCID matches the specified CCID. If omitted, Endevor does not limit the selection list by CCID. Specifies a processor group that Endevor uses to limit the selection list to only those elements to which the processor group has been assigned. If omitted, Endevor does not limit the selection list by process or group. Indicates whether you want to go directly to the Element Selection List from the Display Elements/Component Lists panel. Acceptable values are: Y-- Provide individual selection lists as required by your entries on this panel. N-- Default. Bypass system and subsystem selection lists. Note: DISPLAY LIST = Y must be specified in order to see any of these lists.

Where CCID Eq

Where Proc Grp Eq

Display SYS/SBS List

Chapter 5. Displaying Endevor Information 5-7

5.2 Displaying Element Information

Field Build Using Map

Description Indicates whether you want Endevor to search the map, starting at the FROM location, when building the Element Selection List. Acceptable values are: Y--Search the map. N--Default. Do not search the map. Note: Avoid using BUILD USING MAP = Y in combination with DISPLAY LIST = N. You cannot cancel the build process once it has begun. Note: The selection list contains elements whose types are defined at the From locataion. Elements whose types are defined later in the map do not appear if Build Using Map = N.

5.2.3 Element Selection List Panel

When you do not fully qualify the element name or stage ID on the Display Elements/Component Lists panel, Endevor displays the Element Selection List panel. Note: If you fully specify all search criteria except stage, and the resultant list has only one element, Endevor does not display the Element Selection List. Element Selection Lists are sorted alphabetically by element name, in map-sequence order. Whenever possible, you should fully qualify a system when requesting the selection list. If you cannot fully specify a system, make sure to look carefully at the Endevor location (environment/stage) and classification (system/subsystem/type) information associated with a located element to make sure it is the element for which you are looking. Endevor supports the Locate command on Element Selection Lists.

5-8 User Guide

5.2 Displaying Element Information

To select the element(s) for which you want more information, enter an option value (Element Master panel--M, Summary of Levels panel--S, Element Browse panel--B, Element Changes panel-- C, or Element History panel--H) to the left of each element name and press Enter.

-------------------------COMMAND ===> ELEMENT C1SD C1SD1 C1SD3 C1SD4 C1SEA# C1SEAC TYPE ASMPGM ASMPGM ASMPGM ASMPGM ASMPGM ASMPGM

ELEMENT SELECTION LIST S SYSTEM 2 NDVR976 2 NDVR976 2 NDVR976 2 NDVR976 2 NDVR976 2 NDVR976 BOTTOM OF

ENVIRONMENT PRD PRD PRD PRD PRD PRD

----------- ROW 1 OF 8 SCROLL ===> PAGE CURRENT PROCESSOR SUBSYSTEM VV.LL DATE GROUP BASE 1. 6 9JUN 1 ASMIRN BASE 1.25 17OCT 1 ASMERNUL BASE 1. 1 17AUG 1 ASMIRN BASE 1.23 11MAR 1 ASMERNUL BASE 1. 6 15DEC 1 ASMERNUL BASE 1.1 15JUN 1 ASMERNUL DATA

5.2.4 Fields
The Element Selection List panel fields are described next. All fields except the SELECTION field are display-only. Field Selection (no title) Element Type Environment S (Stage) System Subsystem VV.LL Current Date Processor Group Description Used to select an element for further display. Name of the element. Name of the element type at the specified location. Name of the environment where the listed element is located. ID of the stage where the listed element is located. Name of the system in which the listed element is classified. Name of the subsystem in which the listed element is classified. Version/level for the element at this stage. Date when the current level was created. Format ddmmmyy. Lists the processor group associated with the element.

Chapter 5. Displaying Endevor Information 5-9

5.2 Displaying Element Information

5.2.5 Summary of Levels Panel

The Summary of Levels panel appears in the following situations: Display Elements/Component Lists panel when you select option S and uniquely qualify the element you want. Element Selection List panel when you select option S and DISPLAY LIST = Y. Confirmation panel when you select option S and DISPLAY LIST = N. Library Selection List panel when you type S next to an element level.
--------------------------- SUMMARY OF LEVELS --------- ROW 1 TO 5 OF 5 COMMAND ===> SCROLL ===> PAGE Environment: DEV System: LGNTLCL Subsystem: PROCESS Element: C922442 Type: PROCESS Stage: 1 ----------------------- SOURCE LEVEL INFORMATION -----------------------VV.LL USER DATE TIME STMTS INSERTS DELETES SYNC 1. DA2DM47 2JUL 1 8:18 48 1. 1 DA2DM47 2JUL 1 8:31 36 3 15 1. 2 DA2DM47 2JUL 1 9: 8 36 1 1 1. 3 DA2DM47 2JUL 1 9:16 36 1 1 1. 4 DA2DM47 2JUL 1 12: 5 37 4 3 BOTTOM OF DATA

The top part of this panel displays identification information about the element. The bottom part provides a summary of the element-level (source-level) history, listing each level of the element in the stage requested and information appropriate to that level. To request additional information for one or more of the levels listed on the panel, enter an option value (Element Browse panel--B, Element Changes panel-- C, or Element History panel--H) to the left of the level(s) about which you want information, and press Enter. Note: If you selected multiple elements for display, press End to view the next Summary of Levels panel.

5-10 User Guide

5.2 Displaying Element Information

5.2.6 Fields
The Summary of Levels panel fields are described next.

5.2.6.1 Identification Fields

These fields specify the element's Endevor location. All fields are display-only. Field Environment System Subsystem Element Type Stage Description Name of the current environment. Name of the system under which the element is defined. Name of the subsystem under which the element is defined. Name of the element for which the summary information is displayed. Name of the element type. ID of the stage for which element information is shown.

5.2.6.2 Source Level Information Fields

These fields display summary information about all levels of this element. All fields except the SELECTION field are display-only. Field Selection (no title) Description Used to select an element level for additional information. Type the appropriate code (Element Browse--B, Element Changes--C, or Element History--H) in this column next to each element level for which you want additional information. These options are described for the Display Elements panel earlier in this section. Version/level for the element at that stage (in vv.ll format). Level user ID. Level date (in ddmmmyy format). Level time (in hh:mm format). Number of statements in this level. Number of statements inserted for the level.

VV.LL User Date Time Stmts Inserts

Chapter 5. Displaying Endevor Information 5-11

5.2 Displaying Element Information

Field Deletes Sync

Description Number of statements deleted for the level. Indicates whether this level was created through synchronization (S) or level consolidation (C).

5.2.7 Element Master

Master Control File information for elements appears on two Element Master panels. The first of these two Element Master panels appears from the: Display Elements panel when you select option M on the Display Elements panel and uniquely qualify the element you want. Element Selection List panel when you request option M and DISPLAY LIST = Y. Confirmation panel when you select option M and DISPLAY LIST = N. Library Selection List panel when you type M next to an element level. To switch between the two Element Master panels, press Enter. To return to the previous panel, press End. Note: If you have selected multiple elements for display, press End to view the next Element Master panel.

5.2.8 Element Master Panel (1 of 2)

The first of the Element Master panels is shown next.

------------------------------ ELEMENT MASTER ---------------------------COMMAND ===> (PANEL 1 OF 2) ELEMENT: PROCXREF ENV: DOC SYS: ADMIN SUB: STANDARD TYPE: PROCESS PROC GRP: PROCESS STG: A VV.LL: 1. LAST ACTION: ADD DESCRIPTION: ADDING A PROCESSOR SIGNOUT ID: ZSXLDG1 PKG ID (SOURCE): ADD PKG ID (OUTPUT): ADD LOCKED FOR PKG: NEWPACKAGE --------------------------- LAST ELEMENT ACTION -------------------------USERID: ZSXLDG1 DATE/TIME: 1 JAN 1 37:PR CCID: COMMENT: ADDING A PROCESSOR ACTION: NDVR RC: PROCESSOR: GPPROCSS (GEN) PROC RC: ------------------------------ CURRENT SOURCE ---------------------------USERID: ZSXLDG1 DATE/TIME: 1 JAN 1 15:37 CCID: COMMENT: ADDING A PROCESSOR DELTA FMT: F ADD/UPDATE FROM DSN: BST.TRD.SRCE(PROCXREF) --------------------------------- GENERATE ------------------------------USERID: ZSXLDG1 DATE/TIME: 1 JAN 1 15:37 CCID: COMMENT: ADDING A PROCESSOR DELTA FMT: F COMPONENT LIST VV.LL: N/A (Press ENTER for next panel)

5-12 User Guide

5.2 Displaying Element Information

5.2.9 Fields
The fields in the first Element Master panel are described next:

5.2.9.1 Identification Fields

These fields identify the element for which Master Control File information appears on these two panels. Field Element Env Sys Sub Type Proc Grp Stg vv.ll Last Action Description Signout ID Pkg ID (Source) Description Name of the element. Environment in which the element is defined. System in which the element is defined. Subsystem in which the element is defined. Type to which the element has been assigned. Name of processor group for this element Stage in which this element resides. Version and level of this element. Last action performed against this element. Comment provided for the ADD action that created the base level of the element. User ID of the person to whom the element is signed out. ID of package that last affected the source form of this element.

Chapter 5. Displaying Endevor Information 5-13

5.2 Displaying Element Information

Field Pkg ID (Output)

Description ID of package that created the current generated (or output) form of this element. Backing out and backing in packages can affect the value that appears in this field. For example, if this element is part of two packages, PKG1 and PKG2, the following table shows the affect of four activities involving these packages on the PKG ID (SOURCE) and PKG ID (OUTPUT) fields. Action Execute PKG1 Execute PKG2 Back out PKG2 Back in PKG2 PKG ID (SOURCE) PKG1 PKG2 PKG2 PKG2 PKG ID (OUTPUT) PKG1 PKG2 PKG1 PKG2

Backing out PKG2 caused the output form of this element to revert to its state in PKG1. Subsequently backing in PKG2 then caused the output form of this element to revert to its state in PKG2. Locked for Pkg When the element locking feature has been enabled in the Endevor Options Table (ENCOPTBL), this field displays the package which has secured (locked) the element.

5.2.9.2 Last Element Action Fields

These fields provide information concerning the last action performed against the element. Field Userid Date/Time CCID Comment Action Description User ID of person who requested the action. Date and time of the action. CCID specified for the action. Comment specified for the action. Name of the Endevor action that was performed.

5-14 User Guide

5.2 Displaying Element Information

Field NDVR RC

Description Return code from action processing. Possible values are: 00--When the action executed successfully. 04--When a warning message is issued before a processor is invoked. This can occur, for example, when you specify OVERRIDE SIGNOUT on an action, or add a member with no source changes. 08--When regression percentage exceeds the limit specified on a type definition, and the default severity of C is in effect. 12--When the processor return code is greater than the MAXRC for any step in a processor, or when there is an error in action processing before or after invoking a processor. 16--When an abend occurs.

Processor

Name of processor invoked by the action followed by the processor type - "MOVE" or "GEN" in parentheses.

Chapter 5. Displaying Endevor Information 5-15

5.2 Displaying Element Information

Field PROC RC

Description Highest return code from the last execution of the named processor. The message "*FAILED*" appears here if the return code for any step in a processor exceeds the MAXRC for the processor. The MAXRC keyword is described in the Extended Processors Guide. The message "*PROC'D?*" appears here if the element has not been generated after being: Restored or transferred from an archive data set. Added or updated. When this message appears and the last action is RESTORE or TRANSFER, generating the element assures that the processor information taken from the archive data set is synchronized with current processor outputs. For example, if you deleted the element after it was last archived, the processor output was deleted as well. However, the processor information remained in the archive data set for the element and was restored or transferred with the other element information. If an element has the "*FAILED*" or "*PROC'D?*" message here, the element cannot be moved, and can only be transferred by specifying IGNORE GENERATE FAILED through option 2 on the Batch Options Menu.

5.2.9.3 Current Source Fields

These fields provide information about the current source for the element. The DELTA FMT field indicates whether the element changes are stored in forward (F) or reverse (R) delta format. The ADD/UPDATE FROM DSN field identifies the data set from which the element was added.

5-16 User Guide

5.2 Displaying Element Information

5.2.9.4 Generate Fields

These fields provide information about the last action run against this element that caused output to be generated. The COMPONENT LIST VV.LL field identifies the latest version and level of the component list for this element.

5.2.10 Element Master Panel (2 of 2)

To view the second Element Master panel, press Enter. To return to the previous panel, press End.

-----------------------------COMMAND ===> ELEMENT: PROCXREF ENV: DOC PROC GRP: PROCESS STG: A

----------------------------(PANEL 2 OF 2 SYS: ADMIN SUB: STANDARD TYPE: PROCESS VV.LL: 1. LAST ACTON: ADD SIGNOUT ID: ZSXLDG1 --------------------------------- RETRIEVE ------------------------------USERID: DATE/TIME: CCID: COMMENT: RETRIEVE TO DSN: ----------------------------------- BASE --------------------------------USERID: ZSXLDG1 DATE/TIME: 1 JAN 1 15:37 COMMENT: ADDING A PROCESSOR --------------------------- FROM CA-ENDEVOR LOCATION --------------------USERID: DATE/TIME: ACTION: ELEMENT: ENV: SYS: SUB: TYPE: STG: VV.LL: (Press ENTER for previous panel)

ELEMENT MASTER

5.2.11 Fields
The fields in the second Element Master panel are described next:

5.2.11.1 Identification Fields

For descriptions of the ELEMENT, ENV, SYS, SUB, TYPE, PROC GRP, STG, VV.LL, LAST ACTION, and SIGNOUT ID fields, see the Identification Fields section for the first Element Master panel.

5.2.11.2 Retrieve Fields

These fields provide information only when the last action performed against this element was RETRIEVE. Otherwise the fields will be empty. The RETRIEVE TO DSN field identifies the target data set for the RETRIEVE action.

Chapter 5. Displaying Endevor Information 5-17

5.2 Displaying Element Information

5.2.11.3 Base Fields

These fields provide information about the base level of this element. They show the user ID of the person who created the base level, the date and time that the base level was created, and the comment that was entered for the ADD action that created the base level.

5.2.11.4 From Endevor Location Fields

Information displays in these fields when this element has been moved or transferred from another Endevor location. They show the user ID of the person who requested the MOVE or TRANSFER action, the date and time that the action was performed, and the name of the action (MOVE or TRANSFER). For descriptions of the ELEMENT, ENV, SYS, SUB, TYPE, STG, and VV.LL fields, see the Identification Fields section for the first Element Master panel.

5.2.12 Element Browse Panel

The Element Browse panel appears from the: Display Elements panel when you select option B on the Display Elements panel, and uniquely qualify the element you want. Element Selection List panel when you select option B and DISPLAY LIST = Y. Confirmation panel when you select option B and DISPLAY LIST = N. Summary of Levels panel, when you type B next to an element level. Library Selection List panel when you type B next to an element level.
Menu Utilities Compilers Help Line Col 1 8 Scroll ===> PAGE

BROWSE USER Command ===>

1.FINANCE1.S1.EXE44.COPY Top of Data

ELEMENT BROWSE ENVIRONMENT: ELEMENT: DEMO FINANCE1 1 SYSTEM: PDS TYPE: COPY

9MAY 1 SUBSYSTEM: DEMA STAGE ID: 1

12:36

SIGNED OUT TO: USER

-------------------------- SOURCE LEVEL INFORMATION --------------------------VV.LL SYNC ----- ---1. GENERATED USER DATE -------- ------USER 1 3MAY 1 USER 1 3MAY 1 TIME STMTS CCID COMMENT ----- -------- ------------ ----------------------11:34 1 11:34

5-18 User Guide

5.2 Displaying Element Information

The Element Browse panel displays all the statements in the element level and identifies the level at which each statement was inserted. By default, this panel displays the current level. To browse previous levels, go to the Summary of Levels panel, type B next to each level you want to browse, and press Enter. Note: If you have selected multiple elements to browse, press End to view the next Element Browse panel.

5.2.13 Fields
The Element Browse panel fields are described next:

5.2.13.1 Panel Title and Element Identification Fields

This area displays the panel title, Element Browse, with the current date and time shown to the right (ddmmmyy hh:mm). The following fields identify the element whose source information is displayed. All fields are display-only. Field Environment System Subsystem Element Type Stage Description Name of the environment in which the element is defined. Name of the system under which the element is defined. Name of the subsystem under which the element is defined. Name of the element. Element type. ID of the stage in which the element resides.

5.2.13.2 Source Level Information

This area summarizes each element level, up to the level requested. If you are browsing the current level of the element, this area provides information about the last time the element was processed by the generate or move processor, and/or retrieved. All fields are display-only. Field VV.LL Sync User Description Number that identifies the level of the element described on this line (in vv.ll format). Indicates whether this level was created through synchronization (S) or level consolidation (C) Level user ID.

Chapter 5. Displaying Endevor Information 5-19

5.2 Displaying Element Information

Field Date Time Stmts CCID Comment Generated

Description Level date (in ddmmmyy format). Level time (in hh:mm format). Number of statements in this level. Level change control ID. Level comment. Information about the last run of the generate processor for any level of the element. This data includes: the ID of the user who requested the associated action, date and time of the Generate action, number of statements processed, and CCID and comments associated with the action, if any. If the generate processor has not been run for the element, this line reads THIS ELEMENT HAS NOT BEEN PROCESSED. If the element has been restored (or transferred to Endevor from an archive data set), but has not yet been generated, this line reads PROCESS?? (instead of GENERATED). This indicates that the status of the generate processor information taken from the archive data set during the restore (or transfer) may be out of sync with the current processor output, if any. For example, assuming you deleted the element at the time it was last archived, the processor output was deleted as well. The processor information in the archive data set for the element remained, however, and was restored/transferred along with the other information for the element.

Retrieved

Information describing the last time any level of the element was retrieved. This data includes: the ID of the user responsible, date and time of the RETRIEVE action, and any comments associated with the processing. If an element has been moved, signed in (using the SIGNIN action), restored, or transferred to Endevor from an archive data set since the last RETRIEVE, any information related to the last RETRIEVE is blanked out and is not reflected here.

5-20 User Guide

5.2 Displaying Element Information

5.2.13.3 Element Statements

This area lists each statement in the element as of the level requested. For each statement, it identifies the level at which the statement was inserted (and deleted, as appropriate). A percent (%) sign marks those statements that were inserted as of the level displayed. This is useful in searching for these statements (using the ISPF FIND command, for example). All fields are display-only. Field Level (no title) columns 1-7 Description Level at which the statement shown to the right was inserted into the element (+ll). For statements inserted as of this level, a percent sign (%) precedes the level number. Text of the statement.

Text (no title) columns 9-n

5.2.14 Element Changes Panel

The Element Changes panel appears from the: Display Elements panel when you select option C on the Display Elements panel and uniquely qualify the element you want. Element Selection List when you select option C and DISPLAY LIST = Y. Confirmation panel, when you select option C and DISPLAY LIST = N. Summary of Levels panel, when you type C next to an element level. Library Selection List panel, when you type C next to an element level.
BROWSE -- ZSXJMA1.C1#1TMPL.LIST --------------- LINE COMMAND ===> TOP OF DATA COL 1 8 SCROLL ===> CSR

ELEMENT CHANGES ENVIRONMENT: ELEMENT: DEMO C1DEMOCB SYSTEM: FINANCE TYPE: COPYBOOK

27MAY 1

1 :53

SUBSYSTEM: ACCTREC STAGE: QA

------------------------ SOURCE LEVEL INFORMATION ----------------------VV.LL SYNC USER DATE TIME STMTS CCID COMMENT ----- ---- -------- ------- ----- ----- ------------ --------------------1. ZSXJMA1 16MAR 1 18:48 3 C1DEMO 1. 1 ZSXJMA1 5MAY 1 1 :15 5 JAB DEMO STUFF GENERATED ZSXJMA1 5MAY 1 1 :15 5 JAB DEMO STUFF RETRIEVED ZSXJMA1 5MAY 1 1 :11 DEMO RETRIEVAL + 1 1 SAMPLE-COPYBOOK-RECORD-MODIFIED.

Chapter 5. Displaying Endevor Information 5-21

5.2 Displaying Element Information

The Element Changes panel displays all inserts and deletions made to the element between the specified level and its immediate predecessor. By default, this panel displays the current level. To view the changes from previous levels, go to the Summary of Levels panel, type C next to each level you want to browse, and press Enter. Note: If you have selected multiple elements for display, press End to view the next Element Changes panel.

5.2.15 Fields
The Element Changes panel fields are described next:

5.2.15.1 Panel Title and Element Identification

This area displays the panel title, Element Changes, with the current date and time shown to the right (ddmmmyy hh:mm). The fields that follow identify the element whose change history is displayed. All fields are display-only. Field Environment System Subsystem Element Type Stage Description Name of the environment in which the element is defined. Name of the system under which the element is defined. Name of the subsystem under which the element is defined. Name of the element. Element type. ID of the stage in which the element resides.

5.2.15.2 Source Level Information

summary of fields and elements This area summarizes each element level, up to the level requested. If you are browsing the current level of the element, this area provides information about the last time the element was processed by the generate or move processor, and/or retrieved. All fields are display-only. Field VV.LL Description Number that identifies the element level described on this line (in vv.ll format).

5-22 User Guide

5.2 Displaying Element Information

Field Sync User Date Time Stmts CCID Comment Generated

Description Indicates whether this level was created through synchronization (S) or level consolidation (C). Level user ID. Level date (in ddmmmyy format). Level time (in hh:mm format). Number of statements in this level. Level change control ID. Level comment. Information to describe the last time the generate processor was run for any level of the element. This data includes: the ID of the user who requested the associated action, date and time of the GENERATE action, number of statements processed, and CCID and comments associated with the action, if any. If the generate processor has not been run for the element, this line reads "THIS ELEMENT HAS NOT BEEN PROCESSED." If the element has been restored (or transferred to Endevor from an archive data set), but has not yet been generated, this prompt reads "PROCESS??" (instead of "GENERATED"). This indicates that the status of the generate processor information taken from the archive data set during the restore (or transfer) may be out of sync with the current processor output, if any. For example, assuming you deleted the element at the time it was last archived, the processor output was deleted as well. The processor information in the archive data set for the element remained, however, and was restored/transferred along with the other information for the element.

Chapter 5. Displaying Endevor Information 5-23

5.2 Displaying Element Information

Field Retrieved

Description Information to describe the last time any level of the element was retrieved. This data includes: the ID of the user responsible, date and time of the RETRIEVE action, and any comments associated with the processing. If an element has been moved, signed in (using the Signin action), restored, or transferred to Endevor from an archive data set since the last RETRIEVE, any information related to the last RETRIEVE is blanked out and is not reflected here.

5.2.15.3 Element Statements

This area lists each statement in the element that changed as of the requested level. For statements that were deleted, this area indicates the level at which the previous form of the statement was inserted. All fields are display-only. Field Level (no title) columns 1-7 Description Level at which the statement to the right was inserted into the element (+ll). If the statement was deleted as of the level being displayed, a second number displays (+ll-ll). Either the add (+ll) or the delete (-ll) number references the level displayed. Text of the statement.

Text (no title) columns 9-n

5.2.16 Element History Panel

The Element History panel appears from the: Display Elements panel when you request option H on the Display Elements panel, and uniquely qualify the element you want. Element Selection List panel when you request option H and DISPLAY LIST = Y. Confirmation panel when you request option H and DISPLAY LIST = N.

5-24 User Guide

5.2 Displaying Element Information

Summary of Levels panel, when you type H next to an element level. Library Selection List panel.
BROWSE -- ZSXJMA1.C1#1TMPL.LIST --------------- LINE COMMAND ===> TOP OF DATA COL 1 8 SCROLL ===> CSR

ELEMENT HISTORY ENVIRONMENT: ELEMENT: DEMO C1DEMOCB SYSTEM: FINANCE TYPE: COPYBOOK

27MAY 1

1 :54

SUBSYSTEM: ACCTREC STAGE: QA

------------------------- SOURCE LEVEL INFORMATION ---------------------VV.LL SYNC USER DATE TIME STMTS CCID COMMENT ----- ---- -------- ------- ----- ----- ------------ ------------------1. ZSXJMA1 16MAR 1 18:48 3 C1DEMO 1. 1 ZSXJMA1 5MAY 1 1 :15 5 JAB DEMO STUFF GENERATED ZSXJMA1 5MAY 1 1 :15 5 JAB DEMO STUFF RETRIEVED ZSXJMA1 5MAY 1 1 :11 DEMO RETRIEVAL %+ 1 1 SAMPLE-COPYBOOK-RECORD-MODIFIED. %+ 1 3 SAMPLE-COPYBOOK-FIELD1-MODIFIED PIC X(8 ). %+ 1 3 SAMPLE-COPYBOOK-FIELD2-MODIFIED PIC X(8 ).

The Element History panel displays all statements that ever existed in the element, from the base level through the level requested. For each statement, the display identifies the level at which the statement was first inserted and the level at which it was deleted. By default, this panel displays the current level. To view the history of previous levels, go to the Summary of Levels panel, type H next to each level you want to view, and press Enter. Note: If you have selected multiple elements for display, press End to view the next Element History panel.

5.2.17 Fields
The Element History panel fields are described next:

5.2.17.1 Panel Title and Element Identification

This area displays the panel title with the current date and time shown to the right (ddmmmyy hh:mm). The fields that follow identify the element for which history information is displayed. All fields are display-only. Field Environment System Description Name of the environment in which the element resides. Name of the system to which the element is defined.

Chapter 5. Displaying Endevor Information 5-25

5.2 Displaying Element Information

Field Subsystem Element Type Stage

Description Name of the subsystem to which the element is defined. Name of the element. Element type. ID of the stage in which the element resides.

5.2.17.2 Source Level Information

This area summarizes each element level, up to the level requested. If you are browsing the current level of the element, this area provides information about the last time the element was processed by the generate or move processor, and/or retrieved. All fields are display-only. Field VV.LL Sync User Date Time Stmts CCID Comment Description Number that identifies the element level described on this line (in vv.ll format). Indicates whether this level was created through synchronization (S) or level consolidation (C). Level user ID. Level date (in ddmmmyy format). Level time (in hh:mm format). Number of statements in this level. Level change control ID. Level comment.

5-26 User Guide

5.2 Displaying Element Information

Field Generated

Description Information about the last run of the generate processor for any level of the element. This data includes: the ID of the user who requested the associated action, date and time of the GENERATE action, number of statements processed, and CCID and comments associated with the action, if any. If the generate processor has not been run for the element, this line reads "THIS ELEMENT HAS NOT BEEN PROCESSED." If the element has been restored (or transferred to Endevor from an archive data set), but has not yet been generated, this line reads "PROCESS??" (instead of "GENERATED"). This indicates that the status of the generate processor information taken from the archive data set during the restore (or transfer) may be out of sync with the current processor output, if any. For example, assuming you deleted the element at the time it was last archived, the processor output was deleted as well. The processor information in the archive data set for the element remained, however, and was restored/transferred along with the other information for the element.

Retrieved

Information to describe the last time any level of the element was retrieved. This data includes: the ID of the user responsible, date and time of the RETRIEVE action, and any comments associated with the processing. If an element has been moved, signed in (using the Signin action), restored, or transferred to Endevor from an archive data set since the last RETRIEVE, any information related to the last RETRIEVE is blanked out and is not reflected here.

Chapter 5. Displaying Endevor Information 5-27

5.2 Displaying Element Information

5.2.17.3 Element Statements

This area lists each statement that was ever a part of the element (up through the level being displayed), with an indication of the level at which the statement was inserted (and deleted, as appropriate). A percent sign (%) marks each statement that was inserted or deleted after the base level. This is useful in searching for these statements (using the ISPF FIND command, for example). All fields are display-only. Field Level (no title) columns 1-7 Description Level at which the statement shown to the right was inserted (+ll). If the statement was deleted subsequently (at or before the level as of which the history is displayed), a second number displays (+ll-ll). For statements inserted or deleted after the base version, "%" precedes the level number at which the statement was inserted/deleted. Text of the statement

Text (no title) Columns 9-n

5-28 User Guide

5.3 Displaying Footprint Information

Footprints are encrypted identification information placed in source, object, and load modules by Endevor, to associate those modules with a particular element. Endevor uses footprints to keep source synchronized with executables. For more information about footprints, see the Administration Guide.

5.3.1 Endevor Footprint Display Panel

To display information about the source associated with an executable, select option 2 on the Display Options Menu. Endevor displays the Footprint Display panel, which allows you to: Display a member list, showing any available footprint information. Display a list of CSECTs for a load module member, the footprint information for each CSECT, and the footprint for the associated load module. Browse the source associated with footprinted members, CSECTs, or load modules. Request any of the element displays--the Summary of Levels panel, the Element Browse panel, the Element History panel, the Element Changes panel, and/or the Element Master panel--for footprinted members, CSECTs, or load modules.
---------------------- ENDEVOR - FOOTPRINT DISPLAY ------------------Option ===> blank - Member selection list I - Display load module CSECTS and Endevor footprints L - Display the library member FROM ISPF LIBRARY: PROJECT ===> LIBRARY ===> TYPE ===> MEMBER ===>

THRU MEMBER ===>

OTHER PARTITIONED OR SEQUENTIAL DATA SET: DATA SET NAME ===>

5.3.2 Fields
The Endevor - Footprint Display fields are described next.

Chapter 5. Displaying Endevor Information 5-29

5.3 Displaying Footprint Information

5.3.2.1 Option Field

Options I and L are valid only when you provide a fully qualified member name on the Footprint Display panel. Use This Option Blank To Display: A member selection list, including the footprint information for each non-load member, if available. Endevor displays the list on the Library Selection List panel. A list of CSECTs and any associated footprints for a specific load module. Endevor displays the CSECT list on the Endevor Load Module IDR Display panel. The contents of a specified non-load module member. Endevor returns a standard ISPF browse panel showing the member requested.

5.3.2.2 From ISPF Library Fields

Specify the library for which you want a list, or the member for which you want information, in these fields. Note: A member name is required for options I or L.

5.3.2.3 Other Partitioned or Sequential Data Set Field

Use these fields to identify the library in which the member you want resides, and optionally, the member name itself, in the format 'library name(member name)'. To indicate that a range of members in the data set should be listed, enter the first data set name in the OTHER PARTITIONED OR SEQUENTIAL DATA SET field, and specify the final member in the THRU MEMBER field.

5-30 User Guide

5.3 Displaying Footprint Information

5.3.3 Library Selection List

When you leave the OPTION field blank on the Footprint Display panel, Endevor displays a Library Selection List showing all the members in the specified library. For each footprinted member, Endevor includes the footprint information. The LIBRARY field displays the library from which the list was produced.

FOOTPRINT -------------- LIBRARY SELECTION LIST -----Command ===> Library: BST.NDVRC1.SRCLIB I - Display load module CSECTS and Endevor footprints L - Display the library member For Endevor Elements: B - Browse element C - Show changes only S H - Show change history M - Show Master Record |--------------------- F O O T P R I N T MEMBER SYSTEM SUBSYSTEM ELEMENT TYPE S BC1PACRT RGASYST UTILITY BC1PACRT ASMEXITS 1 BC1PAL1 BC1PAPNT BC1PAPRV RGASYST UTILITY BC1PAPRV ASMEXITS 1 BC1PAREV RGASYST UTILITY BC1PAREV ASMEXITS 1 BC1PCRE7 BC1PELN1 BC1PELN2 BC1PELN3 BC1PINIT BC1PINVB NDVR25 INTERNAL BC1PINVB ASMIPGMR 2

ROW 3 TO 4 OF 111 Scroll ===> CSR

Show change summary ------------------| VV.LL DATE TIME 1. 2 23SEP 1 15:49 1.13 23SEP 1 16:22 1. 3 23SEP 1 14:32

1. 3 12JUL 1 16:23

5.3.4 Fields
The Library Selection List panel fields are described next:

5.3.4.1 Option Field

To select the members you want to view, type the appropriate option value to the left of the member name. Note: The member must have a footprint in order to select option S, B, H, C, or M. Use This Option I To Display: Endevor Load Module IDR Display, showing the footprint for each CSECT, and for the associated load module. ISPF panel showing the contents of the member.

Chapter 5. Displaying Endevor Information 5-31

5.3 Displaying Footprint Information

Use This Option S, B, H, C, M

To Display: One of the panels described under "Display Element Information:" respectively, the Summary of Levels panel, the Element Browse panel, the Element History panel, the Element Changes panel, or the Element Master panel.

5.3.4.2 Member Field

The MEMBER field displays the name of the library member for which footprint information is provided.

5.3.4.3 Footprint Fields

These fields show information stored in the footprint for source, object, and processor-output members. All fields are display-only. Field System Subsystem Element Type S VV.LL Date Time LD Description Name of the system under which the corresponding element is defined. Subsystem under which the element is defined. Name of the Endevor element that corresponds to the member. Name of the element type ID of the stage in which the element was processed to create this member. Version/level of the element processed to create this member (vv.ll). Date the member was footprinted (ddmmmyy). Time the member was footprinted (hh:mm). This field has a value of Y if this footprint was created by the Endevor load utility. Load utility footprints cannot be used to verify element integrity. They indicate only the location to which the element was loaded, and the date and time when the load took place.

5-32 User Guide

5.3 Displaying Footprint Information

5.3.5 Endevor Load Module IDR Display Panel

When you select option I and specify a member on the Footprint Display panel or the Library Selection List, Endevor displays the Load Module IDR Display panel, showing each CSECT in the selected load module. For those CSECTs that are footprinted, it includes the footprint data. The load module's library and member names are identified in the LIBRARY and MEMBER fields.

------------------ ENDEVOR LOAD MODULE IDR DISPLAY ----- ROW 1 TO 6 OF 6 Command ===> Scroll ===> CSR Library: NDVR.EMVSDEMO.PROD.LOADLIB Member: FINARP 1 Options: B - Browse element C - Show changes only S - Show change summary H - Show change history M - Show Master Record |------------------- F O O T P R I N T ------------------------| CSECT SYSTEM SUBSYSTEM ELEMENT TYPE S VV.LL DATE TIME LD LOADMOD FINANCE ACCTREC FINARP 1 COBOL 2 1. 1 19JUN 1 18:17 FINARP 1 FINANCE ACCTREC FINARP 1 COBOL 2 1. 1 19JUN 1 18:17 FINARS 1 FINANCE ACCTREC FINARS 1 COBOL 2 1. 19JUN 1 18:16 ILBOCOM ILBOSRV ILBOQIO BOTTOM OF DATA

5.3.6 Fields
The Endevor Load Module Display fields are described next:

5.3.6.1 Option Field

To select the CSECTs you want to view, type the appropriate option value to the left of the CSECT name. Use This Option S B H C M To Display: Summary of Levels panel. Element Browse panel. Element History panel. Element Changes panel. Element Master panel.

Chapter 5. Displaying Endevor Information 5-33

5.3 Displaying Footprint Information

5.3.6.2 CSECT Field

The CSECT field displays the name of the CSECT for which footprint information is shown to the right. If *LOADMOD appears in the CSECT field, the displayed footprint is for the load module associated with the CSECTs listed on the panel. If no information is displayed to the right, the CSECT has not been footprinted.

5.3.6.3 Footprint Fields

These fields show information stored in the CSECTs' footprints. All fields are display-only. Field System Subsystem Element Type S VV.LL Date Time LD Description Name of the system under which the corresponding element is defined. Name of the subsystem under which the element is defined. Name of the Endevor element that corresponds to the CSECT. Name of the element type. ID of the stage in which the element was processed to create this CSECT. Version/level of the element processed to create this CSECT (vv.ll). Date the CSECT was footprinted (ddmmmyy). Time the CSECT was footprinted (hh:mm). This field has a value of Y if this footprint was created by the Endevor load utility. Load utility footprints cannot be used to verify element integrity. They indicate only the location to which the element was loaded, and the date and time when the load took place.

5-34 User Guide

5.3 Displaying Footprint Information

5.3.7 ISPF Browse Panel for a Footprinted Member

When you request option L and specify a member on the Footprint Display panel or the Library Selection List, Endevor displays the ISPF Browse panel for a Footprinted Member. It is a standard ISPF browse panel, showing the source for the specified member. To return to the Footprint Display panel or the Library Selection List, press End.

BROWSE -- BST.C1DEMO.CNTL(BC1JPAN) ---------------- LINE COL 1 8 COMMAND ===> SCROLL ===> CSR TOP OF DATA // ( COPY JOBCARD ) // // // BC1JPAN - THIS JOB WILL LINKEDIT THE NECESSARY PANVALET // SOFTWARE TO PROVIDE THE CA-ENDEVOR PANVALET SUPPORT // PAMLIB - IS THE CURRENT SYSTEM PANVALET LIBARARY AND SHOULD // BE MODIFIED FOR YOUR SITES NAMING // // //PANLINK EXEC PGM=IEWL,PARM='LIST,NCAL,RENT,XREF,SIZE=(256K,64K)' //SYSLMOD DD DISP=SHR,DSN=iprfx.iqual.CONLIB //PAMLIB DD DSN=SYS2.PANVALET.LOAD,DISP=SHR //SYSUT1 DD UNIT=tdisk,SPACE=(CYL,(5,3)) //SYSPRINT DD SYSOUT= //SYSLIN DD INCLUDE SYSLMOD(C1PIPAM) INCLUDE PAMLIB(PAM) ENTRY C1PIPAM1 NAME C1PIPAM1(R) INCLUDE SYSLMOD(C1PIPAM) INCLUDE PAMLIB(PAM)

Chapter 5. Displaying Endevor Information 5-35

5.4 Displaying Site Definitions

To display the site definitions defined during installation, select option 3 on the Display Options Menu. Endevor displays the Site Information panel. The values displayed on this panel are obtained from your current Endevor Defaults Table. To return to the Display Options Menu, press End.

5.4.1 Site Information Panel

The Site Information panel is shown next.

---------------------- Site Information from C1DEFLTS ------------------------Command ===> Customer Name..... -----------------Site ID........... Release........... Environments...... Userid Start...... Userid Length..... Batch ID.......... SPFEDIT QNAME..... SYSIEWL QNAME..... Authorized Tables. Gen in place/SO... CA-LSERV JRNL SBS. PITR Journal Grp.. SYMBOLICS Table... Computer Associates Inc., Endevor Development Function Controls -------------------- Options Access Table...... BC1TNEQU ACM...... Y BX C SMF Record Number. 23 DB2...... Y 4 Library System.... LB QuickEdit Y 1 Library Program... AFOLIBR ESI......Y 7 VIO Unit.......... VIO INFO.... N 1 Work Unit......... SYSDA LIBENV... Y SPFEDIT Work Volser....... NETMAN... N SYSIEWLP Lines per Page.... 6 PDM...... Y IGNORE MODHLI............ BST PROC..... Y N Signout on fetch.. N Mixed Format...... (NONE) ESYMBOLS (Press ENTER for Next Panel)

---------------------- Site Information from C1DEFLTS ------------------------Command ===> ------------------------- Package Processing Options ------------------------Approval Required..... Y Cast Security......... N Security.. ESI Foreground Execution.. Y Component Validation.. O High-level Index for Generated Remote Pkg Ship JCL... --------------------------Element Catalog............ Package Control File....... Installation Macro Library. CCID Validation Data Set... ACM Index Root Data Set.... ACM Index Xref Data Set.... Control Data Set Names --------------------------BST.DEVEL.ELMCATL BST.DEVR4 .VSAMRLS.PACKAGE BST.P4 B4 S2.MACLIB BST.NDVR4 BST.NDVR4 .ACMROOT .ACMXREF

------------------------ Endevor Parmlib Information ------------------------Endevor Parmlib Data Set... BST.ENDEVOR.PARMLIB Type Sequence Mbr...... ETYPESEQ (Press ENTER for Next Panel)

5-36 User Guide

5.4 Displaying Site Definitions

---------------------- Site Information from C1DEFLTS ------------------------Command ===> --------------------------CA-7 Region CCI Nodename... JCL Data Set Index Number.. JCL Data Set Index Symbol.. JCL Data Set Name.......... CA-7 Interface Values ---------------------------A44SENF &ENDEVOR APCDAL.ENDEVOR.JCLLIB

(Press ENTER for First Panel)

Chapter 5. Displaying Endevor Information 5-37

5.5 Fields

5.5 Fields
The Site Information Panel fields are described next.

5.5.1.1 Customer Name Field

Your company name appears at the top of this screen.

5.5.1.2 Function Controls Fields

Field Site ID Release Environments Userid Start Description ID assigned to the current site. Volume serial number of the installation tape. Number of environments defined at the current site. First position within a user ID that is compared for ownership (that is, for signout and override signout processing). This field is used when the USERID BATCHID field is 0 (JOBNAME). Length of the user ID that is compared for ownership. This field is used with the USERID START field when the USERID BATCHID field is 0 (JOBNAME). Where the user ID associated with a batch job is extracted: 0 From the JOBNAME; the user ID is checked for validity using the userid start and length parameters as established previously. 1 From the USER parameter specified on the job card submitted with the job. If no USER parameter is defined, you receive an error message. 2 From the USER parameter if it is specified on the jobcard or, if no USER parameter has been specified, from the JOBNAME. The user ID is validated using the user ID start and length parameters as established previously. SPFEDIT QNAME Queue name used when Endevor issues an enqueue on a sequential or partitioned data set (not RECFM=U), to prevent simultaneous update to that data set. The data set may be a source library, object library, or other user library. The resource name for the enqueue is the data set name.

Userid Length

Batch ID

5-38 User Guide

5.5 Fields

Field SYSIEWL QNAME

Description Queue name used when Endevor issues an enqueue on a PDS defined with RECFM = U (for example, a load library), to prevent simultaneous update to that PDS. The resource name for the enqueue is the data set name. Indicates whether Endevor's security tables have to be loaded from authorized libraries. Values are: Require authorized libraries are required. Allow unauthorized libraries are allowed, but Endevor issues a warning message. Ignore Endevor does not check the library's authorization.

Authorized Tables

Gen in place/SO

Indicates, on a site level, whether Endevor is to perform a Generate in-place with or without signout. Y An element is signed out to the user who performs a Generate in-place action. This is the default. N An element retains its signout setting. Endevor will not signout an element to a user who performs a Generate in-place action.

CA-LServ SUBSYS

The subsystem name associated with the L-Serv address space. This field must be specified if L-Serv is used to control one or more Endevor control files and the default L-Serv subsystem name is not used. An L-Serv journal group ID that relates the package data set named in this macro to a specfiec set of L-Serv journal files. of this parameter enables journaling of changes to Master Control Files and the the Package Control File. The format is: (gggg,nnnn) Where: gggg The journal group ID associated with the package journal files. nnnn The journal group subsystem ID. For more information, see the Utilities Guide.

PITR Journal Grp

Site Symbol Tbl

Name of a load module containing the site symbol definition table created by the user. For more information, see the Installation Guide. Name of the Access Security Table currently in use (applicable for native security).

Access Tbl

Chapter 5. Displaying Endevor Information 5-39

5.5 Fields

Field SMF Record Number Library System

Description Record number assigned to SMF records written out by Endevor. Indicates the library management system at your site: LB AllFusion CA-Librarian and PDS PV AllFusion CA-Panvalet and PDS blank OS/PDS only

Librarian Program

Applicable only if your library management system is AllFusion CA-Librarian (LB). This entry indicates the name of the AllFusion CA-Librarian load module for your site. Symbolic device name for temporary disk data sets that are stored on a virtual I/O unit. Symbolic device name for temporary disk data sets that are not stored on a virtual I/O unit. Volume serial number of the disk used to store temporary data sets. Number of lines printed per page, for reports generated by Endevor.

VIO Unit Work Unit Work Volser Lines/page

5-40 User Guide

5.5 Fields

Field MODHLI

Description Allows you to assign a prefix other than SYSyyddd to a temporary data set, creating a pseudo-temporary data set. This applies to temporary data sets that are allocated DISP=MOD at any step in a processor only. Regular temporary data sets, which are not DISP=MOD, use the standard z/OS temporary data set name. This prefix appears as the first node of the data set name. The value specified is a high-level qualifier, which all Endevor users are authorized to use when allocating, deleting, and opening files for output. The effective name generated is: modhli.Dyyddd.Thhmmss.RA0.jobname.ddname Where: modhli The data specified in the MODHLI operand yyddd Julian date hhmmss Time in hours, minutes, and seconds jobname Same value as jobname ddname DDname specified in the processor RA0 is used instead of RA000 to accommodate 8-byte MODHLI and 8-byte DDnames. If MODHLI is not specified in the Defaults Table, the effective name is: SYSyyddd.Thhmmss.RA0.jobname.ddname

Signout on Fetch

Indicates if the fetched element is signed out to you. Valid values are: Y The element is signed out when it is fetched, unless it is signed out by someone else. N The element is not signed out. This value affects Add (Fetch), Generate (Copyback), Move (Fetch), Transfer (Fetch), Search and Replace (Fetch) and Quick-Edit.

Chapter 5. Displaying Endevor Information 5-41

5.5 Fields

Field Mixed Format

Description Indicates whether Endevor accepts mixed-case entries in CCID, COMMENT, and DESCRIPTION fields. Values are: CCID accept mixed-case in CCID fields. Comment accept mixed-case in COMMENT fields. Description accept mixed-case in DESCRIPTION fields. All accept mixed-case in all three fields. None do not accept mixed-case in any field.

5.5.1.3 Options Fields

The information coded in this section indicates whether you have additional Endevor facilities (such as ACM or ESI) in use at your site at this time. These fields are display-only. Field ASCM DB2 ESI INFO LIBENV Description Indicates if the Endevor ACM facility is installed: Y or N Indicates if the Endevor for DB2 facility is installed: Y or N Indicates if the Endevor ESI facility is installed: Y or N Indicates if the Endevor Information/Management Interface facility is installed: Y or N Indicates if you have the ability to use AllFusion CA-Librarian or AllFusion CA-Panvalet with Endevor: Y or N Indicates if the Endevor Netman Interface facility is installed: Y or N Indicates if the Endevor Parallel Development Manager (PDM) facility is installed: Y or N Indicates if you have the ability to run processors at your site: Y or N

NETMAN PDM PROC

5-42 User Guide

5.5 Fields

5.5.1.4 Package Processing Fields

These fields are display-only. Field Approval Foreground Execution Generated High-lvl Index for Remote PKG JCL Cast Security Description Indicates whether packages must be approved: Y or N Indicates whether packages may be executed in foreground. The data set name used for remote package shipments. Indicates whether to check security authorizations for every action in a package for the user ID requesting package cast: Y or N Indicates whether component validation is enabled for packages. Values are: Y validation is required. O validation is optional. W validation is optional, but Endevor generates a warning if it is not selected. Security Indicates the type of security controlling the package options. APPROVER The site is restricting package actions to package approvers. ESI The site is controlling package options through an external security package such as eTrust CA-ACF2 Security, eTrust CA-Top Secret Security, or IBM RACF via the ESI interface. MIGRATE The site is in transition between Approver security and ESI security. Both are checked. Caution! The approver security rules supersede the ESI security rules. If the user is granted access to the package by the approver rules, ESI is not invoked. ESI is invoked only when the user does not belong to any approver groups associated with the package. (If there are no approver groups associated with the package no access restrictions apply. This occurs with ALL packages before they are CAST.)

Component Validation

Chapter 5. Displaying Endevor Information 5-43

5.5 Fields

5.5.1.5 Control Data Set Names Fields

The following fields are display-only. Field Element Catalog Package Control File Endevor Macro Library CCID Validation Data Set Description Name of the file containing the element catalog. Identifies the data set used in this environment to store packages. Data set name of the source library established for this site during installation. This is the library that contains the Endevor macros. Data set name of the sequential file containing the definitions of the valid CCIDs established for this site. This field is blank if CCID validation is not in use. The name of the VSAM file your site uses to store the name of each Endevor element and all its related components. The recommended name is uprfx.uqual.ACMROOT. The name of the VSAM file your site uses to store the name of each Endevor element and all its related components. The recommended name is uprfx.uqual.ACMROOT.

ACM Query Root Data Set

ACM Query Xref Data Set

5.5.1.6 Endevor Parmlib Information

The following fields are display-only. Field Endevor Parmlib Data Set Type Sequence Mbr Description Data set name of the library that contains the Type Sequence Member. The name of the file that defines the processing order for Global Type Sequencing.

5.5.1.7 CA-7 Interface Values Fields

Field CA-7 Region CCI Nodename JCL Data Set Index Number Description CCI Nodename assigned to the CA-7 address space. Sequence number associated with the CA-7 DEMAND JCL library.

5-44 User Guide

5.5 Fields

Field JCL Data Set Index Symbol JCL Data Set Name

Description Symbol associated with the CA-7 DEMAND JCL library. Data Set name of the CA-7 JCL DEMAND library.

Chapter 5. Displaying Endevor Information 5-45

5.6 Displaying Stage Information

To view the two stage definitions for the current environment, as established during installation, select option 4 on the Display Options Menu. Endevor displays the Stage Information panel. By default, this panel displays the stages for the current environment. To view the stages for a different environment, enter that environment's name in the CURRENT ENV field and press Enter. To return to the Display Options Menu, press End.

5.6.1 Stage Information Panel

The Stage Information panel is shown next.

---------------------------COMMAND ===> CURRENT ENV ===> DEMO NEXT ENV: QAPROD STAGE 1 INFORMATION: ID: Name: Title: MCF data set name: STAGE 2 INFORMATION: ID: Name: Title: MCF data set name:

STAGE INFORMATION

----------------------------

STAGE ID: 1 Q Entry Stage: N QA QUALITY ASSURANCE ZSPRODV1.C1DEMO.QA.CONTROL P Entry Stage: Y PROD PRODUCTION ZSPRODV1.C1DEMO.PROD.CONTROL

5.6.2 Fields
The Stage Information panel fields are described next. All fields except CURRENT ENV are display-only. Field Current Env Next Env Stage ID Description Name of the environment for which the stage definitions are shown. Name of the next environment on the map. Designates first map location in the next environment.

5-46 User Guide

5.6 Displaying Stage Information

Field Stage 1 Information

Description Stage 1 definition information includes the following: ID-- Stage ID. Name-- Stage name. Title-- Stage title. Entry Stage-- Indicates whether Stage 1 is the entry stage. MCF data set name-- Data set name of the Stage 1 Master Control File (MCF).

Stage 2 Information

Stage 2 definition information includes the following: ID-- Stage ID. Name-- Stage name. Title-- Stage title. Entry Stage-- Indicates whether Stage 2 is the entry stage. MCF data set name-- Data set name of the Stage 2 Master Control File (MCF).

Chapter 5. Displaying Endevor Information 5-47

5.7 Displaying System Definitions

To display the system definitions for an environment, select option 5 on the Display Options Menu. Endevor displays the System Display panel, which allows you to identify the environment and system you want to view. When you press Enter, Endevor displays the appropriate System Definition panel. Note: If you do not know the system's name, leave the SYSTEM field blank, or enter a partial name, and press Enter to view the System Selection List.

5.7.1 System Display Panel

The System Display panel is shown next.

---------------------------OPTION ===>

SYSTEM DISPLAY

------------------------------

blank - Display system definition ENVIRONMENT ===> DEMO SYSTEM ===>

5.7.2 Fields
The System Display fields are described next: Field Option Environment Description Always blank for display. Name of the environment under which the system is defined (initially, the current environment). If the system is in a different environment, enter the environment's name in this field. Name of the system you want. Leave blank to request a System Selection List showing all systems. Supply a name mask to restrict the list to those systems whose names begin with the characters specified. For more information on specifying a mask character, see Name Masking in the chapter Endevor Basics.

System

5-48 User Guide

5.7 Displaying System Definitions

5.7.3 System Definition Panel

After you specify a system, Endevor displays the appropriate System Definition panel. When you have finished viewing the information, press END. Note: If you selected multiple system definitions for display, press End to view the next System Definition panel.

DISPLAY -------------------- SYSTEM DEFINITION -------------------------------COMMAND ===> CURRENT ENV: SMPLTEST NEXT ENV: SMPLPROD SYSTEM: ADMIN NEXT SYSTEM ===> ADMIN SYSTEM TITLE ===> ENDEVOR ADMINISTRATION APPLICATIONS UPDATED: 15OCT 1 14:36 BY USER 1 GENERAL OPTIONS: COMMENT ===> Y (Y/N) CCID ===> Y (Y/N) REQ ELM JUMP ACK ===> Y (Y/N) ELEMENT REGISTRATION OPTIONS: DUPLICATE ELEMENT NAME CHECK ===> Y (Y/N) MSG SEVERITY LVL ===> E (W/C/E) DUPLICATE PROC O/P TYPE CHECK ===> N (Y/N) MSG SEVERITY LVL ===> (W/C/E) SIGN-IN/SIGN-OUT OPTIONS: ACTIVATE OPTION ===> Y (Y/N) VALIDATE DATA SET ===> N (Y/N) PROCESSOR TRANSLATION OUTPUT LIBRARIES: STAGE 1 LOAD LIBRARY ===> CA.ENDEVOR.SMPLEMER.PRCSLOAD STAGE 1 LIST LIBRARY ===> CA.ENDEVOR.SMPLEMER.PRCSLIST STAGE 2 LOAD LIBRARY ===> CA.ENDEVOR.SMPLPROD.PRCSLOAD STAGE 2 LIST LIBRARY ===> CA.ENDEVOR.SMPLPROD.PRCSLIST -------------------------------------------------------------------------------

5.7.4 Fields
The System Definition panel fields are described next:

5.7.4.1 Identification Fields

The SYSTEM, SYSTEM TITLE, and NEXT SYSTEM fields on this panel identify the system. All fields are display-only. Field Current Env Next Env System System Title Description Name of the current environment. Name of the next environment on the map. Name of the current system. Descriptive title for the system (1-50 characters).

Chapter 5. Displaying Endevor Information 5-49

5.7 Displaying System Definitions

Field Next System

Description Name of the system at the next stage on the map. When you access this panel in create or update mode, you can enter or change the name in this field. Displays the date, time, and user ID of the last user to update the system definition.

Updated

5.7.4.2 General Options Fields

These fields give the general options for the system. Field Comment Description Indicates whether there must be a comment for actions against this system. Acceptable values are: CCID Y--Each action must have a comment. N--Default. Comments are not required for actions.

Indicates whether there must be a CCID for actions against this system. Acceptable values are: Y--Each action must have a CCID. N--Default. CCIDs are not required for actions.

Req Elm Jump Acknowledgment

Indicates whether users must specify ACKNOWLEDGE ELM JUMP = Y when moving elements. Acceptable values are: Y--User must specify ACKNOWLEDGE ELM JUMP = Y. N--Default. User does not have to specify ACKNOWLEDGE ELM JUMP = Y.

5-50 User Guide

5.7 Displaying System Definitions

5.7.4.3 Element Registration Options Fields

These fields govern the status of element registration. Field DUPLICATE ELEMENT NAME CHECK Description This parameter governs the status of element registration at the system and subsystem level. To activate the checking of duplicate names at the system and subsystem level, enter a Y in this field. To define how you want Endevor to proceed when it encounters two identically named elements, specify one of the following values for the MSG SEVERITY LVL parameter located next to the DUPLICATE ELEMENT NAME CHECK parameter: EThe same element name exists within another subsystem under the same system. The action is terminated, and an error message is issued. CThe same element name exists within another subsystem under the same system. The action is performed, and a caution message is issued. WThe same element name exists within another subsystem under the same system. The action is performed, and a warning message is issued.

Chapter 5. Displaying Endevor Information 5-51

5.7 Displaying System Definitions

Field DUPLICATE PROC O/P TYPE CHECK

Description This parameter governs the status of element registration at the processor group level. To activate the checking of duplicate processor output types, enter a Y in this field. To define how you want Endevor to proceed when it encounters two elements with the same output type, specify one of the following values for the MSG SEVERITY LVL parameter located next to the DUPLICATE PROC O/P TYPE CHECK parameter: EThe same element name and same output type exist within the same system and different type. The action is terminated, and an error message is issued. CThe same element name and same output type exist within the same system and different type. The action is performed, and a caution message is issued. WThe element name already exists within the same system and has the same processor output type associated with it. The action is performed, and a warning message is issued.

5.7.4.4 Signin/Signout Options Fields

These fields contain definitions of the signin/signout functions for the system. Activate Option Y (yes) if the signin/signout facility is in use for this system; otherwise, N (no).

5-52 User Guide

5.7 Displaying System Definitions

Validate Data Set

Y (yes) if the data set validation facility is in use for this system; otherwise, N (no). When an element is retrieved, a RETRIEVE TO data set name (and member name if the data set is a library) is placed in the element master record. When an ADD or UPDATE action is performed against an element, Endevor compares the RETRIEVE TO data set name (and member name if applicable) to the source input data set and member name specified for the action. If the data set (and member) names match, the action continues. If the names do not match, Endevor checks the value in the SIGNOUT OVERRIDE field. If this value is Y, processing continues. If this value is N, the action fails.

5.7.4.5 Last System Backup Fields

These display-only fields contain the date and time of the most recent backup of the system. They appear on the System Definition panel only in display and delete modes. Field Date Time Description Date of most recent system backup. Time of most recent system backup.

Chapter 5. Displaying Endevor Information 5-53

5.7 Displaying System Definitions

5.7.4.6 Processor Translation Output Libraries Fields

These fields contain the names of the Processor Load and List Libraries for the system. Field Stage 1 Load Library Stage 1 List Library Stage 2 Load Library Stage 2 List Library Description Name of the Stage 1 processor load library for this system. Name of the Stage 1 processor listing library for this system. Name of the Stage 2 processor load library for this system. Name of the Stage 2 processor listing library for this system

For more information on these libraries, see the Extended Processors Guide.

5-54 User Guide

5.8 Displaying Subsystem Definitions

To display the subsystem definitions for an environment, select option 6 on the Display Options Menu. Endevor returns the Subsystem Display panel, which allows you to identify the environment, system, and subsystem you want displayed. When you press Enter, Endevor displays the appropriate Subsystem Definition panel. Note: If you do not know the system or subsystem's name, leave the SYSTEM and/or SUBSYSTEM fields blank, or enter a partial name, and press Enter to view the System Selection List and/or the Subsystem Selection List.

5.8.1 Subsystem Display Panel

The Subsystem Display panel is shown next:

---------------------------OPTION ===>

SUBSYSTEM DISPLAY

---------------------------

blank - Display subsystem definition ENVIRONMENT ===> DEMO SYSTEM SUBSYSTEM ===> ===>

5.8.2 Fields
The Subsystem Display fields are described next: Field Option Environment Description Always blank for display. Name of the environment under which the subsystem is defined (initially, the current environment). If the subsystem is in a different environment, enter the environment's name in this field. Name of the system in which the subsystem is defined. Leave blank to request a System Selection List showing all systems. Fill in a name mask to limit the list according to the characters specified. Name of the subsystem you want to display. Leave blank to request a Subsystem Selection List showing all subsystems. Fill in a name mask to limit the list according to the characters specified.

System

Subsystem

Chapter 5. Displaying Endevor Information 5-55

5.8 Displaying Subsystem Definitions

5.8.3 Subsystem Definition Panel

After you specify a system and subsystem, Endevor displays the appropriate Subsystem Definition panel. When you have finished viewing the information, press Enter. Note: If you selected multiple subsystem definitions for display, press End to view the next Subsystem Definition panel.

DISPLAY ------------------ SUBSYSTEM DEFINITION COMMAND ===> CURRENT ENV: BST SYSTEM: FINANCE NEXT ENV: QAPROD SYSTEM TITLE: FINANCIAL APPLICATIONS SUBSYSTEM: ACCTPAY TITLE: ACCOUNTS PAYABLE NEXT SUBSYSTEM: ACCTPAY UPDATED: 31MAY 1 1: 4 DA1DM47

--------------------------

5.8.4 Fields
The Subsystem Definition panel fields are described next. All fields are display-only. Field Current Env System Next Env System Title Subsystem Title Next subsystem Description Name of the current environment. Name of the system in which the subsystem is defined. Name of the next environment on the map. Descriptive title for the system. Name of the subsystem being processed. Descriptive title for the subsystem (1-50 characters). Name of the subsystem at the next map location. When you access this panel in create or update mode, you can change the subsystem name. Displays the date, time, and user ID of the last user to update the subsystem definition.

Updated

5-56 User Guide

5.9 Displaying Type Definitions

Unlike system and subsystem definitions, types are specific to a particular stage within a particular system. Therefore, type definitions are individually defined, one for each stage, during installation. (For more information on defining types during installation, see the Installation Guide.)

5.9.1 Type Display Panel

To display the type definitions for a particular system, select option 7 on the Display Options Menu. Endevor displays the Type Display panel, which allows you to identify the type whose definition you want to view. When you press Enter, Endevor displays the appropriate Type Definition Panel. Note: If you do not know the system or type name, leave the SYSTEM and/or TYPE fields blank, or enter a partial name, and press Enter to view the System and/or Type Selection List.

----------------------------OPTION ===>

TYPE DISPLAY

-------------------------------

blank - Display type definition ENVIRONMENT ===> DEMO SYSTEM TYPE STAGE ===> ===> ===> A A - TEST B - PROD

5.9.2 Fields
The Type Display fields are described next: Field Option Environment Description Always blank for display. Name of the environment under which the element type is defined (initially, the current environment). If the element type is in a different environment, enter the environment's name in this field. Name of the system in which the element type is defined. Name of the element type you want. ID of the stage in which the element type is defined.

System Type Stage

Chapter 5. Displaying Endevor Information 5-57

5.9 Displaying Type Definitions

5.9.3 Type Selection List

When you leave the TYPE field blank or supply a partial name on the Type Display panel, Endevor displays a Type Selection List showing the element types defined in the selected system. To select the types you want to view, type an S to the left of each type's name and press Enter.

-------------------------COMMAND ===> ENVIRONMENT: DEMO TYPE TYPE CLISTS FINANCE s JCL FINANCE COPYBOOK FINANCE MACRO FINANCE ASSEM FINANCE COBOBJ FINANCE COBLNK FINANCE ASMLNK FINANCE COBXREF FINANCE LINKCARD FINANCE COPY FINANCE

TYPE SELECTION LIST

--------------- ROW 1 OF 11 SCROLL ===> GE

SYSTEM: FINANCE STAGE: Q DESCRIPTION PRODUCTION CLISTS PRODUCTION JCL PRODUCTION COPYBOOKS PRODUCTION MACROS PRODUCTION ASSEMBLER ASSEMBLE ONLY PRODUCTION COBOL COMPILE TO OBJECT PRODUCTION COBOL COMPILE AND LINK PRODUCTION ASSEMBLER ASSEMBLE AND LINK PRODUCTION COBOL COMP AND LNK W/MONITOR PRODUCTION LINK EDIT CARDS PRODUCTION COPYBOOKS BOTTOM OF DATA

5.9.4 Fields
The Type Selection List panel fields are described next. All fields except the SELECTION field are display-only. Field Environment System Stage Selection (no title) Type Type Description Description Name of the current environment. Name of the system under which the element type is defined. ID of the stage under which the element type is defined. Used to select a type for display. Type an S in this column next to the type you want. Name of the type. Description of the type.

5-58 User Guide

5.9 Displaying Type Definitions

5.9.5 Type Definition Panel

After you specify a system and type, Endevor displays the appropriate Type Definition panel. When you have finished viewing the information, press Enter. Note: If you selected multiple type definitions for display, press End to view the next Type Definition panel.

DISPLAY ---------------------COMMAND ===> CURRENT ENV: NEXT ENV: DESCRIPTION: UPDATED: QA1 QA1

TYPE DEFINITION 1 B SYSTEM: SYSTEM:

-----------------------------PDS PDS TYPE: TYPE: COBOL COBOL

STAGE ID: STAGE ID:

COBOL TYPE WITH PROCESSOR 3MAY 2 9:59 BY MONJO 6B ----------------- ELEMENT OPTIONS ------------------FWD/REV/IMG DELTA: R (F/R/I) COMPRESS BASE/ENCRYPT NAME: Y (Y/N) DFLT PROC GRP: COBOUT REGRESSION PCT: REGR SEV: I (I/W/C/E) SOURCE LENGTH: 8 COMPARE FROM: 7 COMPARE TO: 72 AUTO CONSOL: Y LANGUAGE: COBOL PV/LB LANG: COBOL REMOVE/CONSOL AT LVL: 96 HFS RECFM: (COMP/CR/CRLF/F/LF/NL/V) LVLS TO REMOVE/CONSOL: 5 DATA FORMAT: B FILE EXT: aTzATZ ------------- COMPONENT LIST OPTIONS ---------------FWD/REV DELTA: F (F/R) AUTO CONSOL: Y (Y/N) CONSOL AT LVL: 96 LVLS TO CONSOL: 5 -------------------LIBRARIES --------------------BASE/IMAGE LIBRARY: BST.&C1EN.&C1ST1..&C1SY..&C1TY..PERM.BASE DELTA LIBRARY: BST.&C1EN.&C1ST1..&C1SY..&C1TY..PERM.DLTA INCLUDE LIBRARY: BST.&C1EN.&C1ST1..&C1SY..&C1TY..PERM.INCL SOURCE O/P LIBRARY: BST.&C1EN.&C1ST1..&C1SY..&C1TY..PERM.OUTP EXPAND INCLUDES: N (Y/N)

5.9.6 Fields
The Type Definition panel fields are described next:

5.9.6.1 Identification Fields

The first four fields on the Type Definition panel display the current location and type name. These fields are display-only. Field Current Env Stage ID System Type Description Name of the current environment. Name of the current stage. Name of the current system. Name of the type.

Chapter 5. Displaying Endevor Information 5-59

5.9 Displaying Type Definitions

The next four fields indicate the next location on the map, and the type name at that location. If you have accessed this panel to create or update a type definition, you can change the value in the TYPE field. Otherwise these fields are display-only. Field Next Env Stage ID System Type Description Name of the environment at the next map location. Name of the stage at the next map location. Name of the system at the next map location. Name of the type at the next map location. You can change the type name when you access this panel in create or update mode.

5.9.6.2 Description Field

The DESCRIPTION field displays a 1- to 50-character description of the type.

5.9.6.3 Updated Field

Displays the date, time, and user ID of the last user to update the type definition. Element Options Fields Field Fwd/rev delta Description Specifies delta storage format for elements of this type. Acceptable values are: R--Default. Reverse delta format. F--Forward delta format. I--Indexed. Compress base/ encrypt name Indicates whether to encrypt and compress the base form of elements stored in reverse delta format. Acceptable values are: N--Default. Do not compress base and encrypt name. Y--Compress base and encrypt name. Dflt Proc Grp Regression pct Identifies the processor group for this type. Maximum acceptable regression percent for elements of this type (2 digits).

5-60 User Guide

5.9 Displaying Type Definitions

Field Regr sev

Description Regression severity. Determines severity of the error message issued when Endevor detects regression. Acceptable values are: I--Informational message. W--Warning message. C--Default. Critical message. E--Fatal message.

Source Length

Logical record length in source statements. The maximum allowable value is 32,000. For variable-length records, this length does not include the four-byte record header.

Compare From

Position within each statement at which Endevor begins comparing to identify changed statements (5 digits in the range 0-32,000). The default is 1. Position within each statement at which Endevor stops comparing to identify changed statements (5 digits in the range 0-32,000). The default is 72, and should be set to 80 for type Process, if you plan to use in-stream data in processors. Indicates whether Endevor is to consolidate change levels automatically. Acceptable values are: Y--Consolidate automatically. When you create the 99th change level for an element, Endevor consolidates levels 1-50 into a single level, changing level 99 to level 50. N--Default. Do not consolidate automatically. If the value of this field is N, LVLS TO CONSOL must be 0.

Compare To

Auto Consol

Consol at Lvl

Specifies the level number at which Endevor consolidates change levels. The default is 99. For example, if the value in this field is 70, Endevor consolidates levels when change level 70 is reached.

Chapter 5. Displaying Endevor Information 5-61

5.9 Displaying Type Definitions

Field Lvls to Consol

Description Indicates the number of deltas to consolidate when the number of levels reaches the figure in the CONSOL AT LVL field. The default is 50. For example, if the value in this field is 30, and the value in the CONSOL AT LVL field is 70, at level 70 Endevor consolidates the oldest 30 deltas into a single consolidation level (level 1). This value must be zero if AUTO CONSOL = N, and cannot be greater than the value in the CONSOL AT LVL field. When moving or transferring with history, Endevor consolidates a number of levels equal to: The number in this field. The number of levels needed to reach the value in the CONSOL AT LVL field.

HFS RECFM

Indicates the record delimeter for USS/HFS files. If no value is specified for an HFS file, the default value of NL is used. Record delimeters and their HFS delimeter types are as follows: COMP--Variable length records compressed by Endevor CR --Carriage return (ASCII and EBCDIC "CR" is hex '0D) CRLF--EBCDIC carriage return/line feed (hex '0D25') F --Fixed length LF --EBCDIC line feed (hex '25') NL --EBCDIC new line character. This is the delimeter used by the editor, OEDIT and OBROWSE. The default value. V --Variable. The first two bytes of the record are the RDW (record descriptor word) and it contains the length of the record including the RDW.

5-62 User Guide

5.9 Displaying Type Definitions

Field Language

Description Defines the source language for the type (1-8 characters). Note: If you specify LINKEDIT in this field, you cannot use NAME or ALIAS statements in the link step of processors associated with this type.

PV/LB Lang

Applicable for installations using a CA-Panvalet or CA-Librarian library to store elements. The 1- to 8-character CA-Panvalet or CA-Librarian source language for the type. For a list of the languages you can use with CA-Panvalet and CA-Librarian, see Acceptable PV/LB Language Values in this chapter. If you plan to use in-stream data in processors and the current type is Process, specify either DATA (for CA-Panvalet) or DAT (for CA-Librarian) in this field.

Data Format

Element classification type from the Local File System (LFS) perspective. Acceptable values are: B--Binary T--Text Blank--Blank

File Ext

Indicates the 0- to 8-character file extension to be used by the AllFusion Change Manager Enterprise Workbench for elements of this type.

5.9.6.4 Component List Options Fields

Field Fwd/Rev Delta Description Specifies delta storage format for component list information. Both the component list base and delta members will be stored in the delta library defined on the type definition. Acceptable values are: R--Reverse delta format. F--Default. Forward delta format. Auto Consol Consol at Lvl The default for component lists is Y (consolidate automatically). See the description of this field in Element Options Fields.

Chapter 5. Displaying Endevor Information 5-63

5.9 Displaying Type Definitions

Field Lvls to Consol

Description See the description of this field in Element Options Fields.

5.9.6.5 Library Fields

Field Base/Image Library Description Name of the base library for the type. Can be PDS or PDS/E, CA-Panvalet, CA-Librarian, or Endevor LIB. Name of the delta library for the type. Can be PDS or PDS/E, CA-Panvalet, CA-Librarian, or Endevor LIB. Name of the PDS or PDS/E, CA-Panvalet, or CA-Librarian INCLUDE library for the type. If specified, members can be included and expanded from this library. Data set name of source output library. Indicates whether INCLUDE statements are expanded when the element is written to the source output library. Acceptable values are: Y--Expand INCLUDE statements. N--Do not expand INCLUDE statements.

Delta library

Include Library

Source O/P Library Expand Includes

5.9.7 Acceptable PV/LB Language Values

If you are using CA-Panvalet or CA-Librarian to store elements, you must indicate the appropriate source language in the PV/LB LANG field on the Type Definition panel. You can use one of the following source language values for CA-Panvalet: ANSCOBOL ALC AUTOCODE BAL COBOL COBOL-72 DATA EZPLUS FORTRAN JCL OBJECT OTHER PL/1 PL/I RPG USER780 USER180

5-64 User Guide

5.9 Displaying Type Definitions

You can use one of the following source language values for CA-Librarian: ASM COB DAT DAT FRG FRH GIS GOF JCL PLF PLI RPG TXT VSB

Chapter 5. Displaying Endevor Information 5-65

5.10 Displaying Processor Group Definitions

A processor group consists of: One generate, one delete, and one move processor, or any combination thereof. (For example, a non-executable element may require only a move processor in its processor group. You cannot, however, have multiple processors of the same type in a processor group.) The default symbolic overrides for the processors' JCL. For more information about processor groups, see the Extended Processors Guide.

5.10.1 Processor Group Display Panel

To view the definition for a processor group, select option 8 on the Display Options Menu. Endevor displays the Processor Group Display panel, which allows you to identify the processor group whose definition you want to display. You need to supply the following information: The environment, system, type, and stage for which the processor group is defined. The name of the processor group. If you do not know the system, type, or processor group name, you can leave the SYSTEM, TYPE, or GROUP fields blank and press Enter to view the System, Type, and/or Processor Group Selection List.

----------------------OPTION ===>

PROCESSOR GROUP DISPLAY

--------------------------

blank - Display processor group definition ENVIRONMENT ===> DEMO SYSTEM TYPE STAGE GROUP ===> FINANCE ===> COBOL ===> Q ===> Q - QA P - PROD

5-66 User Guide

5.10 Displaying Processor Group Definitions

5.10.2 Fields
The Processor Group Display fields are described next: Field Environment Description Name of the environment under which the processor group is defined (initially, the current environment). If the processor group is in a different environment, enter the environment's name in this field. Name of the system in which this processor group resides. Name of the type to which the processor group applies. ID of the stage in which this processor group resides. This must be one of the stage IDs listed to the right. Name of the processor group you wish to display.

System Type Stage

Group

5.10.3 Processor Group Selection List

When you leave the GROUP field blank or supply a partial name on the Processor Group Display panel, Endevor displays the Processor Group Selection List showing the processors defined in the selected system, stage, and type. To select the processors you want to view, type an S to the left of each processor's name and press Enter

--------------------COMMAND ===> CURRENT ENV: TEST NEXT ENV: PROD PROCESSOR GROUP NOPROC ALOADRN ALOADRNS ALOADRU

PROCESSOR GROUP SELECTION LIST STAGE ID: Q STAGE ID: P SYSTEM: FINANCE SYSTEM: FINANCE

------------ ROW 1 OF 14 SCROLL ===> PAGE TYPE: ASMPGM TYPE: ASMPGM

----PROCESSOR GROUP---DESCRIPTION/ OUTPUT TYPE NO PROCESSOR REQUIRED / ASMPGM NOPROC ASSEMBLE/LINK AUTHORIZED RE-ENTRANT / LOAD ASM/LINK AUTH'ZED, RENT, SOURCE OUTD / LOAD ASSEM/LINK AUTHORIZED REUS / LOAD BOTTOM OF DATA

Chapter 5. Displaying Endevor Information 5-67

5.10 Displaying Processor Group Definitions

5.10.4 Fields
The Process Group Selection List panel fields are described next. All fields except the SELECTION field are display-only. Field Current Env Stage ID System Type Next Env Stage ID System Type Selection (no title) Description Name of the current environment. Name of the current stage. Name of the current system. Name of the type to which the processor group(s) apply. Name of the next environment in the map. Name of the first map stage in the next environment. Name of the system in the next environment. Name of the element type in the next environment to which the processor group(s) apply. Field used to select a processor group for display. Type an S in this column, next to the processor group you want to display. Name of the processor group. Description of the processor group.

Processor Group Processor Group Description

5.10.5 Processor Group Definition Panel

After you specify a system, type, stage, and processor group, Endevor displays the appropriate Processor Group Definition panel. The fields that appear on this panel depend on the processor group's type.

5-68 User Guide

5.10 Displaying Processor Group Definitions

The following panel displays processor groups for all types, except type Process.

DISPLAY ---------------COMMAND ===> CURRENT ENV: BST NEXT ENV: QAPROD PROCESSOR GROUP: DESCRIPTION: NEXT PRCSGROUP:

PROCESSOR GROUP DEFINITION SYSTEM: FINANCE SYSTEM: FINANCE

--------------------TYPE: COBPROG TYPE: COBPROG

STAGE ID: P STAGE ID: 1

NEWGRP PROCESSOR O/P TYPE: COBOL COMPILE AND LINK, LISTING IS STORED NEWGRP -------------------

UPDATED: 31MAY 1 1: 4 BY DA1DM47 ----------------------- OUTPUT MANAGEMENT INFORMATION PROCESSOR TO USE FOR MOVE ACTION: PROCESSOR TO USE FOR TRANSFER ACTION: $ - Browse Symbolics GENERATE PROCESSOR: DELETE PROCESSOR: MOVE PROCESSOR: GCOBNBL DLODNNN MLODNNL FOREGROUND : Y : Y : Y M (M/G) G (M/G)

L - List Processor EXECUTION (Y/N) (Y/N) (Y/N)

The Processor Group Definition panel for type Process does not provide information about the next environment, the next processor group, or selection options for the OUTPUT MANAGEMENT INFORMATION fields, because the system definition only allows for two processor load libraries to be defined. For more information about defining processor groups, see the Extended Processors Guide.

5.10.6 Fields
The Processor Group Definition panel fields are described next:

5.10.6.1 Processor Group Identification Fields

The first six fields on this panel identify the current environment. All fields are display-only. Field Current Env Stage ID System Type Description Name of the current environment. Name of the stage in which the processor groups on the list are defined. Name of the system in which the processor groups on the list are defined. Name of the type to which the processor group applies.

Chapter 5. Displaying Endevor Information 5-69

5.10 Displaying Processor Group Definitions

Field Next Env Stage ID System Type Processor group Processor O/P type

Description Name of the environment at the next map location. Name of the stage in which the processor groups on the list are defined at the next map location. Name of the system in which the processor groups on the list are defined at the next map location. Name of the type to which the processor group applies at the next map location. Name of the processor group. The type of output produced by the processor group. For more information on this field, see Element Registration in the chapter Overview.

Description Next Prcsgroup

Description of the processor group. Name of the processor group at the next map location. When you access this panel in create or update mode, you can change the type name. Displays the date, time, and user ID of the last user to update the processor group definition.

Updated

5.10.6.2 Output Management Information Fields

There are four groups of OUTPUT MANAGEMENT INFORMATION fields: Move/Transfer processor selection fields, option fields, processor identification fields, and foreground execution fields. Field Processor to Use for Move Action Description Indicates whether Endevor will execute the move or generate processor when the user initiates a MOVE action. Values are: M--execute the move processor. G--execute the generate processor. Note: A move processor copies the inventory from the source to the target location. If you want to recompile the inventory as part of the MOVE action, specify G in this field.

5-70 User Guide

5.10 Displaying Processor Group Definitions

Field Processor to Use for Transfer Action

Description Indicates whether Endevor will execute the generate or move processor when the user initiates a TRANSFER action. Values are: M--execute the move processor. G--execute the generate processor. Note: The TRANSFER action normally executes a generate processor at the target location. If you want to transfer component lists as part of the TRANSFER action, specify M in this field.

Option Field (untitled)

If the element type is not Process, and the processor group is not named *NOPROC*, then you can type either of the following options to the left of a processor's name to view more information about that processor. The options are: S--view the processor's default symbolic overrides. L--view the processor's JCL.

Generate Processor

The name of the generate processor assigned to the group. If no generate processor is defined, *NOPROC* appears in this field. The name of the delete processor assigned to the group. If no delete processor is defined, *NOPROC* appears in this field. The name of the move processor assigned to the group. If no move processor is defined, *NOPROC* appears in this field. Indicates whether the generate, delete, or move processors identified in the respective PROCESSOR fields can be executed in foreground. The acceptable values are: Y--The processor can be executed in foreground. N--The processor cannot be executed in foreground.

Delete Processor

Move Processor

Foreground Execution

Chapter 5. Displaying Endevor Information 5-71

5.10 Displaying Processor Group Definitions

5.10.7 Processor Group Symbolics Panel

Endevor supports user-defined symbolics in processors. The symbolics defined for each processor in a processor group appear on the Processor Group Symbolics panel. You can use this panel to view and/or override user-defined symbolics for this processor group. For more information on how Endevor handles symbolics, see the Extended Processors Guide To access a Processor Group Symbolics panel from the Processor Group Definition panel, type an S in the SELECTION field next to the processor's name and press Enter. Endevor displays the appropriate Processor Group Symbolics panel.

DISPLAY ---------------- PROCESSOR GROUP SYMBOLICS ------ ROW 1 TO 12 OF 25 COMMAND ===> SCROLL ===> PAGE CURRENT ENV: DEMO STAGE ID: Q SYSTEM: FINANCE TYPE: COBOL PROCESSOR GROUP: COBNCL DESCRIPTION: CICS PRECOMPILE, COMPILE AND LINK, LISTING STORED PROCESSOR: GCOBNCL LOAD LIBRARY: NDVR.DEMO.STG1.PRCSLOAD DEFAULT Values are indicated by "--" OVERRIDE Values are indicated by "O" SYMBOLIC --/O VALUE CICSLIB1 -- SYS5.CICS212.LOADLIB1 CICSLIB2 -- SYS5.CICS212.LOADLIB2 CICSLOAD -- SYS5.CICS212.LOADLIB COBCOMP -- SYS5.COB24.VSCOLIB COBLIB -- SYS5.COB24.VSCLLIB CSYSLIB1 -- &PROJECT..&GROUP.&STG1..COPYLIB CSYSLIB2 -- &PROJECT..&GROUP.&STG2..COPYLIB CSYSLIB3 -- &PROJECT..&GROUP.&STG3..COPYLIB EXPINC -- Y GROUP -- DEMO LISTLIB -- &PROJECT..&GROUP.&STG1..LISTLIB LOADLIB -- &PROJECT..&GROUP.&STG1..LOADLIB

Note: If Endevor cannot display all the symbolics on one panel, press the DOWN and UP PF keys to scroll through the list. Endevor leaves the processor information at the top of the screen while you scroll through the symbolics.

5-72 User Guide

5.10 Displaying Processor Group Definitions

5.10.8 Fields
The Processor Group Symbolics panel fields are described next:

5.10.8.1 Identification Fields

The first eight fields on this panel identify the processor. Field Current Env Stage ID System Type Processor group Description Processor Load Library Description Name of the current environment. Name of the stage in which the processor groups on the list are defined. Name of the system in which the processor groups on the list are defined. Name of the type to which the processor group applies. Name of the processor group. Description of the processor group. Name of the processor. Name of the load library in which the processor resides.

5.10.8.2 Symbolic Identification Fields

The three remaining fields on this panel provide information about the symbolics defined for this processor. Field Symbolic -- (dash)/O Description Name of the symbolic in the PROC statement of the processor. Indicates the status of the value of the symbolic. -- (dash)--Default value for the symbolic. O--Override value for the symbolic. Although these are the default character values distributed with Endevor, they can be changed by the site administrator. Value Value to be assigned to the symbolic during the next run of the processor.

Chapter 5. Displaying Endevor Information 5-73

5.10 Displaying Processor Group Definitions

5.10.9 Processor JCL Panel

To view the JCL for the processors in a processor group from a Processor Group Definition panel, type L (List) in the SELECTION field next to each processor's name and press Enter. Endevor displays the appropriate Processor JCL panels. Note: If you selected multiple processors to display, press End to view the next Processor Display panel.

DISPLAY --------------------- PROCESSOR DISPLAY -------- ROW 1 TO 17 OF 154 COMMAND ===> SCROLL ===> PAGE ---------------------------- PROCESSOR FOOTPRINT ------------------------ENVIRONMENT SYSTEM SUBSYS ELEMENT TYPE STG VV.LL DATE TIME DEMO ADMIN STANDARD GCOBNCL PROCESS 1 1. 1 18FEB 1 18:59 LOAD LIBRARY: NDVR.DEMO.STG1.PRCSLOAD ---------------------------------------------------------------------------TOP OF DATA // // // PERFORMS A CICS PRECOMPILE, COBOL COMPILE AND LINK EDIT // // // //GCOBNCL PROC LISTLIB='&PROJECT..&GROUP.&STG1..LISTLIB', // LOADLIB='&PROJECT..&GROUP.&STG1..LOADLIB', // CICSLOAD='SYS5.CICS212.LOADLIB', // CICSLIB1='SYS5.CICS212.LOADLIB1', // CICSLIB2='SYS5.CICS212.LOADLIB2', // COBLIB='SYS5.COB24.VSCLLIB', // COBCOMP='SYS5.COB24.VSCOLIB', // PROJECT='NDVR', // GROUP='DEMO', // STG1='&C1STAGE.', CURRENT STAGE

Note: Press the DOWN and UP PF keys to scroll through the JCL. Endevor leaves the processor footprint at the top of the screen while you scroll.

5.10.10 Fields
Processor Display fields are described next. Processor Footprint Fields: The following list describes the panel fields. All fields are display-only. Field Environment System Subsystem Description Name of the current environment. Name of the system under which the processor is defined. Name of the subsystem under which the processor is defined.

5-74 User Guide

5.10 Displaying Processor Group Definitions

Field Element Type STG VV.LL Date Time Load Library

Description Name of the processor. Name of the type to which the processor applies. ID of the stage under which the processor is defined. Number that identifies the processor's level (in vv.ll format). Level date (in ddmmmyy format). Level time (in hh:mm format). Name of the load library in which the processor resides.

Chapter 5. Displaying Endevor Information 5-75

5.11 Displaying Approver Group Definitions

This section describes how to display approver group definitions.

5.11.1 Approver Group Display Panel

Approver groups are used during package processing. For details, see the Packages Guide. To review the approver groups currently defined in the specified environment, select option 9 on the Display Options Menu. Endevor displays the Approver Group Display panel, which allows you to identify the approver group whose definition you want to display and the environment in which that approver group is defined. When you press ENTER, Endevor displays the appropriate Approver Group Definition panel. Note: If you do not know the approver group's name, leave the APPROVER GROUP field blank, or enter a partial name, and press ENTER to view the Approver Group Selection List panel. You can access information about standard and emergency approver groups.

---------------------OPTION ===>

APPROVER GROUP DISPLAY

----------------------------

blank - Display Approver Group definition ENVIRONMENT APPROVER GROUP ===> DEMO ===>

5.11.2 Fields
The Approver Group Display fields are described next: Field Option Environment Description Always blank for display. Name of the environment under which the approver group is defined (initially, the current environment). If the approver group is in a different environment, enter the environment's name in this field.

5-76 User Guide

5.11 Displaying Approver Group Definitions

Field Approver Group

Description Name of the approver group you want to display. Leave this field blank to request an Approver Group Selection List showing all approver groups. Use a name mask to restrict the list to those approver groups whose names begin with the characters specified.

5.11.3 Approver Group Selection List

When you leave the APPROVER GROUP field blank or supply a partial group name on the Approver Group Display panel, Endevor displays an Approver Group Selection List showing the approver groups defined to the current environment. To select the groups you want to view, type an S to the left of each group's name and press Enter.

--------------------COMMAND ===> ENVIRONMENT: DEMO APPROVER GROUP ACCOUNTING SYS CHANGE CNTRL BRD s DOCGRP EDP AUDIT EMERGENCY FIX MANUFACTURE SYS PERSONNEL SYS

APPROVER GROUP SELECTION LIST

---------- ROW 1 OF 6 SCROLL ===> CSR

APPROVER GROUP TITLE ALL ACCOUNTING SYSTEMS: G/L, A/P, A/R CHANGE CONTROL BOARD PUBLICATIONS/MARKETING INTERNAL EDP AUDIT SECOND AND THIRD SHIFT SUPERVISORS ALL MANUFACTURING SYSTEMS: INVENTORY, SHOP ALL PERSONNEL SYSTEMS: BENEFITS, PAYROLL BOTTOM OF DATA

5.11.4 Fields
The Approver Group Selection List panel fields are described next. All fields except the SELECTION field are display-only. Field Environment Selection (no title) Description This is the name of the current environment. Field used to select an approver group for display. Type an S in this column next to the approver group you want to display. This is the name of the approver group. This is a descriptive title for the approver group.

Approver Group Approver Group Title

Chapter 5. Displaying Endevor Information 5-77

5.11 Displaying Approver Group Definitions

5.11.5 Approver Group Definition Panel

After you specify an approver group name, Endevor displays the appropriate Approver Group Definition panel. When you have finished viewing the information, press Enter. Endevor displays the previous panel--either the Approver Group Display panel or the Approver Group Selection List. If you selected multiple approver groups for display, press End to view the next Approver Group Definition panel.

DISPLAY -------------COMMAND ===> APPROVER GROUP: TITLE: QUORUM SIZE: UPDATED:

APPROVER GROUP DEFINITION

------------------------ENVIRONMENT: DEMO

DOCGRP PUBLICATIONS/MARKETING 2 31MAY 1 1: 4 BY DA1DM47

APPROVER ===> ZSXLGB1 ===> ZSXSXV1 ===> ZSXPTB1 ===> ===> ===> ===> ===>

REQ'D (Y/N) APPROVER ===> Y ===> ZSXPGM1 ===> N ===> ZSXREL1 ===> N ===> ===> ===> ===> ===> ===> ===> ===> ===> ===> ===>

REQ'D (Y/N) ===> N ===> N ===> ===> ===> ===> ===> ===>

5.11.6 Fields
The Approver Group Definition panel fields are described next. All fields are display-only. Field Approver Group Environment Title Quorum Size Updated Approver Description The name of the approver group. The name of the current environment. The descriptive title for the approver group. The minimum number of people whose approval is required in order to execute the package. Displays the date, time, and user ID of the last user to update the approver group definition. A list of the TSO user IDs of the members of the specified approver group.

5-78 User Guide

5.11 Displaying Approver Group Definitions

Field Req'd (Y/N)

Description Indicates whether this approver is required to approve a package: Y (yes) or N (no). A required approver must approve a package, regardless of the quorum requirement. That is, if you designated a quorum of 1 and list two required approvers, both approvers must grant approval before the package can be executed.

Chapter 5. Displaying Endevor Information 5-79

5.12 Displaying Approver Group Relation Definitions

An approver group relationship refers to the relationship established between an inventory area (that is, a collection of Endevor elements identified by--either explicitly or using a name mask--a system, subsystem, element type, and/or stage) and specific approver groups. Approver group relationships are determined by the Endevor administrator. For more information on specifying a mask character, see Name Masking in the chapter Endevor Basics. Note: Once an approver group has been "related" to a specific inventory area, all processing for that inventory area must then be performed by package processing. The package is subject to approval by the users defined in all approver groups associated with inventory areas affected by the actions contained in that package. For details, see the Packages Guide.

5.12.1 Approver Group Relation Display Panel

To view the Approver Group Relation definitions in an environment, select option A from the Display Options Menu. Endevor displays the Approver Group Relation Display panel, which allows you to identify the inventory area for which you want to display related approver groups. When you press Enter, Endevor displays the appropriate Approver Group Relationship panel. If you do not know the name of the inventory area you want to see, leave all or selected fields blank and press Enter. Note: You cannot use a name mask when entering information on the Approver Group Relation display. An asterisk (*), normally used to indicate a name mask, is an actual data value in this context. For more information, see Name Masking in the chapter Endevor Basics.

5-80 User Guide

5.12 Displaying Approver Group Relation Definitions

A sample Approver Group Relation Display panel is shown next.

----------------OPTION ===>

APPROVER GROUP RELATION DISPLAY

------------------------

blank - Display relationships between inventory areas and Approver Groups ENVIRONMENT SYSTEM SUBSYSTEM TYPE STAGE NUMBER APPROVER TYPE ===> DEMO ===> ACCOUNTG ===> ===> ===> 2 ===> STANDARD ( ( ( or full system name) or full subsystem name) or full type name)

( , 1 or 2) (EMERGENCY/STANDARD)

Note: Leaving the SYSTEM, SUBSYSTEM, TYPE or STAGE NUMBER field blank will cause ENDEVOR to display a list. Entering an asterisk ( ) will only return a match if the inventory rule was built with an asterisk ( ) as the name.

5.12.2 Fields
The Approver Group Relation Display fields are described next: Field Environment Description Name of the environment under which the approver group relationship is defined (initially, the current environment). If the approver group relationship is in a different environment, enter the environment's name in this field. Name of the system to which this approver group relationship applies. Enter the full name of the system, an asterisk, or leave blank to request an Approver Group Relationship List showing all systems. Name of the subsystem to which this approver group relationship applies. Enter the full name of the subsystem, an asterisk, or leave blank to request an Approver Group Relationship List showing all subsystems. The element type to which this approver group relationship applies. Enter the full type name, an asterisk, or leave blank to request an Approver Group Relationship List showing all types.

System

Subsystem

Type

Chapter 5. Displaying Endevor Information 5-81

5.12 Displaying Approver Group Relation Definitions

Field Stage Number

Description The stage number to which this approver group relationship applies. Fill in the appropriate number (1 or 2), an asterisk, or leave blank to request an Approver Group Relationship List for all stages. The approver type designated for this approver group: standard or emergency. An approver group designated as standard can be used to approve standard packages only. Similarly, an approver group designated as emergency can be used to approve emergency packages only.

Approver Type

5.12.3 Associating an Approver Group With an Entire Inventory Area

You can enter one of three values in the SYSTEM, SUBSYSTEM, TYPE, and APPROVER TYPE fields: A full name Blanks An asterisk (*) The first two values are the same as for every Display panel discussed in this chapter, but the asterisk carries a different meaning for this panel. An asterisk is an actual data value; for example, if you enter an asterisk as the subsystem name, Endevor records (and displays) that value as the actual name. The Approver Group Relationship List then shows only those relationships with "*" as the value for the SUBSYSTEM field. The presence of an asterisk in any field, however, signifies that the approver group relationship is "independent" of that particular part of the element inventory area. For example, if an approver group has been related to an inventory area with a system name of ABC, an asterisk as the subsystem, an asterisk as the type, and a stage number of 2, then the approver group relationship applies to all elements (that is, approval is required for all elements) in system ABC and stage 2--regardless of subsystem and type.

5.12.4 Approver Group Relationship List

When you leave the SYSTEM, SUBSYSTEM, or TYPE field blank on the Approver Group Relation Display panel, Endevor displays an Approver Group Relationship List showing the approver groups defined in the selected system. To select the groups you want to view, type an S to the left of each group's name and press Enter.

5-82 User Guide

5.12 Displaying Approver Group Relation Definitions

A sample Approver Group Relationship List panel is shown next.

------------------ APPROVER GROUP RELATIONSHIP LIST --------- ROW 1 OF 1 COMMAND ===> SCROLL ===> CSR ENVIRONMENT: DEMO APPROVER TYPE: STANDARD SYSTEM SUBSYSTEM TYPE STAGE APPROVER GROUP OSB 2 ACCOUNTING SYS PAY 2 ACCOUNTING SYS ACCOUNTG 2 ACCOUNTING SYS s ACCOUNTG 2 DOCGRP ACCOUNTG 2 EDP AUDIT MANUFACT 2 MANUFACTURE SYS MANUFACT 2 EDP AUDIT MANUFACT 2 CHANGE CNTRL BRD PERSONEL 2 CHANGE CNTRL BRD PERSONEL 2 EDP AUDIT PERSONEL 2 PERSONNEL SYS BOTTOM OF DATA

5.12.5 Fields
The Approver Group Relationship List fields are described next. All fields but the SELECTION field are display-only. Field Environment Approver Type Selection (no title) Description Name of the environment under which the approver group relationship is defined. Whether this approver group type is standard or emergency. Field used to select an approver group relationship for display. Type an S in this column next to the approver group relationship you want to display. Name of the system to which the approver group is related. Name of the subsystem to which the approver group is related. Name of the element type to which the approver group is related. Stage number to which the approver group is related. Name of the approver group related to the inventory area.

System Subsystem Type Stage Approver Group

To return to the Approver Group Display panel, press End.

Chapter 5. Displaying Endevor Information 5-83

5.12 Displaying Approver Group Relation Definitions

5.12.6 Approver Group Relationship Panel

After you specify the approver group relationship you want to view, Endevor displays the Approver Group Relationship panel. When you have finished viewing the information, press Enter.

DISPLAY -------------------- APPROVER GROUP RELATIONSHIP COMMAND ===> ENVIRONMENT: BST APPROVER GROUP: FARMETTES APPROVER TYPE: STANDARD UPDATED: 31MAY 1 1: 4 BY DA1DM47 INVENTORY AREA TO WHICH APPROVER GROUP IS RELATED: SYSTEM: NDVR25 SUBSYSTEM: NOT4SALE TYPE: ISPPE STAGE NUMBER:

-----------------

5.12.7 Fields
The Approver Group Relationship panel fields are described next. All fields but the SELECTION field are display-only. Field Environment Approver Group Approver Type Updated System Subsystem Type Stage Number Description Name of the current environment. Name of the approver group related to the inventory area. Type of approver group you specified: standard or emergency. Displays the date, time, and user ID of the last user to update the relationship. Name of the system in the inventory area to which the approver group is related. Name of the subsystem in the inventory area to which the approver group is related. Name of the element type in the inventory area to which the approver group is related. Stage number in the inventory area to which the approver group is related.

5-84 User Guide

5.13 Displaying Environment Information

To display the environment definitions defined during installation, select option E on the Display Options Menu and press Enter. Endevor displays the Environment Information panel. The values displayed on this panel are obtained from your current Defaults Table. (For more information on the definition process, see the Installation Guide.)

5.13.1 Environment Information Panel

The Environment Information panel is shown next.

-------------------------- Environment Information ------------------------Command ===> Current Environment,...... INT Title..................... Integration Environment Next Environment.......... QAS User Security Table....... Resource Security Table... Journal................... SMF Activity.............. SMF Security.............. MVS/DB Bridge.............

(NONE) Y Y N

To return to the Display Options Menu, press End.

5.13.2 Fields
The Environment Information panel fields are described next. All fields except for CURRENT ENVIRONMENT are display-only. Field Current Environment Description Name of the current environment. To display the details for another environment, enter the environment's name in this field and press Enter. Descriptive title for the current environment. Name of the next environment on the map. Name of the User Security Table currently in use (applicable for native security only). Name of the Resource Security Table currently in use (applicable for native security only). Name of the journal file used by Endevor's Point in Time Recovery facility.

Title Next Environment User Security Table Resource Security Table Journal

Chapter 5. Displaying Endevor Information 5-85

5.13 Displaying Environment Information

Field SMF activity SMF security MVS/DB bridge

Description Indicates whether the SMF facility is active for this environment: Y (yes) or N (no). Indicates whether SMF security is active for this environment: Y (yes) or N (no). Indicates whether the Endevor/DB-MVS Bridge is active for this environment: Y (yes) or N (no).

5-86 User Guide

5.14 Site-Defined Symbolics

Site-defined symbolics are user-defined symbolic values that you reference within dataset name specifications for base, delta, source output, include libraries, and processors (that is, you can use them wherever you can use Endevor symbolics). At execution time, any site-defined symbolics referenced by a processor are stored with the processor symbolics in the component data. If a site-level symbolic is also specified as a processor symbolic, the processor symbolic (and processor symbolic override) take precedence. When Endevor is initialized, the site-defined symbolics are placed into memory. When Endevor is terminated, the site symbolic storage is released. If more than one Endevor task is executing, each task has its own discrete site symbolic storage. To implement the use of site-defined symbolics, you must define the symbolic and its data value in a table that is assembled and linked into an authorized load library. Once this is done, you need to update the SYMBOLTBL parameter in the C1DEFLTS table with the name of the site-defined symbolics table. These actions are described next.

5.14.1 Defining Site Symbolics

Use the following format to define a symbolic and its data value in the site-defined symbolics table: $ESYMBOL SYMNAME=#symbolname,SYMDATA=symbolvalue Item symbolname Description The symbol name must begin with the # character and is 1 to 11 characters in length. The # indicates that the symbol is defined in the site-defined symbolics table. The data value associated with the site symbolic is 1 to 70 characters in length, with no restrictions on the content of the data. If you do not specify a data value for a symbolic, Endevor treats it as a null variable.

symbolvalue

Use the JCL member contained in the element BC1JSYMT to create the site-defined symbolics table.

Chapter 5. Displaying Endevor Information 5-87

5.14 Site-Defined Symbolics

5.14.2 Updating C1DEFLTS

After creating the symbolics table, update C1DEFLTS to reflect the table name. Use the SYMBOLTBL= parameter to define the table name as shown next: SPFEDIT=SPFEDIT, SYMBOLTBL=ESYMBOLS, SYSIEWL=SYSIEWLP, MIXEDFMT=(DESCRIPTION,COMMENT), UIDLOC=(1,7), VIOUNIT=VIO, WRKUNIT=SYSDA, RACFUID=NDVUSER, RACFGRP=NDVALT , PKGCSEC=N, PKGCVAL=O, PKGSEC=ESI, PRBLKSZ= , PRLNKSZ=(896K,96K), PRLSTSZ=1 , MODHLI=BST C1DEFLTS TYPE=ENVRNMNT, ENVNAME=D4 , ENVTITL='Development Rel 4. ', The Site Information from C1DEFLTS panel displays the parameter value in the SYMBOLICS Table field highlighted next: X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X

---------------------- Site Information from C1DEFLTS ------------------------Command ===> Customer Name..... -----------------Site ID........... Release........... Environments...... Userid Start...... Userid Length..... Batch ID.......... SPFEDIT QNAME..... SYSIEWL QNAME..... Authorized Tables. Gen in place/SO... CA-LSERV JRNL SBS. PITR Journal Grp.. SYMBOLICS Table... Computer Associates Inc., Endevor Development Function Controls -------------------- Options Access Table...... ASCM..... B7 C SMF Record Number. 23 DB2...... 4 Library System.... PV EDITELM.. 1 Library Program... LIBRARV ESSI..... 7 VIO Unit.......... VIO INFO..... 1 Work Unit......... SYSDA LIBENV... SPFEDIT Work Volser....... NETMAN... SYSIEWLP Lines per Page.... 6 PDM...... IGNORE MODHLI............ BST PROC..... N Signout on fetch.. N Mixed Format...... COMMENT DESCRIPTION ESYMBOLS (Press ENTER for Next Panel) Y Y Y N N Y N Y Y

5-88 User Guide

5.15 Global Type Sequencing

When you submit your API/SCL requests, Endevor follows a specific processing flow to execute the actions. By default, in batch and packages, actions are processed in the same order as the types were defined to the system and stage by the administrator or as reordered by the administrator using the Type Sequence panel. However, if the option Global Type Sequencing is enabled at your site, element actions execute in type sequence order defined at the site level by the administrator, regardless of the action's inventory location.

5.15.1 Global Type Sequence Processing Order

When the Global Type Sequencing option is enabled, SCL and API element actions are executed in type sequence order defined at the site level in the Type Sequence member. Any types that are not included in the Type Sequence member are processed in type name order, after all the types in the Type Sequence member have completed processing. All actions are processed in the following order: 1. All actions that have Archive file as the source location. These are executed first, in the element order found on the archive file. These actions are: Copy, List from Archive, Restore, Transfer from Archive. The execution of these elements is based on the element's placement within the archive file. The order of their execution is not affected by the Global Type Sequence option. 2. Non-Endevor actions. These include List Member, Print Member, and List ACMQ, which are executed next, in their API/SCL action order. The List ACMQ request is an SCL List Element request with the following restrictions: the through element name cannot be used the CCID, date, or processor where clauses cannot be used restricted to ACM input or related input component clauses the through component name option cannot be used build with components and build level none must be specified 3. All other Endevor actions. These are executed in type sequence order followed by the statement SCL order. The order of the type records in the Type Sequence member determines the type sequence processing order. The following table lists the actions with the Endevor inventory side of each action where inventory expansion and type sequencing is done.

Chapter 5. Displaying Endevor Information 5-89

5.15 Global Type Sequencing

Actions

Endevor inventory where inventory expansion and type sequencing occurs Target Source Source Source Source Source Source Target Source Source Source

Add/Update Generate Retrieve Delete Move Archive Transfer to Archive Transfer C1-C1 Signin Print C1 List C1

The following special conditions apply: When inventory errors are found during the API/SCL expansion phase, these actions are reported as they occur. They always appear before any dispatched Endevor action. When a not found condition occurs for an element or member name, they will be reported last, after all other actions have been processed.

5.15.2 Global Type Processing Sequence Panel

If Global Type Sequencing is in effect, the Display Type Sequence option will only appear on the Environment Options Menu as show next:

-----------------------OPTION ===> 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 A D E S SITE STAGE SYSTEM SUBSYSTEM TYPE PROCESSOR GROUP TYPE SEQUENCE DATA SET APPROVER GROUP RELATE GROUP DESTINATION ENVIRONMENT SITE SYMBOLS -

Environment Options Menu

---------------------------

Display site information Display stage information Display, delete, create, update or clone system Display, delete, create or update subsystem Display, delete, create or update type definitions Display, delete, create or update processor groups Display site type processing sequence Display or update type data sets Display, delete, create or update approver groups Relate approver groups to systems, subsystems, etc. Display, delete, create or update shipment destiations Display information about the current environment Display site symbol definitions

5-90 User Guide

5.15 Global Type Sequencing

To view the processing sequence for types defined to your site, select 7 Type Sequencing on the Environment Options Menu. Only types defined by the Endevor Administrator, in the Type Sequence member file, will be displayed. You cannot update the type processing sequence through the Environment Options Menu. The administrator maintains the processing order by editing the Type Sequence member. For details on defining the Type Sequence member file, see the chapter "Global Type Sequencing" in the Administrator Guide. Note that when Global Type Sequencing is not in effect, the type sequencing is displayed differently on the Environmental Options Menu. For details on default type sequencing, see Defining the Type Processing Sequence in the chapter Defining Inventory Structures in the Administrator Guide. A sample Type Processing Sequence panel is shown next:

DISPLAY --------------COMMAND ===> TYPE 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 1 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 PROCESS SCLLANG CHDR ASMMAC DSECTS COBCOPY COPYBOOK ASMCHDR ASMPGM CPGM COBPGM OBJECT EXTRNTBL LNK ISPM ISPP ISPSI ISPSE SYSTEM

TYPE PROCESSING SEQUENCE

--------------- Row 1 of 4 SCROLL ===> CSR

DESCRIPTION INTERNAL PROCESSORS SCL Language Definition (NODE/KEYWORD/FIELD) C HEADER FILES MACROS AND DSECT PROCESSOR LSERV 3.5 DSECTS COBOL COPYBOOKS COBOL COPYBOOKS PUNCH C HDR AND ASM COPY MBR OF A DATA STRUCTURE ASSEMBLER PROGRAM PROCESSOR C PROGRAMS COBOL Program Processor OBJECT DECKS FOR LINK-EDITS Endevor tables to be shipped (src and load) LINKEDIT PROCESSOR ISPF MESSAGES PROCESSOR ISPF PANELS PROCESSOR INTERNAL ISPF SKELETONS PROCESSOR EXTERNAL ISPF SKELETONS PROCESSOR

Chapter 5. Displaying Endevor Information 5-91

5.15 Global Type Sequencing

You can also view the Type Processing Sequence panel through the Display Options Menu. The Type Sequence option appears on the Display Options Menu shown next, regardless of whether this option is in effect at your site. If you select the option T Type Sequence and the Global Type Sequencing option is not in effect at your site, a message displays.

--------------------------OPTION ===> 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 A E S T ELEMENT FOOTPRINT SITE STAGE SYSTEM SUBSYSTEM TYPE PROCESSOR GROUP APPROVER GROUP RELATE GROUP ENVIRONMENT SITE SYMBOLS TYPE SEQUENCE -

Display Options Menu

----------------------------

Display Display Display Display Display Display Display Display Display Display Display Display Display

5-92 User Guide

Chapter 6. Action Processing

This chapter assumes that you know how to request actions in foreground, how to build request data sets for batch execution and as packages, and basic foreground and batch panel flow. For more information on packages, see the Packages Guide. The SCL Reference Guide contains syntax information for creating request data sets for batch execution using a text editor.

Chapter 6. Action Processing 6-1

6.1 Endevor Actions: An Overview

You manipulate elements within Endevor inventory areas by executing actions. You can execute actions from foreground panels, by creating request data sets to be submitted for batch execution, or by creating request data sets as packages, which require approval before being executed in either foreground or batch. Some actions are available in both foreground and in batch, while others are available only in batch. Batch actions are also available when you build packages. The following table summarizes Endevor actions and their availability. This action... Add Archive Copy Is available in... Foreground / Batch Batch Batch And Does This Puts a member under Endevor control from an external data set. Writes the current version of an element to a sequential data set. Copies an element from an archive data set to a data set external to Endevor. Erases base and delta forms of an element and removes related information from a master control file or component list. Displays information about an element. Creates an executable form of an element. Creates a list of elements or members that meet specific selection criteria. Moves elements between stages, within or across environments. Prints element or member information. Restores elements to Endevor from an archive data set. Copies elements from Endevor to an external data set.

Delete

Foreground / Batch

Display Generate List

Foreground Foreground / Batch Batch

Move Print Restore Retrieve

Foreground / Batch Foreground / Batch Batch Foreground / Batch

6-2 User Guide

6.1 Endevor Actions: An Overview

This action... Signin Transfer Update

Is available in... Foreground / Batch Batch Foreground / Batch

And Does This Removes the user signout associated with an element. Moves elements between locations that are not on the same map route. Updates an element from an external database.

Duplicate Element Names: Endevor provides two options that enable you to allow or disallow duplicate element names. One option enables you to control the use of duplicate element names at the system and subsystem level. The other option enables you to control the use of duplicate element names at the Processor Group level. For information on implementing one or both of these options, see Element Registration in the chapter Overview.

Chapter 6. Action Processing 6-3

6.2 Action Request Panel Fields

You specify actions on action request panels. This section contains an example of an action request panel, and descriptions of fields and options that appear frequently on these panels. Use this section for reference. Options used only for a specific action are described in the section on that action later in this chapter.

6.2.1 Sample Action Request Panel

The request panel for the RETRIEVE action is shown next.

------------------------------ RETRIEVE ELEMENTS -----------------------------OPTION ===> ELEMENT DISPLAY OPTIONS: blank - Element list S - Summary B - Browse H - History R - Retrieve element M - Master C - Changes FROM ENDEVOR: ENVIRONMENT SYSTEM SUBSYSTEM ELEMENT TYPE STAGE COMMENT ===> DOC ===> FINANCE ===> ===> ===> ===> ===> ACTION OPTIONS: CCID EXPAND INCLUDES SIGNOUT ELEMENT OVERRIDE SIGNOUT REPLACE MEMBER B - S2 ===> ===> ===> ===> ===>

N Y N N

(Y/N) (Y/N) (Y/N) (Y/N)

1 - S1

TO ISPF LIBRARY: PROJECT ===> BST LIBRARY ===> C1DEMO TYPE ===> CNTRL MEMBER ===>

LIST OPTIONS: DISPLAY LIST WHERE CCID EQ WHERE PROC GRP EQ BUILD USING MAP FIRST FOUND TO OTHER PARTITIONED OR SEQUENTIAL DATA SET: DATA SET NAME ===>

===> N (Y/N) ===> ===> ===> N (Y/N) ===> Y (Y/N)

6.2.2 Option Field

The OPTION field on request panels allows you to specify the processing you wish to perform. Use this option Blank To... Produce a list of elements or members from which to select for action processing. Endevor produces a list only when DISPLAY LIST = Y. Execute the action (in this case RETRIEVE) when you press Enter after providing information on the panel.

6-4 User Guide

6.2 Action Request Panel Fields

Use this option S, M, B, C, H

To... Display one of the following element information panels: Summary of Levels (S), Element Master Info (M), Element Browse (B), Element Changes (C), or Element History (H). These options can be used in conjunction with either an element selection list or a specific element name to view information about an element prior to executing an action.

6.2.3 Endevor Fields

Endevor fields appear under the headings FROM Endevor or TO Endevor. They specify the: Target of ADD, UPDATE, and RESTORE actions. Starting point for ARCHIVE, MOVE, RETRIEVE, and certain GENERATE actions. Starting point and target for certain TRANSFER actions. Location for the execution of DELETE and certain GENERATE actions. The following rules apply when typing information in Endevor fields: Names must be in the national character set: A-Z, 0-9, @, #, and $. You can use a name mask when specifying these fields. For more information on specifying a mask character, see Name Masking in the chapter Endevor Basics. The default is the current specification. All fields are modifiable when requesting an action. Field Environment System Subsystem Element Description The 1- to 8-character name of the environment that is the source, target, or location of the action. The 1- to 8-character name of the system associated with the element(s) to be processed. The 1- to 8-character name of the subsystem associated with the element(s) to be processed. The 1- to 8-character name of the element(s) you want to process. Endevor supports AllFusion CA-Panvalet 10-character element names in this field for certain actions.

Chapter 6. Action Processing 6-5

6.2 Action Request Panel Fields

Field Type Stage

Description The 1- to 8-character name of the type associated with the element(s) to be processed. The 1-character ID of the stage that is the source, target, or location of the action.

6.2.4 ISPF Library Fields

ISPF library fields appear under the headings FROM ISPF LIBRARY or TO ISPF LIBRARY. They are standard ISPF data set specification fields that identify an external data set and member(s) that are the: Source for ADD, UPDATE, RESTORE, and certain TRANSFER actions. Target for ARCHIVE, RETRIEVE, and certain TRANSFER actions. The data set can be a partitioned data set (PDS or PDS/E), a AllFusion CA-Librarian or a AllFusion CA-Panvalet library, or a sequential file. When the external data set is the source of the action and you leave the OPTION field blank, Endevor produces the selection list based on the values in the MEMBER and THRU MEMBER fields.

6.2.5 Other Partitioned or Sequential Data Set Field

Use this field as an alternative to the FROM ISPF LIBRARY or TO ISPF LIBRARY fields to define source or target external data sets and members. Type the data set and member specification in 'data set(member)' format.

6.2.6 CCID and Comment Fields

Use the CCID field to associate a change control identifier (CCID) with an action. CCIDs are discussed in the Administration Guide. The COMMENT field allows you to provide 1 to 40 characters of description about an action. Both CCIDs and comments may be required. This requirement is determined on the system level. If either is required and you do not provide it on the action request, one of the following happens: An Action Prompt panel appears when you press Enter in foreground. You can provide the CCID and/or comment on this panel. The action fails when submitted in batch. Endevor updates certain Master Control File fields with CCID and comment information. A table summarizing these updates appears later in this section.

6-6 User Guide

6.2 Action Request Panel Fields

6.2.7 List Options Fields

The LIST OPTIONS fields include the following. Field Display List Description Indicates whether you want to use list panels when requesting this action: Y (yes) or N (no). Default is Y. A CCID can be specified here to limit the selection list to only those elements whose last level, action or generate CCID is equal to the specified CCID. If omitted, the WHERE CCID EQ field is not used to limit the selection list. The specified CCID can match the one in any of the following sections of the element's Master Control File: Last Element Modification Current Source Generate Where Proc Grp Eq A processor group can be specified here to limit the selection list to only those elements to which the processor group has been assigned. If omitted, the WHERE PROC GRP EQ field is not used to limit the selection list. Type Y (yes) in this field if you want Endevor to search the map when building a list of elements for the requested action, starting at the from location Warning: Avoid using BUILD USING MAP = Y in combination with DISPLAY LIST = N. Once you press Enter with the Confirmation panel displayed, you cannot cancel the processing until all selected elements or members have been processed. First Found This options tells Endevor whether or not to use the first instance of the element found along the map when executing the action.

Where CCID Eq

Build Using Map

Chapter 6. Action Processing 6-7

6.2 Action Request Panel Fields

6.3 Impact of Actions

As Endevor executes each action request, it performs source management, inventory management, and output management. Source management pertains to the maintenance of the element source, that is, updating of the base and delta libraries. Inventory management pertains to the maintenance of Master Control File definitions. Output management pertains to the creation and/or maintenance of outputs: object modules, load modules, listings, etc.

6.3.1 Actions and Signout Status

Endevor provides a signout capability that can be enabled on a system by system basis. The impact of Endevor actions on the signout status of elements is summarized in the table that follows. Note that this table is broken into two sections so that the table headings and footnotes can be read easily. Action Element Exists (1) Y Signout Upon Fetch in Effect (2) Y Source Element (3) Signs out if not signed out to someone else No change NA NA No change No change No change No change NA NA Signs out if not signed out to someone else No change NA NA Target Element

Add

Signs out

N N Y N Archive NA Y N Copy NA Y N Delete NA Y N Edit (Quick- Edit) Y Y

Signs out Signs out Signs out NA NA NA NA NA NA Signs out

N Edit (Quick-Edit) N Y N

Signs out Signs out Signs out

6-8 User Guide

6.3 Impact of Actions

Action

Element Exists (1) Y

Signout Upon Fetch in Effect (2) Y

Source Element (3) Signs out if not signed out to someone else No change NA NA NA (4) NA (4) NA NA NA NA Signs out Signs out Signs out if not signed out to someone else No change NA NA Signs in Signs in NA 4 NA 4 NA NA NA NA

Target Element

Generate with copyback

Signs out

N Generate without copyback N Y N Move Y Y N N Y N Restore NA Y N Retrieve NA Y N Search with update Y Y

Signs out No change No change Signs in Signs in Signs in Signs in Signs in Signs in NA NA Signs out

N N Y N Signin NA Y N Transfer Y Y N N Y N Update Y Y N

Signs out Signs out Signs out NA NA Signs in Signs in Signs in Signs in No change No change

Chapter 6. Action Processing 6-9

6.3 Impact of Actions

1. If an element exists up the map, then a fetch will be performed. A fetch is a copyback of the element with all delta levels intact. 2. For information about Signout Upon Fetch, see The TYPE=MAIN Macro in the chapter The Defaults Table in the Administrator Guide. 3. In a fetch situation for Add, Edit, Generate with Copyback, and Search with Update, the source element is the fetched element. If Signout Upon Fetch is in effect, the fetched element will be signed out to you if it is not signed out to someone else. 4. In a fetch situation for Move and Transfer, the source element is the element at the FROM location of the action. If Signout Upon Fetch is in effect, the fetched element (up the map) will be signed out to you if it is not signed out to someone else.

6.3.2 Signout Options

The Signout options are described as follows: Override signout--Perform an action when an element is not signed out to you. Retain signout--Retain the source signout at the target location of an action. Signout to--Sign the element out to another user. Signout element--Retrieve an element with or without signing it out.

6.3.3 Impact of Actions on CCIDs and Comments

You can specify a CCID and/or comment when you request ADD, UPDATE, RETRIEVE, GENERATE, MOVE, TRANSFER, DELETE, RESTORE, and ARCHIVE actions. Endevor updates CCID and/or COMMENT fields, in up to six places, with the CCID and/or comment specified on the action panel. Whether a CCID and/or comment is updated depends on the action's effect on the source and outputs managed by Endevor. The six CCID and/or COMMENT fields that may be updated are listed as follows, along with an explanation of the information provided by each pair of fields on the list. These CCID and/or Comment Fields... Last Action CCID and/or comment Contain This Information The CCID and/or comment used the last time any action was performed that updated Endevor (for every action except RETRIEVE). This CCID and/or comment is stored in the Master Control File.

6-10 User Guide

6.3 Impact of Actions

These CCID and/or Comment Fields... Current Source CCID and/or comment

Contain This Information The CCID and/or comment used the last time an Endevor action changed the source. This CCID and/or comment is stored in the Master Control File. The CCID and/or comment used the last time an Endevor action caused output processing to occur. Output processing occurs when a processor is run or an output data set is updated. This CCID and/or comment is stored in the Master Control File. These fields only reflect the CCID and/or comment used during the RETRIEVE action if the last action at that stage was RETRIEVE. This CCID and/or comment is stored in the Master Control File. Viewing this information allows you to determine which elements have been retrieved for update for a particular project.

Generate CCID and/or comment

Retrieve CCID and/or comment

Source Delta CCID and/or comment Component List Delta CCID and/or comment

Each delta level contains the CCID and/or comment specified in the action that created the delta level. Each component list delta level contains the CCID and/or comment specified in the action that created the delta level.

The fields that Endevor updates depend on the action you specify. The following chart summarizes the impact of Endevor actions on CCID and COMMENT fields. Action Current Source CCID/ Comment Set Set if changed Generate CCID/ Comment Set if changed Set if generated Last Action CCID/ Comment Set Set Retrieve CCID/ Comment Source Delta CCID/ Comment Set Set Component Delta CCID/ Comment Set if generated Set if generate creates a delta

Add-- New Element Add-Element Exists

Chapter 6. Action Processing 6-11

6.3 Impact of Actions

Action

Current Source CCID/ Comment Set if changed

Generate CCID/ Comment Set if generated

Last Action CCID/ Comment Set

Retrieve CCID/ Comment

Source Delta CCID/ Comment Set if changed

Component Delta CCID/ Comment Set if generate creates a delta

Update

Retrieve Generate -Without Copyback Generate -With Copyback Signin Delete Restore Archive Move-Without History Move-- With History Set from start location value Set from start location value Set from previous stage value Set from previous stage value Set from start location value Set from start location value Set if generated Set Set from Archive Set if generated Set Set to copied back value Set Set

Set Set if generate creates a delta Set to copied back value Clear

Set

Set from Archive

Set if generated

Clear

Set from last start location delta value Carried with delta levels Set from last delta value previous stage Carried with delta levels

Set from last start location delta value Carried with delta levels

Set

Clear

Transfer -Without History

Set

Clear

Set if generated

Transfer -With History

Set if generated

Set

Clear

Set if generated

6-12 User Guide

6.3 Impact of Actions

Action

Current Source CCID/ Comment Set from previous stage value

Generate CCID/ Comment Set if generated

Last Action CCID/ Comment Set

Retrieve CCID/ Comment Clear

Source Delta CCID/ Comment Set from base value. Carried with delta levels & on sync level

Component Delta CCID/ Comment Set if generated

Transfer -With SYNC

Chapter 6. Action Processing 6-13

6.4 Display Elements

Use the Display option to display source and Master Control File information about an element. When you select this option, Endevor returns the Display Elements panel (or Display Elements/Component List panel, if you are an Endevor ACM user). Use this panel to request any of the options listed.

------------------OPTION ===>

Display Elements/Component Lists

---------------------

blank - Display selection list S - Display summary of levels M - Display element master info

B - Browse element current level C - Display changes current level H - Display history current level

Enter SX, BX, CX or HX to display component list information FROM Endevor: ENVIRONMENT SYSTEM SUBSYSTEM ELEMENT TYPE STAGE ===> DOC ===> FINANCE ===> ===> ===> ===> LIST OPTIONS: DISPLAY LIST WHERE CCID EQ WHERE PROC GRP EQ DISPLAY SYS/SBS LIST BUILD USING MAP A - TEST B - PROD ===> Y (Y/N) ===> ===> ===> Y (Y/N) ===> N (Y/N)

6-14 User Guide

6.5 Add Elements Action

This section describes how to add an element into Endevor.

6.5.1 Before You Begin

Before you use the Add action for the first time, review the following information: Use--Use the ADD action to put a sequential data set, PDS or PDS/E, AllFusion CA-Panvalet, or AllFusion CA-Librarian member under control of Endevor. You can also add load modules (RECFM=U) and binary files to Endevor. You can add members only to the entry stage, and only when there is no element with the same name in the target entry stage. The UPDATE action allows you to add a member to Endevor when an element with the same name is in the target entry stage. Availability--You can add members to Endevor in foreground, batch, and in packages. Specification--Use the Add/Update Elements panel to specify the type of processing you want to perform and any other information related to the request. To submit the request after you have filled in the appropriate information, press Enter.

6.5.2 Add Considerations

Before adding a member into Endevor, make sure that: An element with the same name is not already in the target entry stage. If an element with the same name is in the entry stage, you can: Add the member, specifying the UPDATE IF PRESENT option. Add the member, using the UPDATE option. Wait until the element has been moved out of the entry stage, then add the member. Check with the current owner of the element and/or the Endevor administrator to determine the best course of action. Otherwise, the ADD action fails. The element corresponding to the member you wish to add is signed out to you. If the existing element is signed out to someone else, you can: Add the member, specifying the OVERRIDE SIGNOUT option. Caution! Use the OVERRIDE SIGNOUT option with caution to avoid regressing changes made by another user.

Chapter 6. Action Processing 6-15

6.5 Add Elements Action

Have the current owner of the element or the administrator sign the element out to you, then add the member. Sign the element in using the SIGNOUT TO option. Otherwise, the ADD action fails.

6.5.3 Add/Update Elements Panel

The Add/Update Elements panel is shown next.

---------------------------OPTION ===> blank - Member list TO Endevor: ENVIRONMENT SYSTEM SUBSYSTEM ELEMENT TYPE COMMENT ===> DEMO ===> FINANCE ===> ACCTREC ===> ===> ===>

ADD/UPDATE ELEMENTS

------------------------U - Update an element ===> ===> ===> ===> ===> ===> ===>

A - Add an element

ACTION OPTIONS: CCID GENERATE ELEMENT DELETE INPUT SOURCE NEW VERSION OVERRIDE SIGNOUT PROCESSOR GROUP UPDATE IF PRESENT

Y (Y/N) N (Y/N) N (Y/N) N (Y/N)

FROM ISPF LIBRARY: PROJECT ===> BST LIBRARY ===> C1DEMO TYPE ===> CNTL MEMBER ===>

LIST OPTIONS: DISPLAY LIST ===> Y (Y/N) THRU MEMBER ===>

FROM OTHER PARTITIONED OR SEQUENTIAL DATA SET: DATA SET NAME ===>

6.5.4 Fields
The Add/Update Element panel fields are described next:

6.5.4.1 Option Field

Use the OPTION field to specify the processing you wish to perform. Use This Option Blank A To... Return a list of members in the source library. This only applies when DISPLAY LIST = Y. Add one or more members in the environment's entry stage. If you specify a member name that already exists, Endevor either rejects the ADD operation or replaces the old member with the one you are adding based on the value in the UPDATE IF PRESENT field.

6-16 User Guide

6.5 Add Elements Action

Use This Option U

To... Update an element in the entry stage.

6.5.4.2 To Endevor Fields

Use these fields to define the element you want to add or update. Field Environment System Subsystem Element Description The name of the target environment. The system associated with the element(s) to be added/updated. The subsystem associated with the element(s) to be added/updated. The name to be assigned to the member after it has been added or updated. Acceptable values for this field depend on the entries in the MEMBER and THRU MEMBER fields. If these fields: Specify a single member name, you can leave ELEMENT blank to use the member name as the element name, or provide a different element name. Are blank or specify a range of members, you must leave ELEMENT blank. Type The name of the type associated with the element to be added/updated.

6.5.4.3 Comment Field

Use the COMMENT field to provide a 1- to 40-character comment explaining the action. When adding a member to Endevor for the first time the comment becomes the element description in the Master Control File.

6.5.4.4 Action Options Fields

Use the ACTION OPTIONS to further define your action request. Field CCID Description CCID associated with the request.

Chapter 6. Action Processing 6-17

6.5 Add Elements Action

Field Generate Element

Description Tells Endevor whether to generate the element after adding it. Y--Default. Generate the element. N--Do not generate the element. Endevor does not populate the source output library.

Delete Input Source

Tells Endevor whether to delete the library member (or data set if the library is a sequential file) after adding it. Y--Delete the input member. N--Default. Do not delete the input member.

New Version

Applicable only for an ADD action. This is the version number (rr) for the new element. Acceptable values are 01-99. Default is 01 (for new elements), or the Stage 2 version number, if the element currently exists in Stage 2.

Override Signout

Tells Endevor whether to add or update an element even if it is not signed out to you. Y--Add or update the element, even if it is not signed out to you. Endevor signs the element out to you if you specify this option. N--Default. Do not add or update the element if it is not signed out to you.

Processor Group

The name of the processor group to be associated with the element. You can type a processor group name in this field or use a name mask to access a list of processor groups from which you can select. For more information on specifying a mask character, see Name Masking in the chapter Endevor Basics. If you do not provide a processor group name, Endevor selects a processor group. For more information on how Endevor selects this processor group, see Add Processing in this chapter.

6-18 User Guide

6.5 Add Elements Action

Field Update If Present

Description Tells Endevor whether to add a member when an element with the same name exists at the target entry stage. Y--Add the member, even if an element with the same name exists. N--Default. Do not add the member if an element with the same name exists.

6.5.4.5 From ISPF Library Fields

Use these fields to specify the member or range of members that you want to add or update. If the named data set is a library, and you: Provide a single member name in these fields, and leave the ELEMENT field blank, Endevor uses the member name as the element name. To change the element name, type the new name in the ELEMENT field. Leave the member field blank, provide a name mask, or specify a range of members, you must leave the ELEMENT field blank. To change the element name, use the selection list. If you leave the OPTION field blank, Endevor produces the selection list based on the values in the MEMBER and THRU MEMBER fields.

6.5.4.6 From Other Partitioned or Sequential Data Set Field

As an alternative to the FROM ISFP LIBRARY fields, enter the data set name, and member if data set is a library, in 'data set(member name) ' format. To provide a range of members when using this format, specify the end of the range in the THRU MEMBER field.

6.5.4.7 List Options Field

Indicate whether you want to use list panels when requesting this action: Y (yes) or N (no). The default is Y.

6.5.5 Member Selection List for Add/Update Action

Endevor returns a Member Selection List when the source data set is a library, DISPLAY LIST = Y, and either of the following is true: The OPTION field is blank. Both the ELEMENT and MEMBER fields are blank or have a name mask.

Chapter 6. Action Processing 6-19

6.5 Add Elements Action

Use this list to select the member(s) to be added or updated. Note: Endevor supports the ISPF Locate command on Member Selection Lists.

ADD/UPDATE --------------- MEMBER SELECTION LIST ------------ ROW 1 OF 94 COMMAND ===> SCROLL ===> PAGE FROM Data set: BST.C1DEMO.CNTL TO Environment: DEMO System: FINANCE Subsystem: ACCTPAY Stage: Q NEW MEMBER ELEMENT TYPE COMMENT VERSION $REQPDS ARCHLIST ARCHLST2 ASM BC1JACCT BC1JCMPR BC1JDEFT BC1JFOOT BC1JJB 2 BC1JJB 3 BC1JJB 4 BC1JPAN BC1JREPR BC1JRSCT BC1JSAS1 BC1JSMFS BC1JUSRT

The Member Selection List displays source library members that meet the criteria in the MEMBER and THRU MEMBER fields on the Add/Update Elements panel. The FROM and TO information for the request are displayed at the top of the panel, above the member listing. The rest of the panel presents the members in the from data set. From this list, you can select one or more members to be: Added, by placing an A to the left of a member. Updated, by placing a U to the left of a member. The ELEMENT field initially displays the member name as a default entry. You can change the name in the ELEMENT field if you want the element name to differ from the member name. The TYPE, COMMENT, and NEW VERSION fields initially display the information from the Add/Update Elements panel. You can change the information in these fields before selecting a member(s) for processing.

6-20 User Guide

6.5 Add Elements Action

When you press Enter, Endevor adds or updates the member, then returns this panel with an appropriate message next to each selected member. If you want more detailed information than this message provides, browse the listing data set identified on the returned screen (userid.C1TEMPRn.MSGS).

6.5.6 Fields
The Member Selection List panel fields are described next. All these fields can be modified except FROM, TO, and MEMBER. Field From To Selection (no title) Description Indicates the from data set for the ADD/UPDATE request. The environment, system, subsystem, and stage to which the member is being added or updated. Used to select a member for processing. Type A in this column to add a member; type U in this column to update a member. The name of the member in the from data set. Defaults to the member name. Type an element name if you want it to be different from the member name. This field also displays messages such as *ADDED or *UPDATED after Endevor has executed the action. Type Comment New Version Type associated with the element. Comment describing the action. Applicable for an ADD action only. This is the version number under which the element is being added. Acceptable values are 01-99. If you leave this field blank, the version number defaults to 01, if this is a new element, or to the Stage 2 version number, if the element currently exists in Stage 2.

Member Element

Chapter 6. Action Processing 6-21

6.5 Add Elements Action

6.5.7 Impact of Add/Update Actions on CCIDs and Comments

ADD and UPDATE actions have the following impact on CCIDs and comments associated with the elements being added or updated. Action Source CCID/ Comment Set Set if changed Generate CCID/ Comment Set if changed Set if generated Last Action CCID/ Comment Set Set Retrieve CCID/ Comment Source Delta CCID/ Comment Set Set Component Delta CCID/ Comment Set if generated Set if generate creates a delta Set if generate creates a delta

Add-- New Element Add-Element Exists Update

Set if changed

Set if generated

Set

Set if changed

Note: If you specify GENERATE ELEMENT = N (no), the UPDATE and ADD actions do not set the generate or component delta CCIDs/comments.

6.5.8 Add Processing

When you add a member, Endevor: 1. Ensures the element is signed out to you, and does not exist in the entry stage. 2. Searches beyond the entry stage for an element with the same name. Endevor searches every stage in the mapped route for a match. If it finds the element in a stage in the map, Endevor copies the current version of the element to the target entry stage, along with the processor group name last used for the element.

6-22 User Guide

6.5 Add Elements Action

If you code the new version option, the element is not copied back to the entry stage. Endevor assigns the version number you specify.

If Endevor finds the element at a stage not included in the map, it issues a warning message, then continues to search for an element in a stage that is included in the map.

3. Compares the member being added with the entry stage base. If Endevor did not find the element along the map, it creates the element in the entry stage with a version number of 01 and base level of 00 (zero).

If Endevor built an entry stage base, it compares the member being added to that base, and builds a new level with any changes.

If Endevor does not detect any changes it issues a warning message. 4. Updates the Master Control File (MCF). Note that the value specified for Signout Upon Fetch (the SOFETCH parameter) in the Endevor Defaults Table will effect how the MCF will be updated for the element copied back (fetched). If Signout Upon Fetch is in effect, the element will be signed out to you unless it is already signed out to someone else. If Signout Upon Fetch is not in effect, the element will not be signed out to you.

Chapter 6. Action Processing 6-23

6.5 Add Elements Action

For more information about Signout Upon Fetch (the SOFETCH parameter), see The TYPE= MAIN Macro in the chapter The Defaults Table in the Administrator Guide. 5. Continues based on the value in the GENERATE ELEMENT field. If the value in this field is N, Endevor does not generate the element. If the value in this field is Y, Endevor: Reads the type definition for a source output library specification, then writes a copy of the current level of the element to that library. If EXPAND INCLUDES = Y, Endevor expands INCLUDE statements in the source. Determines the processor group to use (For more information, see the appendix "Actions and Processor Groups."). then executes the generate processor in that group if one has been specified. After the generate processor has been run for the element, Endevor updates the processor information in the Master Control File. 6. If DELETE INPUT SOURCE = Y, Endevor deletes the member indicated in the FROM library.

6-24 User Guide

6.6 Archive Action

This section describes the Archive action.

6.6.1 Before You Begin

Before you use the Archive action for the first time, review the following information: Use--Use the ARCHIVE action to write all levels of an element to a sequential file (known as an archive data set). For Endevor ACM users, the ARCHIVE action writes the base level and all change levels of the Component List to the archive data set. The ARCHIVE action can be used to: Maintain a backup copy of the element source. Delete the existing version of a particular element from Stage 1 or 2. Maintain an archive version of the element source, that is, to maintain a version of the element source "outside of" Endevor. Once an element has been archived, the COPY, LIST, RESTORE, and TRANSFER actions can be executed against the archive data set. Availability--You can archive elements only in batch and in packages. Specification--Use the Archive Elements panel to specify the type of processing you want to perform and any other information related to the request. To submit the request after you have filled in the appropriate information, press Enter.

6.6.2 Archive Elements Panel

The Archive Elements panel is shown next.

----------------------------OPTION ===>

ARCHIVE ELEMENTS

----------------------------

ELEMENT DISPLAY OPTIONS: blank - Element list S - Summary B - Browse H - History V - Archive element M - Master C - Changes FROM Endevor: ACTION OPTIONS: ENVIRONMENT ===> DOC CCID ===> SYSTEM ===> FINANCE DELETE FROM ELEMENT ===> N (Y/N) SUBSYSTEM ===> OVERRIDE SIGNOUT ===> N (Y/N) ELEMENT ===> TYPE ===> STAGE ===> D-CSTAGE P-CPROD COMMENT ===> TO FILE ===> LIST OPTIONS: DISPLAY LIST ===> Y (Y/N) WHERE CCID EQ ===> WHERE PROC GRP EQ ===> BUILD USING MAP ===> N (Y/N)

Chapter 6. Action Processing 6-25

6.6 Archive Action

6.6.3 Fields
The Archive Elements panel fields are described next.

6.6.3.1 Option Field

Use this field to specify the processing you want. Use This Option Blank V S, M, B, C, H To... Display a selection list. This only applies when DISPLAY LIST = Y. Generate Archive SCL based on panel information. Display one of the listed element information panels.

6.6.3.2 From Endevor Fields

Use these fields to identify the source location for the ARCHIVE request and the elements to be archived. Field Environment System Subsystem Element Type Stage Description Name of the current environment. System associated with the element(s) to be archived. Subsystem associated with the element(s) to be archived. Element(s) you want to archive. Type associated with the element(s) to be archived. ID of the current stage.

6.6.3.3 Comment Field

Comment describing the ARCHIVE request.

6.6.3.4 To File Field

Use this field to specify the DDname for the archive data set. Make sure to include the JCL for this data set when you submit the batch job for execution (using the INCLUDE JCL field on the Batch Options Menu.).

6-26 User Guide

6.6 Archive Action

The DCB must specify variable blocked records (RECFM=VB), a minimum LRECL of 1021, DSORG=PS, and a blocksize equal to your LRECL + 4 (minimum 1025). When archiving to tape, the recommended blocksize is 32,000.

6.6.3.5 Action Options Field

These fields allow you to specify information for the action request. Field CCID Delete From Element Override Signout Description CCID associated with the request. Y (yes) to delete the element; N (no) to retain the element after it is archived. Default is N. Applicable when signin/signout is in effect. Y (yes) to archive the element even if it is not signed out to your user ID; N (no) to disallow the ARCHIVE action unless the element is signed out to you. Default is N.

6.6.3.6 List Options Field

Use the LIST OPTIONS to limit the elements in the Element Selection List. Field Display List Where CCID Eq Description Indicates choice to use list panels for this action: Y (yes) or N (no). Default is Y. Use a CCID to limit the list to those elements whose last level, action or generate CCID is equal to the specified CCID. Use a processor group name to limit the list to those elements to which the group is assigned. Type Y (yes) in this field if you want Endevor to search the map, beginning at the from location, when building a list of elements to be archived. Caution! Avoid using BUILD USING MAP = Y in combination with DISPLAY LIST = N. Once you press Enter with the Confirmation panel displayed, you cannot cancel the processing until all selected elements or members have been processed.

Where Proc Grp Eq Build Using Map

Chapter 6. Action Processing 6-27

6.6 Archive Action

6.6.4 Element Selection List for the Archive Action

Endevor returns an Element Selection List if you do not fully specify the ARCHIVE request and DISPLAY LIST = Y. You can restrict this list to a range of elements by typing a name mask in the ELEMENT and/or TYPE fields. For more information on specifying a mask character, see Name Masking in the chapter Endevor Basics. Note: Endevor supports the ISPF Locate command on Element Selection Lists.

ARCHIVE ----------------- ELEMENT SELECTION LIST COMMAND ===> FROM Environment: DEMO System: FINANCE TO File: ARCHIVE ELEMENT STG TYPE VV.LL COMMENT COPY1 P COPYBOOK 1. C1DEMO P COBLNK 1. 2 C1DEMOCL P COBLNK 1. C1DEMO 1 P COBOBJ 1. C1DEMTST P COBLNK 1. C1SUB 1 P COBLNK 1. C1SUB 2 P COBLNK 1. HEADER1 P COPYBOOK 1. PROGX P COBLNK 1. PROGXREF P COBXREF 1. TPOTST P COBLNK 1. BOTTOM OF DATA

----------- ROW 1 OF 11 SCROLL ===> CSR Subsystem: ACCTREC

Use the Element Selection List panel to: Select one or more elements to be archived, by typing a V to the left of each element you want. Display information for one or more elements, by typing S (display), M (master), B (browse), C (changes), or H (history) to the left of each element for which you want to display information. The following list describes the panel fields. With the exception of the SELECTION and COMMENT fields, all fields are display-only. Field From Environment, System, Subsystem To Selection (no title) Element Message (no title) Stg Description Environment, system, and subsystem for the element being archived. DDname for the TO archive data set. Allows you to specify processing to be performed against the element. Name of the element. Used to display messages, such as *WRITTEN. ID of the stage where the element resides.

6-28 User Guide

6.6 Archive Action

Field Type VV.LL Comment

Description Name of the element type. Version/level for the element at the current stage. Comment associated with the Archive request. Defaults to the comment on the Archive Elements panel.

6.6.5 Archive Processing

When you archive elements, Endevor: 1. Checks the value in the DELETE FROM ELEMENT field. If DELETE FROM ELEMENT = N, Endevor skips to Step 3 described next. Otherwise, it executes Step 2. 2. Checks whether the element has been signed out. If the element has been signed out to a person other than you, you must use the OVERRIDE SIGNOUT option in order to perform this action. 3. Writes out the archive information (base and delta information from the Master Control File, as well as any additional information about the element) to the archive data set. The Master Control File does not reflect ARCHIVE processing. 4. If DELETE FROM ELEMENT = Y, Endevor runs standard delete processing for the element.

Chapter 6. Action Processing 6-29

6.6 Archive Action

6.7 Copy Action

This section describes how to copy an element to a data set external to Endevor.

6.7.1 Before You Begin

Before you use the COPY action for the first time, review the following information: Use--Use the COPY action to copy an element from an archive data set to a data set external to Endevor. The external data set can be a library (that is, a AllFusion CA-Panvalet file, a AllFusion CA-Librarian file, or a partitioned data set) or a sequential file. The element is not restored to the Master Control File. Availability--COPY is available in batch only, and is not available through the Build Request panel. COPY processing is strictly external to Endevor. Specification--For the COPY action syntax, see the SCL Reference Guide.

6.7.2 Copy Processing

The processing sequence for the COPY action is described next: 1. If the TO data set is a library and the TO member already exists in that library, Endevor rejects the request unless you specify REPLACE MEMBER = Y. You can specify a different member name; Endevor then assigns that name. 2. If the TO member does not already exist in the external data set or the external data set is not a library, Endevor writes the current level of the element to that data set. 3. If the TO location data set is a library, Endevor creates a new member for each COPY request. By default, the member name assigned is the same as the element name. 4. As the last step in COPY processing, Endevor footprints the copied element. Therefore, you can run footprint reports (described in the Reports Guide) as necessary.

6-30 User Guide

6.8 Delete Action

This section describes how to delete an element from Endevor.

6.8.1 Before You Begin

Before you use the Delete action for the first time, review the following information: Use--Use the DELETE action to delete all levels of an element, any associated processor outputs from either stage and, if you are using the Endevor Automated Configuration Manager (ACM), the component list for the element. If you are using ACM, you can also elect to delete only the component list for an element. Availability--You can delete elements in foreground, batch, and in packages. Specification--Use the Delete Elements panel to specify the type of processing you want to perform and any other information related to the request. To submit the request after you have filled in the appropriate information, press Enter.

6.8.2 Delete Elements Panel

The Delete Elements panel is shown next:

-----------------------------OPTION ===> blank - Element list # - Delete element FROM Endevor: ENVIRONMENT SYSTEM SUBSYSTEM ELEMENT TYPE STAGE COMMENT ===> DOC ===> FINANCE ===> ===> ===> ===> ===>

DELETE ELEMENTS

---------------------------H - History

ELEMENT DISPLAY OPTIONS: S - Summary B - Browse M - Master C - Changes

ACTION OPTIONS: CCID ===> OVERRIDE SIGNOUT ===> N (Y/N) ONLY COMPONENT ===> N (Y/N) A - TEST B - PROD

LIST OPTIONS: DISPLAY LIST ===> Y (Y/N) WHERE CCID EQ ===> WHERE PROC GRP EQ ===>

Chapter 6. Action Processing 6-31

6.8 Delete Action

6.8.3 Fields
The Delete Elements panel fields are described next:

6.8.3.1 Option Field

Use the OPTION field to specify the processing you wish to perform. Use this option Blank # S, M, B, C, H To... Display a selection list. This only applies when DISPLAY LIST = Y. Delete the element. Display one of the following element information panels: Summary of Levels (S), Element Master Info (M), Element Browse (B), Element Changes (C), or Element History (H).

6.8.3.2 From Endevor Fields

Use these fields to define the element you want to delete. Field Environment System Subsystem Element Type Stage Description The name of the environment where the element(s) reside. The system associated with the element(s) to be deleted. The subsystem associated with the element(s) to be deleted. The name of the element(s) to be deleted. You can specify a name mask in this field. The name of the type associated with the element to be deleted. The name of the stage where the elements to be deleted reside.

6.8.3.3 Comment Field

Use the COMMENT field to provide a 1- to 40-character comment explaining the action.

6-32 User Guide

6.8 Delete Action

6.8.3.4 Action Options Fields

Use the ACTION OPTIONS to further define your action request. Field CCID Description CCID associated with the action. If you specify a CCID, it is logged to SMF (if SMF is enabled) and is available to Endevor exits. Tells Endevor whether to delete an element even if it is not signed out to you. Y--Delete the element, even if it is not signed out to you. Endevor signs the element out to you if you specify this option. N--Default. Do not delete the element if it is not signed out to you. Only Component Applicable for Endevor ACM users only. Indicates whether you want to delete both the element component list and the element, or the element component list only. Y--Delete just the element component list N--Default. Delete the element as well as the element component list.

Override Signout

6.8.3.5 List Options Fields

Where Proc Grp Eq

Chapter 6. Action Processing 6-33

6.8 Delete Action

6.8.4 Delete Processing

When you delete an element, Endevor: 1. First ensures that the element currently exists in the stage specified, and whether the element is signed out to you. If the element has been signed out to a person other than you, you must use the OVERRIDE SIGNOUT option in order to perform the DELETE action. 2. Deletes the element from its associated source output library, if one has been defined for the element's type. 3. Determines the processor group last associated with the element (For more information, see the appendix "Actions and Processor Groups"), then executes the delete processor in that group if one has been specified. 4. Deletes the element base level and all change levels. The system then updates the Master Control File to reflect this processing. Note: When the Automated Configuration Manager (ACM) is installed, both the element and its component list are deleted when the DELETE action is performed.

6-34 User Guide

6.9 Generate Action

This section describes the Generate action.

6.9.1 Before You Begin

Before you use the Generate action for the first time, review the following information: Use--Generating an element creates outputs: object modules, load modules, listings, etc. You determine the kinds of outputs produced in the generate processor(s) that you write for each type in your software inventory. For more information on processors and processor groups, see the Extended Processors Guide. Endevor generates elements: Automatically, when you add, update, transfer, or restore them, unless you specify GENERATE ELEMENT = N. Explicitly, when you execute an explicit GENERATE action. Availability--You can generate elements in foreground, batch, and in packages. Specification--Use the Generate Elements panel to specify the type of processing you want to perform and any other information related to the request. To submit the request after you have filled in the appropriate information, press Enter.

6.9.2 Generate Elements Panel

The Generate Elements panel is shown next:

----------------------------OPTION ===> blank - Element list G - Generate element FROM Endevor: ENVIRONMENT SYSTEM SUBSYSTEM ELEMENT TYPE STAGE COMMENT

GENERATE ELEMENTS

-------------------------H - History

ELEMENT DISPLAY OPTIONS: S - Summary B - Browse M - Master C - Changes

ACTION OPTIONS: ===> DOC CCID ===> FINANCE COPYBACK ===> OVERRIDE SIGNOUT ===> PROCESSOR GROUP ===> ===> D - CSTAGE P - CPROD ===> ===> Y (Y/N) ===> ===> ===> N (Y/N)

===> ===> N (Y/N) ===> N (Y/N) ===>

LIST OPTIONS: DISPLAY LIST WHERE CCID EQ WHERE PROC GRP EQ BUILD USING MAP

Chapter 6. Action Processing 6-35

6.9 Generate Action

Caution! Do not execute a stand-alone GENERATE action against a load module. Doing so can result in change regression because generate processors update the output library, not the actual source. If you want to update a load module, issue an ADD or UPDATE action with GENERATE ELEMENT = Y.

6.9.3 Fields
The Generate Elements panel fields are described next.

6.9.3.1 Option Field

Use the OPTION field to specify the processing you wish to perform. Use This Option Blank G S, M, B, C, H To: Display a selection list. This only applies when DISPLAY LIST = Y. Generate the element. Display one of the listed element information panels.

6.9.3.2 From Endevor Fields

Use these fields to specify the location of the GENERATE action and the elements to be generated. Field Environment Description The name of the environment where an element is to be generated, and the target environment for generating an element with copyback. The system associated with the element(s) to be generated. The subsystem associated with the element(s) to be generated. The 1- to 8-character name of the element(s) to be generated. The name of the type associated with the element to be generated. The name of the environment where an element is to be generated, and the target environment for generating an element with copyback.

System Subsystem Element Type Stage

6-36 User Guide

6.9 Generate Action

6.9.3.3 Comment Field

Use the COMMENT field to provide a 1- to 40-character comment explaining the action.

6.9.3.4 Action Options Fields

Use the ACTION OPTIONS fields to further define your action request. Field CCID Copyback Description CCID associated with the GENERATE request. Indicates whether you want to copy the element to the FROM stage and generate it at that stage: Y (yes) or N (no). For more information, see Generating Elements Without Copyback in this chapter. Tells Endevor whether to generate an element even if it is not signed out to you. Y--Generate the element, even if it is not signed out to you. Endevor signs the element out to you if you specify this option. N--Default. Do not generate the element if it is not signed out to you. Processor Group The name of the processor group to be associated with the element. You can type a processor group name in this field or use a name mask to access a list of processor groups from which you can select. For more information on specifying a mask character, see Name Masking in the chapter Endevor Basics. If you do not provide a processor group name Endevor selects a processor group. For information on how Endevor selects this processor group, see the Extended Processors Guide.

Override Signout

6.9.3.5 List Options Fields

Use these options to limit the elements in the Element Selection List. Field Display List Description Indicates choice to use list panels for requesting this action: Y (yes) or N (no). Default is Y.

Chapter 6. Action Processing 6-37

6.9 Generate Action

Field Where CCID Eq

Description Use a CCID to limit the list to those elements whose last level, action or generate CCID is equal to the specified CCID. Use a processor group name to limit the list to those elements to which the group is assigned. Type Y (yes) in this field if you want Endevor to search the map when building a list of elements for generation, starting at the FROM location. Caution! Avoid using BUILD USING MAP = Y in combination with DISPLAY LIST = N.

Where Proc Grp Eq Build Using Map

6.9.4 Impact of Generate Action on CCIDs/Comments

If you do not use the COPYBACK option when you specify a CCID and comment in a GENERATE request, Endevor: Sets the last action CCID/comment. Sets the generate and component delta CCIDs/comments. If you do use the COPYBACK option when you specify a CCID and comment in a GENERATE request, Endevor: Sets the last action CCID/comment. Sets the source and source delta CCIDs/comments to their Stage 2 value. Sets the generate and component delta CCIDs/comments.

6.9.5 Generating Elements Without Copyback

When you generate an element without copyback, Endevor: 1. Checks whether the element is signed out to you. 2. Checks the element type definition for a source output library specification, then writes a copy of the current level of the element to that library. If EXPAND INCLUDES = Y (on the Type Definition panel), Endevor expands INCLUDE statements in the source. 3. Determines the processor group (For more information, the see appendix "Actions and Processor Groups"). It then executes the generate processor in that group if one has been specified. 4. Updates the information in the Master Control File after the generate processor has been run for the element.

6-38 User Guide

6.9 Generate Action

6.9.6 Generating Elements with Copyback

Generate elements with copyback when you have changed an element, for example a copybook, used by multiple programs, and you want to recompile the affected programs. In the example that follows, you have modified the copybook Copy, which is shared by programs PROGX, PROGY, and PROGZ. When you generate the elements PROGX, PROGY, and PROGZ with copyback, the following happens: 1. Endevor searches beyond the current stage, in every stage in the current and subsequent environments in the map. If it finds the element, Endevor copies the current version of the element to the target stage, along with the processor group name last used for the element.

Note: If you want to restrict Endevor's search to the current environment, generate the element with BUILD USING MAP = N. In the following example, you cannot generate the elements PROGY and PROGZ because they are outside the current environment.

2. If Endevor finds the element at a stage not included in the map, it issues a warning message, then continues to search for an element in a stage that is included in the map. In the following example, Endevor warns you that a version of PROGY is located outside the map route.

3. Endevor updates the Master Control File (MCF). The value specified for Signout Fetch (SOFETCH) in the Endevor Defaults Table will effect how the MCF will be updated for the element copied back (fetched).

Chapter 6. Action Processing 6-39

6.9 Generate Action

If Signout Upon Fetch is in effect, the element will be signed out to you unless it is already signed out to someone else. If Signout Upon Fetch is not in effect, the element will not be signed out to you. For more information about SOFETCH, see The TYPE= MAIN Macro in the chapter The Defaults Table in the Administrator Guide. 4. Endevor then does the following: Checks the element type definition for a source output library specification, then writes a copy of the current level of the element to that library. If EXPAND INCLUDES = Y (on the Type Definition panel), Endevor expands INCLUDE statements in the source. Determines the processor group (For more information, see the appendix "Actions and Processor Groups"). It then executes the generate processor in that group if one has been specified. 5. After the generate processor has been run for the element, Endevor updates the information in the Master Control File.

6-40 User Guide

6.10 List Element Action

This section describes how to list element information.

6.10.1 Before You Begin

Before you use the List action for the first time, review the following information: Use--Use the LIST ELEMENT action to create lists of information about selected elements. You can also list elements from an archive data set. For more information, see the discussion of the List statement in the SCL Reference Guide. You can also create lists of information about library members, as described in List Member Action. Additional options are available with the LIST ELEMENT action. However, these options must be entered using the EDIT option (option 2 on the Batch Options Menu) after the request has been generated; they cannot be entered directly on the List Element Action panel. For more information, see the discussion of the List statement in the SCL Reference Guide. Availability--You can list element information in batch and in packages. Specification--Use the List Element Action panel to specify the type of processing you want to perform and any other information related to the request. To submit the request after you have filled in the appropriate information, press Enter.

Chapter 6. Action Processing 6-41

6.10 List Element Action

6.10.2 List Element Action Panel

The List Element Action panel is shown next.

---------------------------OPTION ===> blank - Element list L - LIST element action FROM Endevor: ENVIRONMENT SYSTEM SUBSYSTEM ELEMENT TYPE STAGE TEXT STRING: ===> ===> DOC ===> FINANCE ===> ===> ===> ===>

LIST ELEMENT ACTION

-------------------------H - History

ELEMENT DISPLAY OPTIONS: S - Summary B - Browse M - Master C - Changes LIST OPTIONS: DISPLAY LIST WHERE CCID EQ WHERE PROC GRP EQ BUILD USING MAP A - TEST B - PROD

===> Y (Y/N) ===> ===> ===> N (Y/N)

SCAN COLUMNS: START ===> END ===> SHOW TEXT ===> N (Y/N) ACTION TO BE GENERATED WHEN LIST IS CREATED ===> WRITE LIST TO OUTPUT DATA SET ===> N (Y/N) WHERE COMPONENT EQ ===>

Note: Specifying wildcards as part of the LIST action's search criteria increases the action's resource usage. When you specify the criteria, be as specific as possible. For more information on wildcards, see Name Masking in the chapter Endevor Basics.

6.10.3 Fields
The List Element Action panel fields are described next:

6.10.3.1 Option Field

Use the OPTION field to specify the processing you wish to perform. Use This Option Blank L S, M, B, C, H To... Display a selection list This only applies when DISPLAY LIST = Y. Generate an action request to list the element(s) identified on the screen. Display one of the listed element information panels.

6-42 User Guide

6.10 List Element Action

6.10.3.2 From Endevor Fields

Use these fields to define the element you want to list or display. Field Environment System Subsystem Element Type Stage Description Name of the current environment. System associated with the element(s) to be listed. Subsystem associated with the element(s) to be listed. Element(s) about which you want to list information. Type associated with the element(s) to be listed. ID of the current stage.

6.10.3.3 List Options Fields

Use these fields to limit the elements shown in the Element Selection List. Field Display List Where CCID Eq Description Indicates choice to use list panels for this action: Y (yes) or N (no). Default is Y. Use a CCID to limit the list to those elements whose last level, action or generate CCID is equal to the specified CCID. Use a processor group name to limit the list to those elements to which the group is assigned. Type Y (yes) in this field if you want Endevor to search the map, beginning in the FROM location, when building a list of elements. Caution! Avoid using BUILD USING MAP = Y in combination with DISPLAY LIST = N.

Where Proc Grp Eq Build Using Map

Chapter 6. Action Processing 6-43

6.10 List Element Action

6.10.3.4 Text String Field

Applicable when you want to list only those elements that contain a particular character string. Indicate the text string for which you want to search (1-70 characters). Enclose the string in quotes if it contains blanks or special characters. If you supply a text string, Endevor only generates action requests for those elements that contain the string. If you also specify SCAN COLUMNS, the search is restricted to the columns indicated. By default, the case of the search argument must match exactly in order for a match to be found. If a site wishes to implement mono-case text searches, the mono-case search option must be turned on in the options table (ENCOPTBL). For more information on this option, see the chapter Optional Features in the Administrator Guide.

6.10.3.5 Scan Columns Fields

These fields are applicable when you supply a text string. Field Scan Columns: Start/End Description Range of columns to be searched for the text string, specified in terms of a start and end column. You must enter both a starting and ending column. Applicable when you specify a text string in the TEXT STRING field. Indicates whether you want any lines containing the specified text string to print on the execution report. Acceptable values are Y (yes) or N (no). Default is N.

Show Text

6.10.3.6 Action To Be Generated When List Is Created Field

Type of action you want the LIST requests to generate. Specify any of the following actions: &&Action, Add, Archive, Copy, Delete, Generate, List, Move, Print, Restore, Retrieve, Signin, Transfer, Update. The default is &&ACTION, which is used when you want to specify the action at run time and not hard-code a specific action in the list.

6.10.3.7 Write List to Output Data Set Field

Indicates whether the element list is to be written to a data set: Y (yes) or N (no). The default is N.

6-44 User Guide

6.10 List Element Action

6.10.3.8 Where Component Eq Field

A component can be specified in this field to limit the selection list to only those elements containing the component(s) indicated.

6.10.4 Element Selection List for the List Element Action

Endevor returns an Element Selection List if you do not specify the element, type, stage, or option you want, DISPLAY LIST = Y, and WRITE LIST TO OUTPUT DATA SET = N. For more information on Element Selection Lists, see the chapter Foreground and Batch Processing. Endevor supports the Locate command on Element and Member Selection Lists. Note: Element Selection Lists are sorted alphabetically by element name, in map-sequence order. Whenever possible, you should fully qualify a system when requesting the selection list. If you cannot fully specify a system, be sure to look carefully at the Endevor location (environment/stage) and classification (system/subsystem/type) information associated with a located element to make sure it is the element for which you are looking. To sort the selection lists by a different column, use either the ESORT or the EONLY command. These commands are documented fully in the section Selections Lists in Chapter 4, Foreground and Batch Processing.

6.10.5 List Output Panel

If you specify WRITE LIST TO OUTPUT DATA SET = Y on the List Element Action panel, Endevor returns the List Output panel.

------------------------------- LIST OUTPUT -----------------------------OPTION ===> Specify data set where output of LIST will be placed, then press Enter TO ISPF LIBRARY: PROJECT ===> BST LIBRARY ===> C1DEMO TYPE ===> COPYLIB1 MEMBER ===> OTHER PARTITIONED OR SEQUENTIAL DATA SET: DATA SET NAME ===> 'ZSXBAP1.T.PDS(LISTOUT)'

Leave the OPTION field blank on this panel. Use the TO ISPF LIBRARY fields or the OTHER PARTITIONED DATA SET fields to specify the library for the list element output.

Chapter 6. Action Processing 6-45

6.11 List Member Action

This section describes the List Member action.

6.11.1 Before You Begin

Before you use the List Member action the first time, review the following information: Use--Use the LIST MEMBER action to create lists of members from a library or to browse a member online. For information on creating lists for elements, see the previous section. Additional options are available with the LIST MEMBER action. However, these options must be entered using the EDIT option (option 2 on the Batch Options Menu) after the request has been generated; they cannot be entered directly on the List Members panel. For more information, see the discussion of the List statement in the SCL Reference Guide. Availability--The LIST MEMBER action is available in batch and in packages. Specification--Use the List Members panel to specify the type of processing you want to perform and any other information related to the request. To submit the request after you have filled in the appropriate information, press Enter.

6.11.2 List Members Panel

The List Members panel is shown next:

------------------------------- LIST MEMBERS ----------------------------OPTION ===> blank - Member list B - Browse member L - LIST action FROM ISPF LIBRARY: LIST OPTIONS: PROJECT ===> BST DISPLAY LIST ===> Y LIBRARY ===> C1DEMO TYPE ===> COPYLIB1 MEMBER ===> THRU MEMBER ===> FROM OTHER PARTITIONED OR SEQUENTIAL DATA SET: DATA SET NAME ===> TEXT STRING: ===> SCAN COLUMNS: START ===> END ===> SHOW TEXT ===> N (Y/N) ACTION TO BE GENERATED WHEN LIST IS CREATED ===> WRITE LIST TO OUTPUT DATA SET ===> N (Y/N)

6-46 User Guide

6.11 List Member Action

6.11.3 Fields
The List Members panel fields are described next:

6.11.3.1 Option Field

Use the OPTION field to specify the processing you want to perform. Use This Option Blank To... Display a Member Selection List for the library named. This only applies when DISPLAY LIST = Y. Return an ISPF Browse panel showing the contents of a specific library member. Generate a request to list the member specified.

B L

6.11.3.2 From ISPF Library Fields

Use these fields to specify the library in which a member(s) resides, as well as the member, or range of members, about which you want to list information. If you specify option B or L, you must provide a single member name.

6.11.3.3 From Other Partitioned or Sequential Data Set Field

As an alternative to the FROM ISPF LIBRARY fields, enter the data set name, and member if the data set is a library, in 'data set(member name) ' format. To provide a range of members when using this format, specify the end of the range in the THRU MEMBER field.

6.11.3.4 List Options Field

The value in the display list field indicates whether you want to use list panels when requesting this action: Y (yes) or N (no). The default is Y.

6.11.3.5 Text String Field

Applicable when you want to list only those members that contain a particular character string. Indicate the text string for which you want to search (1-70 characters). Enclose the string in quotes if it contains blanks or special characters. If you supply a text string, Endevor only generates action requests for those members that contain the string. If you also specify SCAN COLUMNS, the search is restricted to the columns indicated.

Chapter 6. Action Processing 6-47

6.11 List Member Action

By default, the case of the search argument must match exactly in order for a match to be found. If a site wishes to implement mono-case text searches, the mono-case search option must be turned on in the options table (ENCOPTBL). For more information on this option, see the chapter Optional Features in the Administrator Guide.

6.11.3.6 Scan Columns Fields

These fields are applicable when you supply a text string. Field Scan Columns: Start/End Description Range of columns to be searched for the text string, specified in terms of a start and end column. You must enter both a starting and ending column. Applicable when you specify a text string in the text string field. Indicates whether you want any lines containing the specified text string to print on the execution report. Acceptable values are Y (yes) or N (no). Default is N.

Show Text

6.11.3.7 Action To Be Generated When List Is Created Field

6.11.3.8 Write List to Output Data Set Field

Indicate whether or not the member list is to be written to a data set: Y (yes) or N (no). The default is N.

6.11.4 Member Selection List Panel for the List Member Action Field
If DISPLAY LIST= N, and WRITE LIST TO OUTPUT DATA SET = Y on the List Members panel, Endevor returns the Member Selection List. Endevor generates the LIST action request(s) when you press Enter, regardless of whether you qualify the member name. If DISPLAY LIST= Y and you leave the member name blank or supply a name mask, Endevor returns a Member Selection List. The list is limited according to any member name mask specified on the List Members panel (For more information on specifying a mask character, see Name Masking in the chapter Endevor Basics). Use the Member Selection List to select the member(s) you want to list or browse. Note: Endevor supports the Locate command on Member Selection Lists.

6-48 User Guide

6.11 List Member Action

A sample Member Selection List panel is shown next.

LIST ----------------------- MEMBER SELECTION LIST -------- ROW 22 OF 161 COMMAND INPUT ===> SCROLL ===> CSR FROM Data set: BST.NDVRC1.JCLLIB | - - - - - - - - - FOOTPRINT - - - - - - - - - - - - | MEMBER SYSTEM SUBSYS ELEMENT TYPE VV.LL DATE TIME L CONDORRT CNTLI2 1 INTERNAL CONDORRT TABLESI 1. 27JUL 1 16:14 DOWNLD2 DOWNLOAD DOWNMACS D1ASMX D1LNKX D2ASMX D2LNKX FIX FOO FOOTPRNT FOO1 FOO2 FOO3 G1ABEND G1ASMX NDVR25 PROCESS G1ASMX PROCESS 1. 2JUN 1 11:27 G1ASQL

The Member Selection List shows the library being processed (FROM data set). Each member in the library is listed in the left-hand column, and the footprint information for that member (if any) is listed to the right of the member name. Footprint information includes the system and subsystem for the associated Endevor element, the element name itself, the element type for the element, the version and level of the element associated with this member, and the date/time the footprint was written. On the Member Selection List panel, you can: Select one or more members to be listed by placing an L to the far left of each member name. Select one or more members to be browsed by placing a B to the far left of each member name. Submit the LIST MEMBER action by pressing ENTER.

Chapter 6. Action Processing 6-49

6.11 List Member Action

6.11.5 List Output Panel

If you specify WRITE LIST TO OUTPUT DATA SET = Y on the List Members panel, Endevor returns the List Output panel.

----------------------------- LIST OUTPUT ------------------------------OPTION ===> Specify data set where output of LIST will be placed, then press Enter TO ISPF LIBRARY: PROJECT ===> BST LIBRARY ===> C1DEMO TYPE ===> COPYLIB1 MEMBER ===> OTHER PARTITIONED OR SEQUENTIAL DATA SET: DATA SET NAME ===> 'ZSXBAP1.T.PDS(LISTOUT)'

Leave the OPTION field blank, and use the TO ISPF LIBRARY or OTHER PARTITIONED DATA SET fields to specify the library for the list element output.

6.11.6 List Processing

When you request a LIST action, Endevor: 1. Builds a list of elements or members that match the element or member name criteria you provide. 2. Scans this list for elements or members that meet the WHERE criteria specified in the remainder of the LIST request. Where criteria include CCID, text strings, generate or archive date, processor group, or components (if you have ACM). 3. If you specify DETAIL REPORT = Y, Endevor lists in the Execution Report each element or member it searches, whether or not that element or member matches the selection criteria. 4. Creates, for each element or member that meets the criteria specified, an action request in the TO location data set. If you have not designated a different member name for the list in the TO location data set, Endevor assigns it the member name "TEMPNAME." The type of action request created is determined by the information you enter for the LIST request, for example, ADD, UPDATE, MOVE, etc. As an alternative to requesting a specific action at this time, you can enter &&ACTION, which allows you to substitute a desired (or required) action when you execute the requests at a later date.

6-50 User Guide

6.12 Move Elements Action

This section describes how to move an element from one inventory location to another in Endevor.

6.12.1 Before You Begin

Before you use the Move action for the first time, review the following information: Use--The MOVE action moves elements from one inventory location (environment, stage) to the next location on a map route. You can move elements either with history or without history. You can only move elements from one environment to another if the elements start in Stage 2 of the source environment. So, for example, to move an element from Stage 1 of the Development environment into Stage 1 of the QA environment, you have to move the element to Stage 2 in Development and then move it into Stage 1 in QA. Availability--You can move elements in foreground, batch, and in packages. Specification--Use the Move Elements panel to specify the type of processing you want to perform and any other information related to the request. To submit the request after you have filled in the appropriate information, press Enter. For instructions on accessing this panel in foreground, batch, and when building a package, see the chapter Foreground and Batch Processing.

6.12.2 Move Elements Panel

The Move Elements panel is shown next.

------------------------------- MOVE ELEMENTS ---------------------------OPTION ===> ELEMENT DISPLAY OPTIONS: blank - Element list S - Summary B - Browse H - History O - Move element M - Master C - Changes FROM Endevor: ACTION OPTIONS: ENVIRONMENT ===> BST CCID ===> SYSTEM ===> NDVR25 SYNC ===> N (Y/N) SUBSYSTEM ===> INTERNAL WITH HISTORY ===> N (Y/N) ELEMENT ===> RETAIN SIGNOUT ===> N (Y/N) TYPE ===> ISPPE SIGNOUT TO ===> STAGE ===> D ACKNOWLEDGE ELM JUMP ===> N (Y/N) D - CSTAGE P - CPROD DELETE 'FROM' ELEMENT ===> Y (Y/N COMMENT ===> LIST OPTIONS: DISPLAY LIST ===> Y (Y/N) WHERE CCID EQ ===> WHERE PROC GRP EQ ===> BUILD USING MAP ===> N (Y/N)

Chapter 6. Action Processing 6-51

6.12 Move Elements Action

6.12.3 Fields
The Move Elements panel fields are described next:

6.12.3.1 Option Field

Use the OPTION field to specify the processing you wish to perform. Use This Option Blank O S, M, B, C, H To... Display a selection list. This only applies when DISPLAY LIST = Y. Move the element from the source stage to the target stage. Display one of the listed information panels.

6.12.3.2 From Endevor Fields

Use these fields to define the element you want to move. Field Environment System Subsystem Element Type Stage Description The name of the source environment. The system associated with the element(s) to be moved. The subsystem associated with the element(s) to be moved. The name of the elements to be moved. The name of the type associated with the element to be moved. The ID of the source stage.

6.12.3.3 Comment Field

Use the COMMENT field to provide a 1- to 40-character comment explaining the action. Action Options Fields Field CCID Description CCID associated with the move request.

6-52 User Guide

6.12 Move Elements Action

Field Sync

Description Indicates whether you want the MOVE action performed when the base level of the element at the source location is different from the current level of the element at the target: Y (yes) or N (no). Default is N. When you specify Y, Endevor creates a "sync" level at the target that reflects the differences between the base level at the source location and the current level at the target. The move fails if these levels are different and you have specified SYNC = N. You must specify SYNC = Y when moving to the location where the out-of-sync condition exists. If the element does not exist at the target of the move, the SYNC=Y option searchs up the map for the element and fetches (copies back) the element to the target and creates a sync level at the target. To disable this functionality, you can turn on the option DO_NOT_SYNC_AT_TARGET=ON in the optional features table ENCOPTBL.

With History

Indicates whether you want to move the element with history. Default is N, move the element without history. When you move the element without history Endevor searches through the element levels at the source location to find a matching level at the target location. Endevor then compares the two and creates a new level at the target location that reflects the differences.

Retain Signout

Determines whether Endevor retains the signout associated with an element at the source location when it is moved to the target location. Acceptable values are: Y-- Retain the source location signout at the target location. N--Default. Do not retain the source location signout at the target location.

Signout To

Allows you to sign the element out to another user at the target location. Do so by typing the TSO user ID of the person to whom you want to sign out the element in this field. If RETAIN SIGNOUT = Y, you cannot use this option.

Chapter 6. Action Processing 6-53

6.12 Move Elements Action

Field Acknowledge Elm Jump

Description Endevor uses this field when it finds an element being moved at a non-mapped stage between the FROM and TO locations of the move. When this occurs, Endevor checks the system definition. If the system's REQ ELM JUMP ACKNOWLEDGEMENT = Y, then you must type Y in this field to move elements. Otherwise, the value in this field can be either Y or N. Whenever Endevor jumps an element during a move, it issues a message informing you of this fact.

Delete from Element

Indicates whether you want Endevor to delete the element(s) at the source location after moving them. Acceptable values are: Y--Default. Delete the element(s). N--Do not delete the element(s) Caution! If you specify option N to leave the element at the source location, then you must specify SYNC = Y for any subsequent moves of this element.

6.12.3.4 List Options Fields

Use these fields to limit the elements shown in the Element Selection List. Field Display List Where CCID Eq Description Indicates choice to use list panels for this action: Y (yes) or N (no). Default is Y. Use a CCID to limit the list to those elements whose last level, action or generate CCID is equal to the specified CCID. Use a processor group name to limit the list to those elements to which the group is assigned. Type Y (yes) in this field if you want Endevor to search the map when building a list of elements to be moved, starting at the FROM location. Caution! Avoid using BUILD USING MAP = Y in combination with DISPLAY LIST = N.

Where Proc Grp Eq Build Using Map

6-54 User Guide

6.12 Move Elements Action

6.12.4 Impact of Move Action on CCIDs/Comments

The impact of the MOVE action on CCIDs and comments depends on whether you are using the WITH HISTORY option. When you specify a CCID and comment and WITH HISTORY = N, Endevor: Sets the last action CCID/comment. Sets source & generate CCID/comments with their Stage 1 value. Sets source delta and component delta CCID/comments with their last Stage 1 value. Clears the retrieve CCID/comment. When you specify a CCID and comment and WITH HISTORY = Y, Endevor: Sets the last action CCID/comment. Sets source & generate CCID/comments with their Stage 1 value. Carries existing source and source delta CCID/comments with their respective delta levels. Clears the retrieve CCID/comment.

6.12.5 Moves Using a Generate Processor

Move processors can be used to: Copy the outputs (load modules and listings) from the source to the target stage. Recreate load modules at the target stage. This occurs when a generate processor is used as a move processor. For more information, see the Extended Processors Guide. If you want to use a generate processor as a move processor, be sure to specify G in the PROCESSOR TO USE FOR THE MOVE ACTION field on the definition panel for the appropriate processor group. Note: Do not recreate load modules at the target stage by coding a compile and link step in a move processor. This causes the load module footprint to become out of sync with Master Control File information for the element. Instead, use the generate processor at the target stage, which will both execute the compile and link and update the element's Master Control File.

Chapter 6. Action Processing 6-55

6.12 Move Elements Action

6.12.6 Moves Using Delete from Element Option

When you move an element with DELETE FROM ELEMENT = N, Endevor leaves a copy of the element at the source location of the move. Consider using this option only when you do not plan to ever move the element from the source location. If you do move the element that remains at the source location, the Move fails unless you specify SYNC = Y.

6.12.7 Move Processing

When you move an element, Endevor performs as many of the following processes as necessary: Source management. This involves the actual move of the element and MCF updates. Processor management. This involves executing, at the target location, either the Move processor of the source processor group or the Generate processor at the target processor group (based on the processor group setting at the source location). Processing may include writing to a source output library and to the appropriate processor output libraries. Delete processing. This involves executing the Delete processor and deleting the element at the source location of the move.

6.12.8 Moving Elements With History

When you move an element with history, Endevor: 1. Checks the following and issues messages as necessary: Does the element exist at the source location? Does the element exist at the target location? Does the acknowledge element jump option apply? Is source management necessary? Is processor management necessary (restart situation)? 2. Performs source management by moving the element to the target stage. The processing that Endevor performs depends on whether the element exists at the TO location.

6-56 User Guide

6.12 Move Elements Action

a. If the element does not exist at the target, Endevor searches the map for subsequent occurrences of the element. If it finds the element farther along the map, it compares the base level of the element to be moved with the current level of the subsequent element. If the two are in sync, Endevor copies back (or fetches) the element from up the map to the target location with all delta levels intact. If the two are not in sync, Endevor issues a warning message and does not perform the copy, provided that the SYNC=N option was specified on the move action. If the SYNC=Y option was specified for the move action and the two are not in synch, then Endevor issues a warning message and copies the element back to the target location and creates a sync level at the target. The new sync level reflects the differences between the base level of the source element and the current level of the fetched element. Then the move proceeds with the current level of the source element being moved to the target location and the source element delta levels are appended to the target. You can restrict the SYNC=Y option to prevent it from copying the element back to the target, by turning on the optional feature DO_NOT_SYNC_AT_TARGET=ON in ENCOPTBL. b. If Endevor finds the element at a stage not included in the map, it issues a warning message, then continues to search for the element in a stage that is included in the map. c. If the element exists at the target location, Endevor performs level-matching. During level-matching, Endevor determines the sync point of the source and target elements by comparing the level time stamp of the base level of the source element with the current level of the target element. If the two time stamps do not match, Endevor checks the next oldest level of the source element, and so on. If the sync point is found, Endevor moves the element from the FROM location to the TO location, appending the FROM location delta levels after the sync-point element.

Chapter 6. Action Processing 6-57

6.12 Move Elements Action

If the two levels are different, and SYNCHRONIZE =Y, Endevor first creates a sync level at the target reflecting the differences between the base level of the FROM element and the target, then moves the element to the TO location and appends the FROM location delta levels to the target.

d. If the element does not exist at the target, Endevor moves the element from the source to the target location with all delta levels intact.

3. Completes source management after the element base and change levels have been moved by updating the Master Control File (MCF) to reflect the move. Note that the value specified for Signout Upon Fetch (the SOFETCH parameter) in the Endevor Defaults table will effect how the MCF for the element copied back will be updated. If Signout Upon Fetch is in effect, the element will be signed out to you unless it is already signed out to someone else. If Signout Upon Fetch is not in effect, the element will not be signed out to you. For more information about Signout Upon Fetch (the SOFETCH parameter), see The TYPE=MAIN Macro in the chapter The Defaults Table in the Administrator Guide. 4. Performs processor management by writing a copy of the element to a source output library, if one is defined for the associated element type at the target location. If EXPAND INCLUDES = Y (on the Type Definition panel), Endevor expands INCLUDE statements in the source.

6-58 User Guide

6.12 Move Elements Action

5. Completes processor management by determining the processor group last associated with the element (For more information, see the appendix "Actions and Processor Groups"), then executes the move or generate processor in that group if one has been specified . After the processor has been run for the element, Endevor updates processor information in the Master Control file. 6. If DELETE FROM ELEMENT = Y, Endevor executes standard delete processing for the element. For more information, see Delete Action in this chapter.

6.12.9 Moving Elements Without History

To move without history, specify WITH HISTORY = N on the MOVE request. Endevor executes the request and attempts to find a sync level between the source and target elements beginning with the first level at the source and working forward through the deltas. If Endevor finds a sync level, it compares the two and creates a new level at the target that reflects the differences. If Endevor cannot find a sync level and you specify SYNC = N, Endevor issues a message indicating that the elements are "out of sync" and the MOVE action terminates. If Endevor cannot find a sync level and you specify SYNC = Y, Endevor issues an out of sync message. Endevor then compares the last level of the source and last level of the target, and creates a new level at the target that reflects the differences. For MOVE action batch syntax, see the SCL Reference Guide.

6.12.10 Restarting Moves

If a MOVE action fails, first respond to the error condition, then resubmit the MOVE request. When you restart a MOVE action: After a source management failure, Endevor performs source management, processor management, and delete processing. After a processor management failure, Endevor bypasses source management, and performs just processor management and delete processing. After a delete failure, Endevor bypasses source management and processor management, and performs just delete processing.

Chapter 6. Action Processing 6-59

6.13 Print Elements Action

You can print information about elements and about members. This section describes how to print element information. The next section, Print Members Action, describes how to print member information. If you select this option from the Foreground Options Menu, Endevor saves the appropriate SCL in a temporary data set and, when you exit your Endevor session, gives you the option of printing the information.

6.13.1 Before You Begin

Before you use the Print Elements action the first time, review the following information: Use--The PRINT ELEMENT action prints information about selected elements. The following types of element information can be requested: Browse-- (default) prints all statements in the specified level of the element, as well as the level at which each statement was inserted. Changes-- displays all inserts and deletes made to the element at the level specified. History-- prints all statements in all levels of the element. Summary-- prints one line of summary information for each level. Master-- prints Master Control File information for the element. Availability--The PRINT ELEMENTS action is available in foreground and batch. Specification--Use the Print Elements panel to specify the type of processing you want to perform and any other information related to the request. To submit the request after you have filled in the appropriate information, press Enter.

6-60 User Guide

6.13 Print Elements Action

6.13.2 Print Elements Panel

The Print Elements panel is shown next.

-----------------------------OPTION ===> blank - Element list P - Print element PC - Print changes only PS - Print element summary PH - Print change history FROM Endevor: ENVIRONMENT SYSTEM SUBSYSTEM ELEMENT TYPE STAGE ===> DOC ===> FINANCE ===> ===> ===> ===>

PRINT ELEMENTS

---------------------------H - History

ELEMENT DISPLAY OPTIONS: S - Summary B - Browse M - Master C - Changes

PM - Print master information PX - Print component information

A - TEST

B - PROD

LIST OPTIONS: DISPLAY LIST WHERE CCID EQ WHERE PROC GRP EQ BUILD USING MAP

===> Y (Y/N) ===> ===> ===> N (Y/N)

6.13.3 Fields
The Print Elements panel fields are described next:

6.13.3.1 Option Field

Use the OPTION field to specify the processing you wish to perform. Use this option Blank P To... Display a selection list. This only applies when DISPLAY LIST = Y. Print a browse report showing all statements in the current level of the element, and the level at which each statement was inserted. This report corresponds to display option B. Print a changes report showing all inserts and deletions made to the element as of the current level. This report corresponds to display option C. Print a summary report showing all levels of the element. This report corresponds to display option S.

Chapter 6. Action Processing 6-61

6.13 Print Elements Action

Use this option PM

To... Print an element master report showing element information stored in the Master Control File. This report corresponds to display option M. Print a history report showing all statements in all levels of the element, from the base level through the current level. This report corresponds to display option H. Display one of the listed element information panels.

S, M, B, C, H

6.13.3.2 From Endevor Fields

Use these fields to define the element you want to print or display. Field Environment System Subsystem Element Type Stage Description Name of the current environment. System associated with the element about which information is to be printed. Subsystem associated with the element about which information is to be printed. Element(s) about which you want to print information. Type associated with the element about which information is to be printed. ID of the current stage.

6.13.3.3 List Option Fields

Where Proc Grp Eq

6-62 User Guide

6.13 Print Elements Action

Field Build Using Map

Description Type Y (yes) in this field if you want Endevor to search the map when building a list of elements for printing, starting at the from location. Caution! Avoid using BUILD USING MAP = Y in combination with DISPLAY LIST = N.

6.13.4 Considerations
When you use the Print Elements action, you need to consider the following items: Printing to a Data Set--If you want to direct print output to a data set, see the SCL Reference Guide for the data set requirements. Submitting Print Jobs in Foreground--Print requests are queued to a temporary data set during each Endevor session. When you terminate the session (to return to ISPF or TSO), Endevor displays a panel asking you whether you want to submit a job to print all the requests made during the session. Printing Information about Previous Levels--By default, Endevor prints the current level of the element. If you want to print a level that precedes the current level, first use option S to display a Summary of Levels for the element, then select the level you want from that display.

Chapter 6. Action Processing 6-63

6.14 Print Members Action

This section describes how to print member information.

6.14.1 Before You Begin

Before you use the Print Members action the first time, review the following information: Use--The PRINT MEMBERS action allows you to print a member from a library or to browse a member online. Availability--The PRINT MEMBERS action is available in batch and in packages. Specification--Use the Print Members panel to specify the type of processing you want to perform and any other information related to the request. To submit the request after you have filled in the appropriate information, press Enter.

6.14.2 Print Members Panel

The Print Members panel is shown next.

------------------------------- PRINT MEMBERS OPTION ===> Blank - Member list B - Browse member FROM ISPF LIBRARY: PROJECT ===> BST LIBRARY ===> NDVRC1 TYPE ===> JCLLIB MEMBER ===> THRU MEMBER ===> FROM OTHER PARTITIONED OR SEQUENTIAL DATA SET: DATA SET NAME ===> LIST OPTIONS: DISPLAY LIST ===> Y

---------------------------P - Print member

6.14.3 Fields
The Print Members panel fields are described next:

6.14.3.1 Option Field

Use this field to specify the processing you want to perform. Use this option Blank To... Display a member list for the library named. This applies only when DISPLAY LIST = Y.

6-64 User Guide

6.14 Print Members Action

Use this option B P

To... Return an ISPF Browse panel showing the contents of a specific library member. Generate the SCL to print the member specified.

6.14.3.2 From ISPF Library Fields

Use these fields to specify the library in which a member(s) resides, as well as the member, or range of members, about which you want to print information. If you specify option B or P, you must provide a single member name.

6.14.3.3 From Other Partitioned or Sequential Data Set Field

6.14.3.4 List Options Field

Indicates whether you want to use selection lists when requesting this action: Y (yes) or N (no). The default is Y.

6.14.4 Member Selection List for the Print Members Panel

The Member Selection List appears when you do not fully specify the library members that you want to print or browse and DISPLAY LIST = Y. Note: Endevor supports the ISPF Locate command on Member Selection Lists.

BROWSE/PRINT ------------ MEMBER SELECTION LIST ------- ROW 22 OF 161 COMMAND INPUT ===> SCROLL ===> CSR FROM Data set: BST.NDVRC1.JCLLIB | - - - - - - - - - - - FOOTPRINT - - - - - - - - - - - - | MEMBER SYSTEM SUBSYS ELEMENT TYPE VV.LL DATE TIME p CONDORRT CNTLI2 1 INTERNAL CONDORRT TABLESI 1. 27JUL 1 16:14 DOWNLD2 DOWNLOAD DOWNMACS D1ASMX D1LNKX D2ASMX D2LNKX FIX FOO FOOTPRNT FOO1 FOO2 FOO3 G1ABEND

Chapter 6. Action Processing 6-65

6.14 Print Members Action

The Member Selection List shows the library being processed (FROM DATA SET). It lists each member in the library in the left-hand column, and the footprint information for that member (if any) to the right. Using this panel, you can select one or more members to be: Printed, by placing a P to the left of each member you want. Browsed, by placing a B to the left of each member you want. If you request print (P), Endevor writes the member to a temporary data set, and returns you to the selection list with the message *WRITTEN next to the selected member.

BROWSE/PRINT -------------- MEMBER SELECTION LIST ---------- ROW 19 OF 161 COMMAND INPUT ===> SCROLL ===> FROM Data set: BST.NDVRC1.JCLLIB | - - - - - - - - - - FOOTPRINT - - - - - - - - - - - - - | MEMBER SYSTEM SUBSYS ELEMENT TYPE VV.LL DATE TIME COB1 COMPJCL COMPSKEL CONDORRT WRITTEN CNTLI2 1 INTERNAL CONDORRT TABLESI 1. 27JUL 1 16:14 DOWNLD2 DOWNLOAD DOWNMACS D1ASMX D1LNKX D2ASMX D2LNKX FIX FOO FOOTPRNT FOO1 FOO2 FOO3 G1ABEND

If you request a browse (B), Endevor returns a standard ISPF Browse panel for the member (as shown next). Press PF3 when you finish browsing the member, to return to the Member Selection List.

BROWSE -- BST.NDVRC1.JCLLIB(CONDORRT) ----------- LINE COL 1 8 COMMAND ===> SCROLL ===> CSR TOP OF DATA CONSDEF TYPE=START,TABLE=RESOURCE CONSDEF TYPE=RESOURCE,RNAME=CONEX$,SYSDEF=(($,$,AURMDPSZ)) CONSDEF TYPE=RESOURCE,GROUP=GOLS,SYSDEF=((MMS,GOLS$,ARUDP)) CONSDEF TYPE=RESOURCE,RNAME=YGQ$,GROUP=GOLS CONSDEF TYPE=RESOURCE,RNAME=YG$,SYSDEF=(($,$,ARUDP)) CONSDEF TYPE=END,TABLE=RESOURCE BOTTOM OF DATA

6-66 User Guide

6.15 Restore Elements Action

This section describes the Restore elements action.

6.15.1 Before You Begin

Before you use the Restore Elements action for the first time, review the following information: Use--Use the RESTORE action to restore an element from an archive data set back to Endevor. Availability--You can only restore elements in batch. Specification--For the RESTORE syntax, see the SCL Reference Guide.

6.15.2 Restore Processing

The processing sequence for the RESTORE action follows: 1. Determines whether the element is present in the stage indicated. If the element exists in that stage, the RESTORE action fails. 2. Restores the element, if it is not present, to the specified location (environment, stage, system, subsystem, and type). This includes: Restoring all base and delta levels for the element. Copying the element definition to the Master Control File. Restoring component lists, if present. If you use the NEW VERSION option, Endevor assigns the new version number to the restored element. Otherwise, the element retains its version number from the file. 3. Updates the Master Control File. 4. Continues based on the value in the BYPASS GENERATE PROCESSOR field. If the value in this field is Y, Endevor does not generate the element. If the value in this field is N, Endevor: Determines the processor group to use (For more information, see the appendix "Actions and Processor Groups."). It then executes the generate processor in that group if one has been specified. Note: If you are performing multiple element restores, all of the elements will be restored before the generate processors are executed.

Chapter 6. Action Processing 6-67

6.15 Restore Elements Action

Reads the type definition for a source output library specification, then writes a copy of the current level of the element to that library. If EXPAND INCLUDES = Y, Endevor expands INCLUDE statements in the source. After the generate processor has been run for the element, Endevor updates the information in the Master Control File. 5. Updates the Master Control File after the RESTORE action is successfully completed.

6-68 User Guide

6.16 Retrieve Elements Action

This section describes how to retrieve an element from an Endevor location to a user data set.

6.16.1 Before You Begin

Before you use the Retrieve Elements action the first time, review the following information: Use--Use the RETRIEVE action to copy an element from an Endevor location to a user data set. Availability--You can retrieve elements in foreground, batch, and in packages. Specification--Use the Retrieve Elements panel to specify the type of processing you want to perform and any other information related to the request. To submit the request after you have filled in the appropriate information, press Enter. For instructions on accessing this panel in foreground, batch, and when building a package, see the chapter "Foreground and Batch Processing."

6.16.2 Retrieve Elements Panel

The Retrieve Elements panel is shown next.

----------------------------OPTION ===> blank - Element list R - Retrieve element FROM Endevor: ENVIRONMENT SYSTEM SUBSYSTEM ELEMENT TYPE STAGE COMMENT

RETRIEVE ELEMENTS

-------------------------H - History

ELEMENT DISPLAY OPTIONS: S - Summary B - Browse M - Master C - Changes ===> ===> ===> ===> ===>

ACTION OPTIONS: ===> DOC CCID ===> FINANCE EXPAND INCLUDES ===> SIGNOUT ELEMENT ===> OVERRIDE SIGNOUT ===> REPLACE MEMBER ===> D - CSTAGE P - CPROD ===>

N Y N N

(Y/N) (Y/N) (Y/N) (Y/N)

TO ISPF LIBRARY: PROJECT ===> BST LIBRARY ===> C1DEMO TYPE ===> CNTRL MEMBER ===>

LIST OPTIONS: DISPLAY LIST WHERE CCID EQ WHERE PROC GRP EQ BUILD USING MAP FIRST FOUND TO OTHER PARTITIONED OR SEQUENTIAL DATA SET: DATA SET NAME ===>

===> Y (Y/N) ===> ===> ===> N (Y/N) ===> Y (Y/N)

Chapter 6. Action Processing 6-69

6.16 Retrieve Elements Action

6.16.3 Fields
The Retrieve Elements panel fields are described next:

6.16.3.1 Option Field

Use the OPTION field to specify the processing you wish to perform. Use This Option Blank R S M, B, C, H To... Display a selection list. This only applies when DISPLAY LIST = Y. Retrieve an element. Display the Summary of Levels panel. You can use this panel to retrieve a prior level. Display one of the listed element information panels.

6.16.3.2 From Endevor Fields

Use these fields to define the element you want to retrieve. Field Environment System Subsystem Element Description Name of the current environment. The system associated with the element(s) to be retrieved. The subsystem associated with the element(s) to be retrieved. The name of the element(s) you want to retrieve. You can specify: A single element name. You can either leave the MEMBER field blank to use the element name as the member name, or provide a different member name. A name mask. You must leave the MEMBER field blank. Type Stage Name of the type associated with the element(s) to be retrieved. ID of the current stage. Leave this field blank to include both stages of the current environment in a list of elements.

6-70 User Guide

6.16 Retrieve Elements Action

6.16.3.3 Comment Field

Use the COMMENT field to provide a 1- to 40-character comment explaining the action

6.16.3.4 Action Options Fields

Use the ACTION OPTIONS fields to further define your action request. Field CCID Expand Includes Description CCID associated with the request. Tells Endevor whether to expand INCLUDE statements in the retrieved element. Y--Expand INCLUDE statements. N--Default. Do not expand INCLUDE statements. Signout Element Applicable when retrieving an element with signin/signout in effect. Y--Default. Sign out the retrieved element to your user ID. N--Retrieve the element but don't sign it out to your user ID. This option should be used only when you want a copy of the element to review, and not when you intend to make changes to the element. If you select N, Endevor ignores the element's CCID and COMMENT fields. Override Signout Tells Endevor whether to retrieve an element even if it is not signed out to you. Y--Retrieve the element, even if it is not signed out to you. Endevor signs the element out to you if you specify this option. N--Default. Do not retrieve the element if it is not signed out to you.

Chapter 6. Action Processing 6-71

6.16 Retrieve Elements Action

Field Replace Member

Description Applicable if the TO data set is a library. Tells Endevor whether to replace a member with the same name in the TO data set. Y--Retrieve the element, replacing the member with the same name. N--Default. Do not retrieve the element if a member with the same name exists in the to data set.

6.16.3.5 To ISPF Library Fields

Use these fields to specify the data set to which to retrieve the element(s). If the named data set is a library, and you: Provide a single element name in the ELEMENT field and leave the MEMBER field blank, Endevor uses the element name as the member name. Leave the ELEMENT field blank, provide a name mask, or specify a range of elements, you must leave the MEMBER field blank. If you leave the OPTION field blank, Endevor produces the selection list based on the values in the ELEMENT field.

6.16.3.6 To Other Partitioned or Sequential Data Set Field

As an alternative to the TO ISPF LIBRARY fields, enter the data set name, and member if the data set is a library, in 'data set(member name) ' format.

6.16.3.7 List Options Fields

Where Proc Grp Eq

6-72 User Guide

6.16 Retrieve Elements Action

Field Build Using Map

Description Default is N. Type Y in this field if you want Endevor to search the map when building a list of elements for retrieval, starting at the FROM location. Caution! Avoid using BUILD USING MAP = Y in combination with DISPLAY LIST = N.

First Found

Default is Y. Indicates whether the selection list should include only the first occurrence of specified elements found when searching the map.

6.16.4 Element Selection List for the Retrieve Action

The Element Selection List for the Retrieve action is shown next. Endevor supports the Locate command on Element Selection Lists.

RETRIEVE -----------------COMMAND ===> ELEMENT @WRKTYDS AC1PSERV ASMUSERT BAIODSCT BASICDEL BASICDEL BASICGEN BASICGEN BC1DXFPI BC1DXFPR BC1JACCT BC1JANLZ BC1JCMPR BC1JCONV BC1JDB2R BC1JDEFT BC1JELIB BC1JFUP1 NEW NAME

------- ROW 281 OF 2412 SCROLL ===> PAGE SUBSYSTEM INTERNAL INTERNAL INTERNAL INTERNAL INTERNAL INTERNAL INTERNAL INTERNAL INTERNAL INTERNAL INTERNAL INTERNAL INTERNAL INTERNAL INTERNAL INTERNAL INTERNAL INTERNAL VV.LL 1. 1 1. 4 1. 1. 1 1. 1. 1. 1. 1. 1 1. 1 1. 1. 1 1. 1. 2 1. 1. 7 1. 1. 2 RC

TYPE ASMIMAC LNKIRN24 CNTLE COBCOPY ASMIPGMR LNKERENT ASMIPGMR LNKERENT XFPEOBJ XFPEOBJ CNTLE CNTLE CNTLE CNTLE CNTLE CNTLE CNTLE CNTLE

4 4 4 4 12 4 4 4

Note: Element Selection lists are sorted alphabetically by element name, stage, system, subsystem, and type. Whenever possible, you should fully qualify a system when requesting the selection list. If you cannot fully specify a system, be sure to look carefully at the Endevor location (environment/stage) and classification (system/subsystem/type) information associated with a located element to make sure it is the element for which you are looking. Use the NEW NAME field on this list to change the name of an element at the target location of the retrieve. For information about the other fields on this panel, see Element and Member Selection Lists in the chapter Foreground and Batch Processing.

Chapter 6. Action Processing 6-73

6.16 Retrieve Elements Action

6.16.5 Retrieving Prior Versions

The Summary of Levels panel allows you to retrieve prior versions of an element, by specifying an R in the SELECTION field. The Summary of Levels panel appears when you either: Enter S as the option on the Retrieve Elements panel, with the element uniquely qualified. Enter an S next to a particular element on the Retrieve Element Selection List. For a detailed description of this panel, see Summary of Levels Panel in the chapter "Displaying Endevor Information." In this example, Version 01 Level 05 has been selected for retrieval.

RETRIEVE ------------------ SUMMARY OF LEVELS ---------------- ROW 1 OF 2 COMMAND ===> SCROLL ===> PAGE FROM Environment: BST System: NDVR25 Subsystem: INTERNAL Element: C1SD1 Type: ASMIPGMR Stage: D TO Data set: BST.NDVRC1.SRCLIB ------------------------- SOURCE LEVEL INFORMATION ----------------------VV.LL NEWNAME DATE TIME STMTS COMMENT R 1. 5 6SEP 1 1 :58 643 1. 6 6SEP 1 1 :58 659 BOTTOM OF DATA

6.16.6 Impact of Retrieve Action on Signout IDs

When you set SIGNOUT ELEMENT = Y, Endevor signs the element out to you by recording your user ID in the SIGNOUT ID field on the Master Control File for the stage from which the element was retrieved.

6.16.7 Impact of Retrieve Action on CCIDs/Comments

When you set SIGNOUT ELEMENT = Y, Endevor records the CCID and comment you specified in the RETRIEVE CCID and COMMENT fields in the Master Control File. If you specify SIGNOUT ELEMENT = N, Endevor does not update this information.

6.16.8 Retrieve Processing

Retrieving an element copies that element from an inventory location to an external data set. When you retrieve an element, Endevor: 1. Determines whether the element is signed out. If it is signed out to a person other than you, and if you do not specify SIGNOUT ELEMENT = N, you must specify OVERRIDE SIGNOUT = Y in order to retrieve the element. Remember: You must be authorized in order to use the override signout option.

6-74 User Guide

6.16 Retrieve Elements Action

2. Searches for the specified element, in the following order: At the location specified in the RETRIEVE action. In each stage in the environments on the map route.

If Endevor finds the element at a subsequent stage that is not part of the map it issues a warning message.

Note: If you do not know the exact location of the element you wish to retrieve, specify the lowest stage in the map route. This allows Endevor to search the entire map route for the element. 3. Copies the current level of the element to the output data set. If you specify EXPAND INCLUDES = Y, the system expands any INCLUDE statements when it copies the source. Note the following, if the output data set is a library: If the member currently exists in the library, you must specify REPLACE MEMBER = Y in order to perform the RETRIEVE action. Otherwise, Endevor rejects the request. By default, the member name assigned will be the same as the element name entered. You can, however, designate a different member name to be used. In this situation, Endevor assigns the new name to the retrieved element in the user library. 4. If you specified SIGNOUT ELEMENT = Y, Endevor updates the Master Control File and signs the element out to you. If you specified SIGNOUT ELEMENT = N, Endevor stops processing the action after it creates the copy in Step 3. For additional details about the RETRIEVE action, see the SCL Reference Guide.

Chapter 6. Action Processing 6-75

6.17 Signin Elements Action

This section desribes the SIGIN action.

6.17.1 Before You Begin

Before you use the Signin action the first time, review the following information: Use--Use the SIGNIN action to remove the signout user ID associated with an element. SIGNIN is only available for systems where signin/signout is in effect. Availability--You can sign in elements in foreground, in batch, and in a package. Specification--Use the Signin Elements panel to specify the type of processing you want to perform and any other information related to the request. To submit the request after you have filled in the appropriate information, press Enter. For instructions on accessing this panel in foreground, batch, and when building a package, see the chapter "Foreground and Batch Processing."

6.17.2 Signin Elements Panel

The Signin Elements panel is shown next.

-----------------------------OPTION ===> blank - Element list SI - Sign-in element FROM Endevor: ENVIRONMENT SYSTEM SUBSYSTEM ELEMENT TYPE STAGE ===> DOC ===> FINANCE ===> ===> ===> ===>

SIGNIN ELEMENTS

--------------------------H - History

ELEMENT DISPLAY OPTIONS: S - Summary B - Browse M - Master C - Changes

ACTION OPTIONS: OVERRIDE SIGNOUT ===> N (Y/N) SIGNOUT TO ===>

A - TEST

B - PROD

LIST OPTIONS: DISPLAY LIST WHERE CCID EQ WHERE PROC GRP EQ WHERE USER EQ BUILD USING MAP

===> Y (Y/N) ===> ===> ===> ===> N (Y/N)

6-76 User Guide

6.17 Signin Elements Action

6.17.3 Fields
The Signin Elements panel fields are described next.

6.17.3.1 Option Field

Use the OPTION field to specify the processing you wish to perform. Use this option Blank SI S, M, B, C, H To... Display a selection list. This only applies when DISPLAY LIST = Y. Sign in the element. Display one of the listed element information panels.

6.17.3.2 From Endevor Fields

Use these fields to define the element you want to sign in or display. Field Environment System Subsystem Element Type Stage Description Name of the current environment. The system associated with the element(s) to be signed in. The subsystem associated with the element(s) to be signed in. Element(s) you want to sign in. Name of the type associated with the element(s) to be signed in. ID of the current stage.

Chapter 6. Action Processing 6-77

6.17 Signin Elements Action

6.17.3.3 Action Options

These fields allow you to define your action request Field Override Signout Description Acceptable values are: Y--Sign in the element even if it is not currently signed out to you. Proper authority is required to specify Y. N--Default. Do not allow the SIGNIN action unless the element is already signed out to you. Signout To Sign out the element to another user after signing it in.

6.17.3.4 List Options

Use these fields to limit the elements shown in the Element Selection List. Field Display List Where CCID Eq Description Indicates choice to use list panels for this action: Y (yes) or N (no). The default is Y. Use a CCID to limit the list to those elements whose last level, action or generate CCID is equal to the specified CCID. Use a processor group name to limit the list to those elements to which the group is assigned. Use a signout user ID to limit the list to those elements whose user ID is equal to the specified signout user ID. Valid in foreground only. Type Y (yes) in this field if you want Endevor to search the map, starting at the FROM location, when building a selection list for signin. Caution! Avoid using BUILD USING MAP = Y in combination with DISPLAY LIST = N.

Where Proc Grp Eq Where User Eq

Build Using Map

6-78 User Guide

6.17 Signin Elements Action

6.17.4 Impact of Signin on Signout IDs

You cannot sign in an element unless it is already signed out to you, unless you specify OVERRIDE SIGNOUT = Y. When you specify a SIGNIN action, Endevor clears the SIGNOUT ID field at the stage at which the signin is being performed, unless you also specify a user ID in the SIGNOUT TO field. If you specify a user ID in the SIGNOUT TO field, Endevor sets the SIGNOUT ID at the stage at which the action is being performed to the user ID specified in the action.

6.17.5 Impact of Signin on CCIDs

A SIGNIN action against an Endevor element clears the retrieve CCID/comment for that element.

6.17.6 Signin Processing

The SIGNIN action "removes" the user signout associated with a particular element. The processing sequence for SIGNIN is described next. For more information, see the SCL Reference Guide. 1. Endevor first determines whether the element is currently signed out. If the element has been signed out to a person other than you, you must specify OVERRIDE SIGNOUT = Y in order to perform the SIGNIN action. Remember: You must be authorized to use this option. After you sign in an element you can assign that element to another user with the SIGNOUT TO option. 2. Endevor then updates the Master Control File for the element, removing the current signout (that is, the user ID associated with the last RETRIEVE action).

Chapter 6. Action Processing 6-79

6.18 Transfer Elements Action

This section describes how to use Transfer action for moving elements from one location to another location that is not on the same map route.

6.18.1 Before You Begin

Before you use the Transfer action the first time, review the following information: Use--You can use TRANSFER action to move elements from: Endevor to Endevor. Endevor to an Endevor archive data set. An Endevor archive data set to Endevor. Availability--You can transfer elements only in batch and in packages. Specification--Use the Transfer Elements panel to specify the type of processing you want to perform and any other information related to the request. To submit the request after you have filled in the appropriate information, press Enter. For instructions on accessing this panel in foreground, batch, and for inclusion in a package, see the chapter "Foreground and Batch Processing." Note: To transfer to or from an archive data set, first specify the TRANSFER request, then edit the resulting request data set. For instructions on editing request data sets, see the chapter "Foreground and Batch Processing." For the TRANSFER action syntax, see the SCL Reference Guide.

6-80 User Guide

6.18 Transfer Elements Action

6.18.2 Transfer Elements Panel

The Transfer Elements panel is shown next.

----------------------------OPTION ===> blank - Element list T - Transfer element FROM Endevor: ENVIRONMENT ===> SYSTEM ===> SUBSYSTEM ===> ELEMENT ===> TYPE ===> STAGE ===> D-CSTAGE TO Endevor: ENVIRONMENT SYSTEM SUBSYSTEM ELEMENT TYPE STAGE COMMENT ===> ===> ===> ===> ===> ===> ===>

TRANSFER ELEMENTS

--------------------------

ELEMENT DISPLAY OPTIONS: S - Summary B - Browse H - History M - Master C - Changes LIST OPTIONS: DISPLAY LIST ===> Y (Y/N) WHERE CCID EQ ===> WHERE PROC GRP EQ ===> BUILD USING MAP ===> N (Y/N) P-CPROD ACTION OPTIONS: CCID DELETE FROM ELM GENERATE ELEMENT OVERRIDE SIGNOUT PROCESSOR GROUP SYNC WITH HISTORY RETAIN SIGNOUT SIGNOUT TO ===> ===> ===> ===> ===> ===> ===> ===> ===>

Y Y N N N N

(Y/N) (Y/N) (Y/N) (Y/N) (Y/N) (Y/N)

6.18.3 Fields
The Transfer Elements panel fields are described next:

6.18.3.1 Option Field

Use this field to specify the processing you want to perform. Use This Option Blank T S, M, B, C, H To... Display a selection list. This only applies when DISPLAY LIST = Y. Generate an action request to transfer the element from the FROM location to the TO location. Display one of the listed information panels.

Chapter 6. Action Processing 6-81

6.18 Transfer Elements Action

6.18.3.2 From Endevor Fields

Use these fields to define the starting location for the transfer, and the element(s) to be transferred. Field Environment System Subsystem Element Type Stage Description Name of the current environment. System associated with the element(s) to be transferred. Subsystem associated with the element(s) to be transferred. Element(s) you want to transfer. Type associated with the element(s) to be transferred. ID of the current stage.

6.18.3.3 To Endevor Fields

These fields allow you to define the target location for the transfer. You cannot use name masks with TO fields. The descriptions of the TO Endevor fields are the same as those of the FROM Endevor fields. If you do not enter information in these fields, Endevor uses the default values in the FROM Endevor fields. For more information on specifying a mask character, see Name Masking in the chapter Endevor Basics.

6.18.3.4 Comment Field

A 1- to 40-character comment describing the TRANSFER request.

6.18.3.5 List Options

Use these fields to limit the elements shown in the Element Selection List. Field Display List Where CCID Eq Where Proc Grp Eq Description Indicates choice to use list panels for this action: Y (yes) or N (no). The default is Y. Limits the list to elements whose last level, action or generate CCID is equal to the specified CCID. Limit the list to those elements to which the named group is assigned.

6-82 User Guide

6.18 Transfer Elements Action

Field Build Using Map

Description Type Y (yes) in this field if you want Endevor to search the map, beginning at the FROM location, when building a list of elements to be transferred. Caution! Avoid using BUILD USING MAP = Y in combination with DISPLAY LIST = N.

6.18.3.6 Action Options

Use these fields to specify information related to the action request. Field CCID Delete From Element Description CCID associated with the transfer. Tells Endevor whether to delete the element in the source location after transferring it. Y--Default. Delete the element at the source location. N--Do not delete the element. Caution! If you specify option N to leave the element at the source location, then you must specify SYNC = Y for any subsequent transfers of this element. Generate Element Tells Endevor whether to generate the element after transferring it. Y--Default. Generate the element. N--Do not generate the element. Override Signout Tells Endevor whether to transfer the element(s) even if it is not signed out to you. Y--Transfer the element, even if it is not signed out to you. Endevor signs the element out to you if you specify this option. N--Default. Do not transfer the element if it is not signed out to you. Note: Applies only if DELETE FROM ELEMENT = Y.

Chapter 6. Action Processing 6-83

6.18 Transfer Elements Action

Field Processor Group

Description The name of the processor group to be associated with the element. You can type a processor group name in this field or use a name mask to access a list of processor groups from which you can select. For more information on specifying a mask character, see Name Masking in the chapter Endevor Basics. If you do not provide a processor group name, Endevor selects a processor group.

Sync

Indicates whether you want the TRANSFER action performed when the base level of the element at the source location is different from the current level of the element at the target: Y (yes) or N (no). The default is N. The transfer fails if these levels are different and you have specified SYNC = N. You must specify SYNC = Y when moving an element that has remained at a source location after being transferred using DELETE FROM ELEMENT = N.

With History

Indicates whether you want to transfer the element with history. Default is N, transfer the element without history. When you transfer the element without history Endevor searches through the element levels at the source location to find a matching level at the target location. Endevor then compares the two and creates a new level at the target location that reflects the differences.

Retain signout

Determines whether Endevor retains the signout associated with an element at the source location when it is transferred to the target location. Acceptable values are: Y--Retain the source location signout at the target location. N--Default. Do not retain the source location signout at the target location.

Signout to

Type the TSO user ID of the person to whom you want to sign out the element in this field. If RETAIN SIGNOUT = Y, you cannot use this option.

6-84 User Guide

6.18 Transfer Elements Action

6.18.4 Element Selection List for the Transfer Panel

Endevor supports the ISPF Locate command on Element Selection Lists. Note: Element Selection lists are sorted alphabetically by element name, in map-sequence order. Whenever possible, you should fully qualify a system when requesting the selection list. If you cannot fully specify a system, carefully examine the Endevor location (environment/stage) and classification (system/subsystem/type) information associated with a located element to make sure it is the element you want.

TRANSFER ----------------- ELEMENT SELECTION COMMAND ===> ELEMENT TO NAME TYPE ENVIRON S @WRKTYDS ASMIMAC BST P AC1PSERV LNKIRN24 BST P ASMUSERT CNTLE BST P BAIODSCT COBCOPY BST P BASICDEL ASMIPGMR BST P BASICDEL LNKERENT BST P BASICGEN ASMIPGMR BST P BASICGEN LNKERENT BST P BC1DXFPI XFPEOBJ BST P BC1DXFPR XFPEOBJ BST P BC1JACCT CNTLE BST P BC1JANLZ CNTLE BST P BC1JCMPR CNTLE BST P BC1JCONV CNTLE BST P BC1JDB2R CNTLE BST P BC1JDEFT CNTLE BST P BC1JELIB CNTLE BST P BC1JFUP1 CNTLE BST P

LIST SYSTEM NDVR25 NDVR25 NDVR25 NDVR25 NDVR25 NDVR25 NDVR25 NDVR25 NDVR25 NDVR25 NDVR25 NDVR25 NDVR25 NDVR25 NDVR25 NDVR25 NDVR25 NDVR25

-------

ROW 281 OF 2412 SCROLL ===> PAGE SUBSYSTEM VV.LL RC INTERNAL 1. 1 INTERNAL 1. 4 INTERNAL 1. INTERNAL 1. 1 INTERNAL 1. 4 INTERNAL 1. 4 INTERNAL 1. 4 INTERNAL 1. 4 INTERNAL 1. 1 12 INTERNAL 1. 1 INTERNAL 1. 4 INTERNAL 1. 1 INTERNAL 1. 4 INTERNAL 1. 2 INTERNAL 1. 4 INTERNAL 1. 7 INTERNAL 1. INTERNAL 1. 2

Use the TO NAME field on this list to change the name of an element at the target location of the transfer. For information about the other fields on this panel, see the section, Element and Member Selection Lists, in the chapter "Foreground and Batch Processing." Note: If you are invoking the move processor for TRANSFER actions, you cannot rename elements at the target location of the transfer.

Chapter 6. Action Processing 6-85

6.18 Transfer Elements Action

6.18.5 Impact of Transfers on CCIDs and Comments

When you specify a CCID and/or comment in a TRANSFER action, Endevor updates CCID and/or COMMENT fields differently depending on whether you specify the Transfer request without history, with history, or with synchronization. Action Current Source CCID/ Comment Set from previous stage value Set from previous stage value Set from previous stage value Generate CCID/ Comment Set if generated Last Action CCID/ Comment Set Retrieve CCID/ Comment Clear Source Delta CCID/ Comment Set from last delta value previous stage Carried with delta levels Set from base value Component Delta CCID/ Comment Set if generated

Transfer -Without History

Transfer -With History Transfer -With SYNC

Set if generated

Set

Clear

Set if generated

Set

Clear

Set if generated

If you select GENERATE ELEMENT = N (no), the TRANSFER action does not set the generate or component list delta CCID and/or COMMENT fields.

6.18.6 Transfers Using a Move Processor

By default, the TRANSFER action executes a generate processor at the target location. This means that it does not transfer component list information. To transfer component list information along with the element, you can transfer elements using a move processor. If you want to do this, make sure to specify M in the PROCESSOR TO USE FOR THE TRANSFER ACTION field on the definition panel for the appropriate processor group.

6-86 User Guide

6.18 Transfer Elements Action

6.18.7 Transfers Using Delete from Element Option

When you transfer an element with DELETE FROM ELEMENT = N, Endevor leaves a copy of the element at the source location of the transfer. Consider using this option only when you do not plan to transfer the element from the source location. If you do transfer the element that remains at the source location, the transfer fails unless you specify SYNC = Y.

6.18.8 Transfer Processing

You can transfer elements from: One Endevor location to another Endevor location, specifically: From one map route to another.

From a location in a map to a stage in a map environment, but not on the map route.

Use the MOVE action to move elements through the software life cycle. Use TRANSFER to move elements when the move is not associated with the software life cycle. Endevor to an archive data set or unload tape. This is available only in batch. When you transfer elements to an archive data set, you can execute COPY, LIST, and RESTORE actions against that data set. An archive data set or unload tape to Endevor. This is available only in batch.

Chapter 6. Action Processing 6-87

6.18 Transfer Elements Action

When Endevor transfers elements, it: Deletes the elements in the origin location. You can preserve the element by selecting DELETE FROM ELEMENT = N. Signs the elements in at the target location. You can request that the elements either retain the same signout status (RETAIN SIGNOUT = Y), or change the signout status (SET SIGNOUT TO option). Generates the elements at the target location. You can override this step by selecting GENERATE ELEMENT = N. For additional information, see the SCL Reference Guide.

6.18.9 Transferring from Endevor to Endevor

Before transferring elements from one Endevor location to another, Endevor does the following: Checks signout status. If you plan to: Delete the element at the source location after the transfer (DELETE FROM ELEMENT = Y), Endevor checks signout status at both the source and the target of the transfer. If the element is not signed out to you at both locations, you must specify OVERRIDE SIGNOUT = Y. Leave the element(s) at the source location after the transfer (DELETE FROM ELEMENT = N), Endevor checks signout status only at the target of the transfer. If the element(s) are not signed out to you at the target, you must specify OVERRIDE SIGNOUT = Y. Makes sure that the most recent processor executed against the element(s) ran successfully. You can override this check by specifying IGNORE GENERATE FAILED = Y. When transferring an element, Endevor performs as many of the following processes as appropriate: 1. Source management. This includes the actual transfer of the element and MCF updates. 2. Processor management. This includes executing the generate processor at the target or the move processor at the source (based on the processor group setting at the source location), writing to a source output library and to the appropriate processor output libraries. 3. Delete processing. This involves executing the delete processor and deleting the element at the source location of the Transfer. You can transfer elements with or without history.

6-88 User Guide

6.18 Transfer Elements Action

6.18.10 Transferring with History

To transfer with history, specify WITH HISTORY = Y on the TRANSFER request. Endevor then: 1. Checks the following and issues messages as necessary: Does the element exist at the source location? Does the element exist at the target location? Is source and processor management necessary? 2. Performs source management by transferring the element. The processing that Endevor performs depends on whether the element exists at the TO location. a. If the element does not exist at the target, Endevor searches the map for subsequent occurrences of the element. If it finds the element farther along the map, it compares the levels of the element to be transferred with the current level of the found element. If the two are in sync, Endevor copies back (or fetches) the current level of the element from up the map to the target location. If the two are not in sync, Endevor issues a warning message and does not perform the copy. If Endevor finds the element at a stage not included in the map, it issues a warning message, then continues to search for the element in a stage that is included in the map b. If the element exists at the target location, Endevor performs level-matching. During level-matching, Endevor determines the sync point of the source and target elements by comparing the level time stamp of the base level of the source element with the current level of the target element. If the two time stamps do not match, Endevor checks the next oldest level of the source element, and so on. If the sync point is found, Endevor transfers the element from the FROM location to the TO location, appending all levels following the sync point of the element in the FROM location to the element in the TO location.

Chapter 6. Action Processing 6-89

6.18 Transfer Elements Action

If the two levels are different, and SYNCHRONIZE =Y, Endevor first creates a sync level at the target reflecting the differences between the base level of the FROM element and the target, then transfers the element to the TO location and appends the FROM location delta levels to the target.

c. If the element does not exist at the target, Endevor transfers the element from the source to the target location with all delta levels intact.

3. Completes source management after the element base and change levels have been transferred by updating the Master Control File (MCF) to reflect the transfer. Note that the value specified for Signout Upon Fetch (the SOFETCH parameter) in the Endevor Defaults Table will effect how the MCF will be updated for the element copied back (fetched). If Signout Upon Fetch is in effect, the element will be signed out to you unless it is already signed out to someone else. If Signout Upon Fetch is not in effect, the element will not be signed out to you. For more information about Signout Upon Fetch (the SOFETCH parameter), see The TYPE=MAIN Macro in the chapter The Defaults Table in the Administrator Guide. 4. Performs processor management based on the value in the GENERATE ELEMENT field. If the value in this field is N, Endevor does not generate the element. If the value in this field is Y, Endevor: a. Reads the type definition for a source output library specification, then writes a copy of the current level of the element to that library. If EXPAND INCLUDES = Y, Endevor expands INCLUDE statements in the source.

6-90 User Guide

6.18 Transfer Elements Action

b. Determines the processor group to use (For more information, see the appendix "Actions and Processor Groups"). Endevor then executes the generate processor in that group if one has been specified. After the generate processor has been run for the element, Endevor updates processor information in the Master Control File. 5. Finally, Endevor performs standard delete processing for the element in the FROM location, unless you specify DELETE FROM ELEMENT = N and/or BYPASS DELETE PROCESSOR = Y.

6.18.11 Transferring Without History

To transfer without history, specify WITH HISTORY = N on the TRANSFER request. Endevor executes the request and attempts to find a sync level between the source and target elements beginning with the first level at the source and working forward through the deltas. If Endevor finds a sync level it compares the two and creates a new level at the target that reflects the differences. If Endevor cannot find a sync level and you specify SYNC = N, Endevor issues a message indicating that the elements are "out of sync" and the TRANSFER action terminates. If Endevor cannot find a sync level and you specify SYNC = Y, Endevor issues a message indicating that the elements are "out of sync" then compares the last level of the source and last level of the target and creates a new level at the target that reflects the differences. For TRANSFER action batch syntax, see the SCL Reference Guide.

6.18.12 Restarting Transfers

If a TRANSFER action fails, first respond to the error condition, then resubmit the TRANSFER request. When you restart a TRANSFER action: After a source management failure, Endevor performs source management, processor management, and delete processing. After a processor management failure, Endevor bypasses source management, and performs just processor management and delete processing. After a delete failure, Endevor bypasses source management and processor management, and performs just delete processing.

Chapter 6. Action Processing 6-91

6.18 Transfer Elements Action

6.18.13 Archive Data Set or Unload Tape to Endevor

For the steps that Endevor executes when transferring elements from an archive data set to Endevor, see Transferring from Endevor to Endevor in this chapter. This type of TRANSFER request is not available directly through a foreground or batch panel. For additional information, see the SCL Reference Guide.

6.18.14 Endevor to Archive Data Set or Unload Tape

The processing flow for this action is described next: 1. Endevor again must ensure that the specified element can be transferred: If DELETE FROM ELEMENT = Y, Endevor determines whether the element has been signed out. If the element has been signed out to a person other than you, you must specify OVERRIDE SIGNOUT = Y in order to perform this action. Remember: You must be authorized to use the override signout option. Endevor then checks the *FAILED* flag. If this flag has been set, you must specify IGNORE GENERATE FAILED = Y in order to proceed. 2. Once it has been determined that the element can be transferred to the archive data set or unload tape, Endevor writes out the following to that file: The element definition. The Endevor base and change levels associated with that element. The Component List associated with that element (applicable only if you are using the Endevor ACM product). It is not necessary to determine whether the element currently exists in the archive data set or unload tape; the previous information is transferred even if the element does exist in the TO location. 3. Endevor then performs standard delete processing for the element, unless you specify DELETE FROM ELEMENT = N and/or BYPASS DELETE PROCESSOR = Y. For more information, see Delete Action in this chapter.

6-92 User Guide

6.19 Update Elements Action

This section describes how to update an element.

6.19.1 Before You Begin

Before you use the UPDATE action for the first time, review the following information: Use--The UPDATE action allows you to add a member to Endevor when an element with the same name is in the target entry stage. Availability--You can update elements in foreground, batch and in packages. Specification--Use the Add/Update panel to specify the type of processing you want to perform and any other information related to the request. To submit the request after you have filled in the appropriate information, press Enter.

6.19.2 Update Element Processing

When you update an element, Endevor: 1. Makes sure that the element currently exists in the entry stage. If the element does not exist in the entry stage, the update fails. 2. Determines whether the element is signed out to you. If the element is signed out to a person other than you, you must specify OVERRIDE SIGNOUT = Y in order to update the element. Note: If the element is in the entry stage, but is identical to the update source element, you receive a warning message indicating "NO CHANGES," and no level is created. 1. Stores update changes in the delta library as a new level. 2. Continues based on the value in the GENERATE ELEMENT field. If the value in this field is N, Endevor does not generate the element. If the value in this field is Y, Endevor: Reads the type definition for a Source Output Library specification, then writes a copy of the current level of the element to that library. If EXPAND INCLUDES = Y, Endevor expands INCLUDE statements in the source. Determines the processor group to use (For more information, see the appendix "Actions and Processor Groups"). Endevor then executes the generate processor in that group (if one has been specified). After the generate processor has been run for the element, Endevor updates the information in the Master Control File.

Chapter 6. Action Processing 6-93

6.19 Update Elements Action

3. Updates the Master Control File after the element is successfully updated. If you have specified DELETE INPUT SOURCE = Y, Endevor deletes the member indicated in the FROM library.

6.19.3 Trailing Blanks in Input Files

This section discusses how trailing blanks were treated when Endevor compares an input file against the source for an existing element that is to be updated. Trailing blanks are ignored for compare purposes, if the base file is fixed format, but the input file is variable. Variable includes not only MVS RECFM=V or VB files, but also HFS files and files sent from AllFusion CM Enterprise Workbench. Trailing blanks are blanks that occur in a data record after the last non-blank character. For example, assume you have a small file that looks like this: '123 '456 'X ' ' '

In the previous case, there are trailing blanks in each record. Generally you are most likely to see trailing blanks on text records where the record size is fixed. Trailing blanks affect the compare logic performed by Endevor UPDATE ELEMENT logic when it compares an input file to the existing element source. Examples: Assume you have a one-record element whose base file is fixed record format with a record length of 80, and the element data is a single record containing 'ABC' followed by 73 trailing blanks. You then try to update this element with an input file whose record length is 3 and whose contents are 'ABC'. In this case, Endevor does not consider that the file has changed and does not create a new delta level. Assume the Endevor element exists on a base file whose record format is variable. The element record is 'ABC '. (There is one trailing blank.) You attempt to update this record with an input file whose record is 'ABC '. (There are two trailing blanks). In this case, Endevor considers that the element has changed and creates a new delta level.

6-94 User Guide

Appendix A. Actions and Processor Groups

This appendix describes how various Endevor actions, such as Add and Delete impact the processor groups associated with Endevor elements.

Appendix A. Actions and Processor Groups A-1

A.1 Processor Group Behavior: An Overview

Processor groups are associated with elements through the element type. As Endevor actions are executed, the processor group associated with an element may change. There are many variants (for example, element location, mapping, processor group overrides) involved in selecting elements and executing actions against them. A change in one variant can change the processor group from which a processor is run, providing unexpected results when the action is executed.

A.1.1 How to Avoid Surprise and Confusion

This appendix provides tables for each action, showing the impact of actions upon processor group selection. Each table shows various sets of conditions and the expected results specific to each set of conditions. An example follows the tables, to further clarify the information presented. Use these tables as a guideline to determine whether the appropriate (or expected) processor group name and definition have been associated with the element(s) you are working with. The tables indicate which processor was executed, from which processor group name and definition, and the processor group name assigned after the action is complete. Compare the table information to your results when the action has executed. Be Aware: The sets of conditions presented for each action reflect common situations. Not every situation is noted, however. If you find results that differ from those in the tables, check your criteria to be sure that the conditions for the action do match. If the conditions differ, the expected results may not occur. If, however, you execute an action with conditions that do match the criteria in the tables but produce different results, call Endevor Customer Support for further information.

A.1.2 How the Tables Are Set Up

The following actions impact the processor group selected: Add Add/Update Delete Update Generate Generate with Copyback

A-2 User Guide

A.1 Processor Group Behavior: An Overview

Restore Move using the move processor Move using the generate processor Transfer using the move processor Transfer using the generate processor Tables are provided for each of these actions. The first table displays the condition(s) under which you execute the action. The second table displays the results of executing the action; that is, which processor, from which processor group, is executed as a result of the specific conditions. The table content and variables used within the table are defined in the next sections.

A.1.3 Table Contents

Entries in the second ("Given these conditions...") column are defined as follows: Entry Element exists at target Definition Indicates whether the element you are working with exists at the target location: Y or N. Indicates whether the element you are working with exists up the map: Y or N. Indicates whether you have manually overridden the processor group name at this time, for this element, for this action: Y or N. Indicates whether the system administrator has defined a different processor group for this element at the next map location: Y or N. Indicates whether the processor group at the target location is changing: Y or N. A change can occur only if the processor group has been overridden or mapped and the element exists at the target.

Element exists up map

Proc Grp override (client)

Proc Grp mapped (system-defined)

Proc Grp change

Appendix A. Actions and Processor Groups A-3

A.1 Processor Group Behavior: An Overview

Entries in the third ("This Processor Is Executed") column are defined as follows: Entry Target (T)/Source (S)--Processor Type Definition Indicates the type of processor executed as a result of the action--Generate, Move, or Delete processor--and whether the processor was at the target location (T) or the source location (S). The variable format in the table is as follows: (S/T)-processor type Proc Grp Name taken from... Indicates from where Endevor took the processor group name for this action (for example, from the source element or the target element). Indicates from where Endevor took the processor group definition for this action (for example, target or source). Indicates from where Endevor took the processor group name that is assigned to the element when the action has completed (for example, fetched element, target element).

Proc Grp Def taken from...

Label given when action complete

A.1.4 Variables
Variables are used in the tables to indicate from where information is taken. These variables are defined as follows: Variable PG chg Definition Indicates that the processor group has changed, per the conditions for the action (override or mapping). Element copied back to the TO location for Add and Transfer actions, and to the FROM location of a Generate with Copyback action.

Fetched element

A-4 User Guide

A.1 Processor Group Behavior: An Overview

Variable Target default Override

Definition Default processor group name for the type at the target location. Processor group specified using the PROCESSOR GROUP OVERRIDE option. Processor group overrides are done explicitly by the client, on an action-by-action basis. Element at the target, or TO, location of the action. Or, the element that is being updated, generated (without copyback), or deleted. Element at the source, or FROM location of the action. The processor group specified through the NEXT PROCESSOR GROUP option, which indicates the name of the processor group at the next map location. NEXT PROCESSOR GROUP is assigned by the system administrator and cannot be changed by the user for a specific action. If no processor group is assigned up the map, Endevor uses the source element processor group.

Target element (Target)

Source element (Source) Map

A.1.5 Rules
The following rules apply when using processor groups: A processor group change may occur only when the element exists at the target location. You cannot override a processor group on a Move action. For Move and Transfer actions, the source processor group always determines the type of processor (generate or move) to be executed.

A.1.6 Example Criteria

One or more examples is provided for each action. The criteria used in the examples is given next: Environment 1 Stage 1 Type Processor Group Name COBOL LOPGA Environment 1 Stage 2 COBOL LOPGA Environment 2 Stage 3 COBOL LOPGA Environment 2 Stage 4 COBOL LOPGA

Appendix A. Actions and Processor Groups A-5

A.1 Processor Group Behavior: An Overview

Environment 1 Stage 1 Generate Processor Delete Processor Move Processor Processor Group Name Generate Processor Delete Processor Move Processor Processor Group Name Generate Processor Delete Processor Move Processor SIMPLGA SIMPLDA SIMPLMA LOPGB

Environment 1 Stage 2 SIMPLGA SIMPLDA SIMPLMA LOPGB

Environment 2 Stage 3 SIMPLGA SIMPLDA SIMPLMA LOPGB

Environment 2 Stage 4 SIMPLGA SIMPLDA SIMPLMA LOPGB

SIMPLGB SIMPLDB SIMPLMB LOPGC

SIMPLGC SIMPLDC SIMPLMC

The examples pertain to selected cases in the table. Note that examples are not provided for every case. The examples should serve as a guideline to help you determine the processor executed and the label assigned.

A-6 User Guide

A.2 Add Action and Processor Groups

This section describes how Add action impacts the processor group selected.

A.2.1 Impact
Case 1 Given these conditions Element exists up map: Yes Process Group override (client): No This Processor is executed Target (T)/Source (S) Processor type: T-Generate Processor Group name taken from: fetched element Processor Group taken from: target Label given when action is complete: fetched element 2 Element exists up map: No Processor Group override (client): No Target (T)/Source (S) Processor type: T-Generate Processor Group name taken from: target default Processor Group Defintition taken from: target Label given when action complete: target default 3 Element exists up map: Yes Processor Group override (client): Yes Target (T)/Source (S) Processor Type: T-Generate Processor Group name taken from: override Processor Group Defintion taken from: target Label given when action complete: override 4 Element exists up map: No Processor Group override (client): Yes Target (T)/Source (S) Processor Type: T-Generate Processor Group Name taken from: override Processor Group Definition taken from: target Label given when action complete: override

Appendix A. Actions and Processor Groups A-7

A.2 Add Action and Processor Groups

A.2.2 Example: Case 1

Scenario: You are adding element FINAPP01 to type Cobol. The element exists up the map, at Stage 3, labeled with processor group LOPGC. You do not provide a processor group override for the action. Processor executed: SIMPLGC, from processor group LOPGC of Stage 1 Label Assigned: LOPGC

A-8 User Guide

A.3 Add/Update Actions and Processor Groups

This section describes how Add/Update actions impact the processor group selected.

A.3.1 Impact
Case 1 Given these conditions Element exists at target: Yes Element exists up map: Yes Processor Group override (client): No This Processor is executed Target (T)/Source (S) Processor type: T-Generate Processor Group name taken from: target element Processor Group Definition taken from: target Label given when action is complete: target element 2 Element exists at target: Yes Element exists up map: No Processor Group override (client): No Target (T)/Source (S) Processor type: T-Generate Processor Group name taken from: target element Processor Group Definition taken from: target Label given when action is complete: target element 3 Element exists at target: Yes Element exists up map: Yes Processor Group override (client): Yes Processor Group change: Yes Target (T)/Source (S) Processor type: T-Delete (PG chg) T-Generate Processor Group name taken from: target element override Processor Group Definition taken from: target target Label given when action is complete: override

Appendix A. Actions and Processor Groups A-9

A.3 Add/Update Actions and Processor Groups

Case 4

Given these conditions Element exists at target: Yes Element exists up map: No Processor Group override (client): Yes Processor Group change: Yes

This Processor is executed Target (T)/Source (S) Processor type: T-Delete (PG chg) T-Generate Processor Group name taken from: target element Processor Group Definition taken from: target target Label given when action is complete: override

A.3.2 Example: Case 1

Scenario: You are adding element FINAPP01 to type Cobol. The element exists at the target and up the map, at Stage 4, labeled with processor group LOPGB. You do not provide a processor group override for the action. Processor executed: SIMPLGB from Stage 1 Label Assigned: LOPGB

A.3.3 Example: Case 3

Scenario: You are adding element FINAPP01 to type Cobol. The element exists at the target and up the map, labeled with processor group LOPGB. You provide a processor group override, LOPGA, which causes the processor group name to change. Two processors are executed. 1st Processor executed: SIMPLDB from Stage 1 2nd Processor executed: SIMPLGA from Stage 1 Label Assigned: LOPGA

A-10 User Guide

A.4 Delete Action and Processor Groups

This section describes how Delete action impacts the processor group selected.

A.4.1 Impact
Case 1 Given these conditions Element exists at target: Yes This Pocessor is executed Target (T)/Source (S) Processor Type: T-Delete Processor Group name taken from: target element Processor Group Definition taken from: target Label given when action is complete: target element

A.4.2 Example: Case 1

Scenario: You are deleting element FINAPP02 from Stage 2. The element exists at the target only, and is labeled with processor group LOPGB. Processor executed: SIMPLDB from Stage 2 Label Assigned: None, the element is deleted.

Appendix A. Actions and Processor Groups A-11

A.5 Generate Action and Processor Groups

This section describes how Generate action impacts the processor group selected.

A.5.1 Impact
Case 1 Given these conditions Element exists at target: Yes Element exists up map: Yes Processor Group override (client): No This Processor is executed Target (T)/Source (S) Processor type: T-Generate Processor Group name taken from: target element Processor Group taken from: target Label given when action is complete: target element 2 Element exists at target: Yes Element exists up map: No Processor Group override (client): No Target (T)/Source (S) Processor type: T-Generate Processor Group Name taken from: target element Processor Group Definition taken from: target Label given when action is complete: target element 3 Element exists at target: Yes Element exists up map: Yes Processor Group override (client): Yes Processor Group change: Yes Target (T)/Source (S) Processor type: T-Delete (PG chg) T-Generate Processor Group name taken from: target element override Processor Group Definition taken from: target target Label given when action is complete: override

A-12 User Guide

A.5 Generate Action and Processor Groups

Case 4

Given these conditions Element exists at target: Yes Element exists up map: No Processor Group override (client): Yes Processor Group change: Yes

This Processor is executed Target (T)/Source (S) Processor type: T-Delete (PG chg) T-Generate Processor Group Name taken from: target element override Processor Group Definition taken from: target target Label given when action is complete: override

A.5.2 Example: Case 1

Scenario: You are generating element FINAPP01 at Stage 2 where it is labled with processor group LOPGB. You do not povide a processor group override for the action. Processor executed: SIMPLGB from Stage 2 Label Assigned: LOPGB

A.5.3 Example: Case 4

Scenario: You are generating element FINAPP01 at Stage 2 where it is labeled with processor group LOPGB. You provide a processor group override for the action, LOPGC, which causes the processor group name to change. Two processors are executed. 1st Processor executed: SIMPLDB from Stage 2. 2nd Processor executed: SIMPLGC from Stage 2. Label Assigned: LOPGC

Appendix A. Actions and Processor Groups A-13

A.6 Generate with Copyback and Processor Groups

This section describes how Generate with Copyback action impacts the processor group selected.

A.6.1 Impact
Case 1 Given these conditions Element exists at target: No Element exists up map: Yes Processor Group override (client): No This Processor is executed Target (T)/Source (S) Processor type: T-Generate Processor Group name taken from: fetched element Processor Group Defintion taken from: target Label given when action is complete: fetched element 2 Element exists at target: No Element exists up map: Yes Processor Group override (client): Yes Target (T)/Source (S) Processor type: T-Generate Processor Group Name taken from: override Processor Group Definition taken from: target Label given when action is complete: override

A.6.2 Example: Case 1

Scenario: You are generating element FINAPP01 at Stage 1 with copyback and you do not provide a processor group override for the action. The element exists at Stage 4 and is assigned to processor group LOPGA. Processor executed: SIMPLGA from Stage 1 Label Assigned: LOPGA

A-14 User Guide

A.7 Restore Action and Processor Groups

This section describes how Restore action impacts the processor group selected.

A.7.1 Impact
Case 1 Given these conditions Element exists up map: Yes Processor Group override: No This Processor is executed Target (T)/Source (S) Processor type: T-Generate Processor Group Name taken from: source element Processor Group Defintion taken from: target Label given when action is complete: source element 2 Element exists up map: No Processor Group override (client): No Target (T)/Source (S) Processor type: T-Generate Processor Group Name taken from: source element Processor Group Definition taken from: target Label given when action is complete: source element 3 Element exists up map: Yes Processor Group override (client): Yes Processor Group change: Yes Target (T)/Source (S) Processor type: T-Generate Processor Group Name taken from: override Processor Group Definition taken from: target Label given when action is completed: override 4 Element exists up map: No Processor Group override (client): Yes Processor Group change: Yes Target (T)/Source (S) Processor type: T-Generate Processor Group Name taken from: override Processor Group Defintion taken from: target Label given when action is complete: override

Appendix A. Actions and Processor Groups A-15

A.7 Restore Action and Processor Groups

A.7.2 Example: Case 1

Scenario: You are restoring element FINAPP04 to Stage 1. The element exists up the map, at Stage 3, with the processor group LOPGB. You do not provide a processor group override for the action. Processor executed: SIMPLGB from Stage 1 Label Assigned: LOPGB

A-16 User Guide

A.8 Move Action Using Move Processor and Processor Groups

This section describes how Move action using move processor impacts the processor group selected.

A.8.1 Impact
Case 1 Given these conditions Element exists at target: No Element exists up map: Yes Processor Group mapped (system-defined): No This Processor is executed Target (T)/Source (S) Processor type: S-Move S-Delete Processor Group Name taken from: source element source element Processor Group Defintion taken from: source source Label given when action is complete: source element 2 Element exists at target: No Element exists up map: No Processor Group mapped (system-defined): No Target (T)/Source (S) Processor type: S-Move S-Delete Processor Group Name taken from: source element source element Processor Group Definition taken from: source source Label given when action is completed: source element 3 Element exists at target: Yes Element exists up map: Yes Processor Group mapped (system-defined): No Processor Group change: No Target (T)/Source (S) Processor type: S-Move S-Delete Processor Group Name taken from: source element source element Processor Group Definition taken from: source source Label given when action is completed: source element

Appendix A. Actions and Processor Groups A-17

A.8 Move Action Using Move Processor and Processor Groups

Case 4

Given these conditions Element exists at target: Yes Element exists up map: No Processor Group mapped (system-defined): No Processor Group change: No

This Processor is executed Target (T)/Source (S) Processor type: S-Move S-Delete Processor Group Name taken from: source element source element Processor Group Definition taken from: source source Label given when action is completed: source element

Element exists at target: No Element exists up map: Yes Processor Group mapped (system-defined): Yes

Target (T)/Source (S) Processor type: S-Move S-Delete Processor Group Name taken from: source element source element Processor Group Defintion taken from: source source Label given when action is completed: map

Element exists at target: No Element exists up map: No Processor Group mapped (system-defined): Yes

Target (T)/Source (S) Proccessor type: S-Move S-Delete Processor Group Name taken from: source element source element Processor Group Definition taken from: source source Label given when action is completed: map

A-18 User Guide

A.8 Move Action Using Move Processor and Processor Groups

Case 7

Given these conditions Element exists at target: Yes Element exists up map: Yes Processor Group mapped (system-defined): Yes Processor Group change: Yes

This Processor is executed Target (T)/Source (S) Processor type: T-Delete (PG chg) S-Move S-Delete Processor Group Name taken from: target element source element source element Processor Group Definition taken from: target source source Label given when action is completed: map

Element exists at target: Yes Element exists up map: No Processor Group mapped (system-defined): Yes Processor Group change: No

Target (T)/Source (S) Processor type: S-Move S-Delete Processor Group Name taken from: source element source element Processor Group Definition taken from: source source Label given when action is completed: map

A.8.2 Example: Case 1

Scenario: You are moving element FINAPP01 from Stage 1 to Stage 2. In Stage 1, the element is labeled with processor group LOPGC. The element does not exist at the target but does exist up the map, at Stage 4, with processor group LOPGC. A processor group name is not mapped at the target (next) location. Two processors are executed. 1st Processor executed: SIMPLMC from Stage 1 2nd Processor executed: SIMPLDC from Stage 1 Label Assigned: LOPGC

Appendix A. Actions and Processor Groups A-19

A.8 Move Action Using Move Processor and Processor Groups

A.8.3 Example: Case 7

Scenario: You are moving element FINAPP01 from Stage 2 to Stage 3. In Stage 2, the element is labeled with processor group LOPGA. The element exists at the target, with processor group LOPGB, and up the map, at Stage 4. A processor group name is mapped at the target (next) location--LOPGC--causing the processor group name to change. Three processors are executed. 1st Processor executed: SIMPLDB from Stage 3 2nd Processor executed: SIMPLMA from Stage 2 3rd Processor executed: SIMPLDA from Stage 2 Label Assigned: LOPGC

A-20 User Guide

A.9 Move Action Using Generate Processor and Processor Groups

This section describes how Move action using generate processor impacts the processor group selected.

A.9.1 Impact
Case 1 Given these conditions Element exists at target: No Element exists up map: Yes Processor Group mapped (system-defined): No This Processor is executed Target (T)/Source (S) Processor type: T-Generate S-Delete Processor Group Name taken from: source element source element Processor Group Defintion taken from: target source Label given when action is complete: source element 2 Element exists at target: No Element exists up map: No Processor Group mapped (system-defined): No Target (T)/Source (S) Processor type: T-Generate S-Delete Processor Group Name taken from: source element source element Processor Group Definition taken from: target source Label given when action is completed: source element 3 Element exists at target: Yes Element exists up map: Yes Processor Group mapped (system-defined): No Processor Group change: No Target (T)/Source (S) Processor type: T-Generate S-Delete Processor Group Name taken from: source element source element Processor Group Definition taken from: target source Label given when action is completed: source element

Appendix A. Actions and Processor Groups A-21

A.9 Move Action Using Generate Processor and Processor Groups

Case 4

Given these conditions Element exists at target: Yes Element exists up map: No Processor Group mapped (system-defined): No Processor Group change: No

This Processor is executed Target (T)/Source (S) Processor type: T-Generate S-Delete Processor Group Name taken from: source element source element Processor Group Definition taken from: target source Label given when action is completed: source element

Element exists at target: No Element exists up map: Yes Processor Group mapped (system-defined): Yes

Target (T)/Source (S) Processor type: T-Generate S-Delete Processor Group Name taken from: map source element Processor Group Defintion taken from: target source Label given when action is completed: map

Element exists at target: No Element exists up map: No Processor Group mapped (system-defined): Yes

Target (T)/Source (S) Proccessor type: T-Generate S-Delete Processor Group Name taken from: map source element Processor Group Definition taken from: target source Label given when action is completed: map

A-22 User Guide

A.9 Move Action Using Generate Processor and Processor Groups

Case 7

Given these conditions Element exists at target: Yes Element exists up map:Yes Processor Group mapped (system-defined): Yes Processor Group change: Yes

This Processor is executed Target (T)/Source (S) Processor type: T-Delete (PG chg) T-Generate S-Delete Processor Group Name taken from: target element map source element Processor Group Definition taken from: target target source Label given when action is completed: map

Element exists at target: Yes Element exists up map: No Processor Group mapped (system-defined): Yes Processor Group change: No

Target (T)/Source (S) Processor type: T-Generate S-Delete Processor Group Name taken from: map source element Processor Group Definition taken from: target source Label given when action is completed: map

A.9.2 Example: Case 3

Scenario: You are moving element FINAPP01 from Stage 1 to Stage 2. The element exists at the target, labeled with processor group LOPGB, and up the map, at Stage 4. A processor group name is not mapped at the target (next) location. Two processors are executed. 1st Processor executed: SIMPLGB from Stage 2 2nd Processor executed: SIMPLDB from Stage 1 Label Assigned: LOPGB

Appendix A. Actions and Processor Groups A-23

A.9 Move Action Using Generate Processor and Processor Groups

A.9.3 Example: Case 5

Scenario: You are moving element FINAPP01 from Stage 2 to Stage 3. The element at Stage 2 is labeled with processor group LOPGB. The element does not exist at the target location but does exist up the map, at Stage 4. A processor group name is mapped at the target (next) location--LOPGC. Two processors are executed. 1st Processor executed: SIMPLGC from Stage 3 2nd Processor executed: SIMPLDB from Stage 2 Label Assigned: LOPGC

A-24 User Guide

A.10 Transfer Action Using Move Processor and Processor Groups

Note: As you look through the first eight lines of this table, you will notice that similar sets of conditions can produce different results. This is due to a change in inventory component (such as type or system). One set of conditions--labeled with the letter A in the table--reflects a transfer in which the source and target inventory components are the same. A second set of conditions--labeled with the letter B--reflects a transfer in which the source and inventory components are not the same. Compare lines A1 and B1, A2 and B2, etc. Although the conditions for executing the actions are similar, the results differ. The last four lines of the table present unique sets of conditions for the Transfer action.

A.10.1 Impact
Case 1(A1) Given these conditions Element exists at target: No Element exists up map: Yes Processor Group override (client): No This Processor is executed Target (T)/Source (S) Processor type: S-Move Processor Group Name taken from: source element Processor Group Defintion taken from: source Label given when action is complete: source element 1(A2) Element exists at target: No Element exists up map: No Processor Group override (client): No Target (T)/Source (S) Processor type: S-Move Processor Group Name taken from: source element Processor Group Definition taken from: source Label given when action is complete: source element

Appendix A. Actions and Processor Groups A-25

A.10 Transfer Action Using Move Processor and Processor Groups

Case 2(B1)

Given these conditions Element exists at target: No Element exists up map: Yes Processor Group override (client): No

2 (B2)

Element exists at target: No Element exists up map: No Processor Group mapped (system-defined): No

Target (T)/Source (S) Processor type: S-Move Processor Group Name taken from: source element Processor Group Defintion taken from: source Label given when action is completed: target default

3 (A3)

Element exists at target: Yes Element exists up map: Yes Processor Group mapped (sysstem defined): No Processor Group Change: No

Target (T)/Source (S) Processor type: S-Move Processor Group Name taken from: target element Processor Group Defintion taken from: source Label given when action is completed: target element Target (T)/Source (S) Processor type: S-Move Processor Group Name taken from: target element Processor Group Defintion taken from: source Label given when action is completed: target element

3 (A4)

Element exists at target: Yes Element exists up map: No Processor Group override (client): No Processor Group change: No

A-26 User Guide

A.10 Transfer Action Using Move Processor and Processor Groups

Case 4 (B3)

Given these conditions Element exists at target: Yes Element exists up map: Yes Processor Group override (client): No Processor Group change: No

This Processor is executed Target (T)/Source (S) Processor type: S-Move Processor Group Name taken from: source element Processor Group Defintion taken from: source Label given when action is completed: target element Target (T)/Source (S) Processor type: S-Move Processor Group Name taken from: source element Processor Group Defintion taken from: source Label given after action is completed: target element Target (T)/Source (S) Processor type: S-Move Processor Group Name taken from: source element Processor Group Defintion taken from: source Label given when action is completed: override

4 (B4)

Element exists at target: Yes Element exists up map: No Processor Group override (client): No Processor Group change: No

Element exists at target: No Element exists up map: Yes Processor Group mapped (system-defined): Yes

Element exists at target: No Element exists up map: No Processor Group mapped (system-defined): Yes

Target (T)/Source (S) Processor type: S-Move Processor Group Name taken from: source element Processor Group Definition taken from: source Label given when action is completed: override

Appendix A. Actions and Processor Groups A-27

A.10 Transfer Action Using Move Processor and Processor Groups

Case 7

Given these conditions Element exists at target: Yes Element exists up map: Yes Processor Group mapped (system-defined): Yes Processor Group Change: Yes

This Processor is executed Target (T)/Source (S) Processor type: S-Delete (PG chg) S-Move Processor Group Name taken from: target element source element Processor Group Definition taken from: source source Label given when action is completed: override

Element exists at target: Yes Element exists up map: No Processor Group mapped (system-defined): Yes Processor Group change: Yes

Target (T)/Source (S) Processor type: S-Delete (PG chg) S-Move Processor Group Name taken from: target element source element Processor Group Definition taken from: source source Label given when action is completed: override

A.10.2 Example: Case 1 (A1)

Scenario: You are transferring element FINAPP01 from Stage 1 to Stage 3. In Stage 1, the element is labeled with processor group LOPGA. The element does not exist at the target but it does exist up the map, at Stage 4, labeled with the processor group LOPGA. You do not provide a processor group override for the action. Processor executed: SIMPLMA from Stage 1 Label Assigned: LOPGA

A-28 User Guide

A.10 Transfer Action Using Move Processor and Processor Groups

A.10.3 Example: Case 7

Scenario: You are transferring element FINAPP01 from Stage 1 to Stage 3. In Stage 1, the element is labeled with processor group LOPGA. The element exists at the target, at Stage 3 and labeled with the processor group LOPGA. You provide a processor group override for the action--LOPGC--causing the processor group name to change. Two processors are executed. 1st Processor executed: SIMPLDA from Stage 3 2nd Processor executed: SIMPLMA from Stage 1 Label Assigned: LOPGC

Appendix A. Actions and Processor Groups A-29

A.11 Transfer Action Using Generate Processor and Processor Groups

A.11.1 Impact
Case 1(A1) Given these conditions Element exists at target: No Element exists up map: Yes Processor Group override (client): No This Processor is executed Target (T)/Source (S) Processor type: T-Generate Processor Group Name taken from: source element Processor Group Defintion taken from: target Label given when action is complete: source element 1(A2) Element exists at target: No Element exists up map: No Processor Group override (client): No Target (T)/Source (S) Processor type: T-Generate Processor Group Name taken from: source element Processor Group Definition taken from: target Label given when action is complete: source element

A-30 User Guide

A.11 Transfer Action Using Generate Processor and Processor Groups

Case 2(B1)

Given these conditions Element exists at target: No Element exists up map: Yes Processor Group override (client): No

This Processor is executed Target (T) /Source (S) Processor type: T-Generate Processor Group Name taken from: target default Processor Group Definition taken from: target Label given when action is completed: source element

2 (B2)

Element exists at target: No Element exists up map: No Processor Group override (client): No

Target (T)/Source (S) Processor type: T-Generate Processor Group Name taken from: target default Processor Group Definition taken from: target Label given when action is completed: target default

3(A3)

Element exists at target: Yes Element exists up map: Yes Processor Group override (client): No Processor Group change: No

Target (T)/Source (S) Processor type: T-Generate Processor Group Name taken from: target element Processor Group Definition taken from: target Label given when action is completed: target element Target (T)/Source (S) Processor type: T-Generate Processor Group Name taken from: target element Processor Group Definition taken from: target Label given when action is completed: target element

3 (A4)

Element exists at target: Yes Element exists up map: No Processor Group override (client): No Processor Group change: No

Appendix A. Actions and Processor Groups A-31

A.11 Transfer Action Using Generate Processor and Processor Groups

Case 4 (B3)

Given these conditions Element exists at target: Yes Element exists up map: Yes Processor Group override (client): No Processor Group change: No

This Processor is executed Target (T)/Source (S) Processor type: T-Generate Processor Group Name taken from: target element Processor Group Defintion taken from: target Label given when action is completed: target element Target (T)/Source (S) Proccessor type: T-Generate Processor Group Name taken from: target element Processor Group Definition taken from: target Label given when action is completed: target element Target (T)/Source (S) Processor type: T-Generate Processor Group Name taken from: override Processor Group Definition taken from: target Label given when action is completed: override

4 (B4)

Element exists at target: Yes Element exists up map: No Processor Group override (client): No Processor Group change: No

Element exists at target: No Element exists up map: Yes Processor Group override (client): Yes

Element exists at target: No Element exists up map: No Processor Group override (client): Yes

Target (T)/Source (S) Processor type: T-Generate Processor Group Name taken from: override Processor Group Definition taken from: target Label given when action is completed: override

A-32 User Guide

A.11 Transfer Action Using Generate Processor and Processor Groups

Case 7

Given these conditions Element exists at target: Yes Element exists up map: Yes Processor Group override (client): Yes Processor Group change: Yes

Element exists at target: Yes Element exists up map: No Processor Group override (client): Yes Processor Group change: Yes

Target (T)/Source (S) Processor type: T-Delete (PG chg) T-Generate Processor Group Name taken from: target element override Processor Group Definition taken from: target target Label given when action is completed: override

9 (B1)

Element exists at target: Yes Element exists up map: No Processor Group override (client): No Processor Group Change: Yes

Target (T)/Source (S) Processor type: S-Move Processor Group Name taken from: source element Processor Group Definition taken from: source Label given when action is completed: target default Target (T)/Source (S) Processor type: S-Move Processor Group Name taken from: source element Processor Group Definition taken from: source Label given when action is completed: target default Sync required

9 (B2)

Element exists at target: Yes Element exists up map: Yes Processor Group override (system-defined): No Processor Group Change: Yes

Appendix A. Actions and Processor Groups A-33

A.11 Transfer Action Using Generate Processor and Processor Groups

A.11.2 Example: Case 1 (A2)

Scenario: You are transferring element FINAPP01 from Stage 1 to Stage 3. The element exists at Stage 1 with the processor group LOPGA. The element does not exist at the target or up the map. You do not provide a processor group override for the action. Processor executed: SIMPLGA from Stage 3 Label Assigned: LOPGA

A.11.3 Example: Case 8

Scenario: You are transferring element FINAPP01 from Stage 1 to Stage 3. The element exists at Stage 1 with processor group LOPGB. The element exists at the target, with processor group LOPGB, but does not exist up the map. You provide a processor group override for the action--LOPGC-- causing the processor group name to change. Two processors are executed. 1st Processor executed: SIMPLDB from Stage 3 2nd Processor executed: SIMPLGC from Stage 3 Label Assigned: LOPGC

A-34 User Guide

Glossary
Access Security Table. Endevor table that defines the environment(s) to which each user has access. There is one Access Security Table for each site. ACM. See Automated Configuration Manager (ACM). actions. Commands used to maintain or otherwise act against elements. See Add, Archive, Copy, Delete, Display, Generate, List, Move, Print, Restore, Retrieve, Signin, Transfer, and Update. Add. An Endevor action used to place members from an external data set under control of Endevor. alternate ID. Facility that protects the Endevor-controlled data sets (such as Master Control Files, package data sets, and base and delta libraries) from access by an individual user, while still allowing the Endevor system to have access. Administrator ID that has authority to the data sets. When Endevor has to access the data sets, it takes on the security authorization assigned to that ID. Information is provided for the alternate ID through three parameters in the Endevor Defaults Table: RACFGRP, RACFPWD, and RACFUID. See the Installation Guide for more information. analysis utility. See Inventory Analyzer. approval. An electronic signoff mechanism for packages. Approval may be required for a package before it can be executed. approved. Status of a package after required approvers have reviewed and signed off on a package by approving it. approver. A person authorized to signoff on a package prior to execution. Signing off on a package means reviewing the information contained in a package and approving or denying it. approver group relationship. The relationship established between an approver group and one or more inventory areas, authorizing members of that approver group to review (then approve or deny) packages related to those inventory areas. approver type. Specifies the kinds of packages that an approver group can review. When the approver type is STANDARD, that approver group can only review standard packages related to its authorized inventory areas. When the approver type is EMERGENCY, that approver group can only review emergency packages related to its authorized inventory areas. Archive. Action used to write an element and all related Endevor information to a sequential data set. The DCB must specify variable blocked records (RECFM=VB), a minimum LRECL of 1021, DSORG=PS, and a blocksize equal to your LRECL + 4 (minimum 1025). When archiving to tape, the recommended blocksize is 32,000. authorization. The ability to perform certain privileged functions within the IBM z/OS environment. Automated Configuration Manager (ACM). Optional facility that allows you to monitor selected libraries and data sets and maintain a component list for each element in the monitored areas. The component list provides an audit trail of program-component information at the time of each compile. Also called AllFusion Endevor Change Manager Automated Configuration Option. automatic consolidation. See consolidation. approver group. A collection of one or more approvers. Approver groups are defined within each environment and can be associated with particular inventory areas.

Glossary X-1

backin. To restore the executable members of a package to the state they were in before the package was backed out. Reverses the backout process. backout. To return the executable members of a package to the state they were in prior to package execution. base level. When storing elements with forward deltas, the lowest level of an element within a particular stage. This level represents the source for the element in that stage. If an element exists in both stages, there is a base level in each stage. When storing elements with reverse deltas, the base level is the current level. See also image. base library. Partitioned data set (PDS), an AllFusion CA-Panvalet, an AllFusion CA-Librarian, or Endevor LIB file that stores the base members for elements defined to Endevor. A base library is defined for each element type, but can be shared across types. See also image library. base member. Member in a base library. Each base member corresponds to an element, and contains the source for the base level of that element. Base member names are generated internally by Endevor, and do not correspond to the element name unless reverse delta with non-encryption is used. base regression. The amount (percent) by which the statements stored in a new level of an element change the statements stored in the base level. See also regression percent. batch. An IBM term referring to an environment in which non-interactive programs are executed. In Endevor, batch refers to the execution of actions and reports in a non-interactive region (vs. execution in foreground). BDT. See Bulk Data Transfer. browse. To view the contents of a data set, without being able to change its contents. Bulk Data Transfer (BDT). IBM transmission utility supported by the Endevor package shipment utility. Abbreviated as follows when establishing destinations: BDT2for BDT Version 2 BDTNfor BDT vis NJE/NJI

C1DEFLTS Table. See Endevor Defaults Table. cast a package. To freeze the actions included in a package. A package cannot be edited after it is cast, and only approvers can work with it. CCID. See Change Control ID (CCID). CCID definition data set. A data set that identifies the CCIDs to be used within Endevor. The definition file must be a card-image data set (80-byte, fixed-format records). CCID validation. Checking a CCID specified on an action against the CCIDs defined in the CCID definition data set. Change Control ID (CCID). A logical grouping mechanism by which user-specified portions of the Endevor inventory can be tagged, then viewed, tracked, and manipulated. The use of CCIDs is optional, but may be required on a system-by-system basis. The same is true of comments. change regression. The amount (percent) by which the statements stored in a new level change the revisions made by the previous level. See also regression percent. checksum. An internally calculated value within a package. Endevor uses the checksum to determine if a package has been changed. command field. Field appearing in the upper-left corner (second line) of those Endevor screens on which you can specify a TSO command. You can enter any appropriate TSO command in the command field. comment. A 1- to 40-character user-defined remark associated with an action or package, generally describing the reason for the action or purpose of the package. Used in conjunction with CCIDs. See also Change Control ID (CCID). committed. Status of a package after it has been committed. commit a package. To record all events related to a given package, and remove all backin and backout information. After a package is committed it can no longer be backed out or backed in.

X-2 User Guide

complementary data sets. Data sets that can be shipped along with package shipments. The complementary data sets for a given shipment contain a backout of that shipment. component. The output produced or input read in by a generate or move processor. This term applies primarily to the Endevor ACM product. The components of a generated element include the following: The input components that were included to produce an output of the generate processor; for example, copybooks would be considered an input component to a COBOL compiler. The element itself. All outputs created by the generate or move processor, for example, an object deck for a COBOL compiler. The processor that generated or moved the element. User-defined related data. Components are referenced by element names (including related Endevor location information) or member names. component list. A list of all components created or read by a generate or move processor. The component list can be viewed using the Print action or through the Display Element/Component panel. This panel is available only with the Endevor ACM product. The component list provides an audit trail of program-component information at the time of each compile. component monitoring. Feature of ACM that allows you to check selected data sets for component relationships. component validation. When casting a package, Endevor validates that all dependent components are present in the package and that those components have not changed since they were last used. configuration management. The capture and storage of program-component relationships and the tracking of these relationships over time. CONNECT:Direct. Formerly known as Network DataMover. CONNECT:Direct is a network

transmission utility provided by Sterling Commerce and supported by the Endevor package shipment utility. Abbreviated NWD when establishing destinations. consolidation. Endevor facility that allows you to specify a number of delta levels to retain when a member reaches the consolidation level specified for its type. If you do not specify the number of levels to retain, Endevor consolidates all levels. Copy. An Endevor action used to copy an element from an archive data set to a data set external to Endevor. copyback. To search for an element along the map, beginning at a designated stage; find the element; then copy it back to the initial stage. Copyback is available as an explicit option with the Generate action. Endevor also uses copyback when adding, transferring, and moving elements. create a package. To build the SCL for a package, then associate this SCL with other package-related information such as a package ID, an execution window, etc. CSECT. Control section. An IBM term for that part of a program that is a relocatable unit and for which all components are loaded into adjoining main storage locations. current level. The most recent source for an element. When using forward deltas, the current level of an element comprises the base level plus all subsequent change levels. When using reverse deltas, the current level of an element is the current source. data set mapping rule. See DSN mapping rule. data set validation. The optional capability of verifying that retrieved elements are added or updated from the data set to which they were last retrieved. This ensures that the same copy of the element (revised as appropriate) is placed back in Endevor. Data set validation can be specified separately by system. If this facility is in effect for a system, you can override it to add the element back from a different data set, provided you have proper authority to do so.

Glossary X-3

default. A default value is the value that Endevor assumes to be in a field or statement if the user does not provide an alternative value. On foreground panels, fields usually display default values. Defaults Table. See Endevor Defaults Table. Delete. An Endevor action used to erase base and delta forms of an element and remove element information from a Master Control File or a component list. delete processor. Processor that is run when an element is deleted from a stage. Typically, the delete processor deletes the output created by the corresponding generate processor. See also processors. delta level. Record of a change to the base level of an element. Each change to an element creates a delta level. Endevor compares the current level to the new source and builds a delta level containing just the changes to the source. delta library. Partitioned data set (PDS), an AllFusion CA-Panvalet, an AllFusion CA-Librarian, or an Endevor LIB file that stores the delta members for elements defined to Endevor. A delta library is defined for each element type. delta member. Member in a delta library. Each delta member corresponds to an element, and contains all the levels for that element subsequent to the base level. Delta member names are generated internally by Endevor and do not correspond to the element name, unless reverse deltas are being used. denied. Status of a package when it has been reviewed, but denied, by an approver.

DSN mapping rule. A user-defined correspondence between host data set names and remote data set names. DSN mapping rules are used when shipping package outputs. element. Partitioned data set (PDS) members, or an AllFusion CA-Panvalet, AllFusion CA-Librarian, or sequential data sets that have been placed under control of Endevor. The default element name is the member name. Actions are performed against elements. Elements are identified by the environment and stage in which they are located, and by the system, subsystem,and type in which they are classified. element change. A view of element information that shows the current level of an element, annotated to indicate the level at which each line was added to the source. element component. In Endevor ACM, the part of a component list referred to as element information. This information includes the footprint of the Endevor source. element history. A view of element information that shows all lines that have ever been present in a piece of source code, annotated to show the level at which the line was added and/or deleted from source. element master. A view of Master Control File information about an element. element name. The name assigned to an element, used to identify that element within Endevor. It is recommended that any outputs created by output management be assigned the name of the corresponding element. Element names must be unique within each system, subsystem, and type combination. An element name can include any of the following characters (and only these characters): A-Z, 0-9, @, #, and $. element summary of levels. A summary view of activity against an element at all levels. Information provided includes the number of statements at each level, the number of lines added and the number of lines deleted. element type. See type.

deny a package. An option for a package approver. If one approver denies a package, it cannot be executed. destination. Package outputs are shipped to destinations. A destination record contains the information needed by Endevor to ship package outputs to that destination. Display. An Endevor action used to view environment definitions, element information, and footprint-related data.

X-4 User Guide

emergency approval. The kind of approval given to emergency packages. An approver group must be given the authority to approve emergency packages. emergency package. One of two types of packages. A package is identified as standard or as emergency when it is created. Emergency packages require approval from emergency approver groups. enable backout. Option when creating a package. You can decide whether or not to allow the package to be backed out. Endevor classification. The system, subsystem, and type associated with an element. Endevor Defaults Table. Table of site-specific information necessary for Endevor operation. The Endevor Defaults Table includes environment and stage definitions, installed options, and site-specific hardware settings. There is one Endevor Defaults Table for each site. Endevor LIB. High performance alternative to OS partitioned data sets under Endevor. Endevor LIB data sets do the following: Reorganize member space automatically as members are rewritten or deleted, thereby eliminating the need to compress the data set. Exploit 31-bit storage for VSAM-organized data sets, thereby reducing 24-bit storage contention. Expand directories and data sets automatically. Provide improved directory processing. Maintain additional statistical information about member size. Endevor Link. Computer Associates product that enables communication between the Endevor Workstation product and Endevor. Also named AllFusion Endevor Change Manager Link Option. Endevor listing libraries. Libraries used to store compressed compiler listings produced by processors. Endevor location. Refers to the stage and environment where an element resides. ENDEVOR return code (NDVR RC). Return code from action processing. Values are: 00The action executes successfully.

04A warning message is issued before a processor is invoked. This can occur, for example, when you specify override signout on an action, or add or update a member with no source changes. 08The regression percentage exceeds the limit specified on a type definition, and the default severity of C is in effect. 12The processor return code is greater than the MAXRC for any step in a processor, or there is an error in action processing before or after invoking a processor. 16An abend has occurred. Endevor symbolics. See symbolics. environment. The top level of the logical structure used to classify elements in Endevor. Environments usually correspond to functional levels in an organization, for example development, quality assurance, and production. Each environment has two stages. There is no limit to the number of environments you can use. environment name. The 1- to 8-character name assigned to each environment, used to identify that environment within Endevor. The name can include any of the following characters: A-Z, 0-9, @, #, and $. environment title. The 1- to 40-character title assigned to each environment, used in various displays and reports to describe the environment. ESI. See External Security Interface (ESI). event. See package events. execute a package. To run a package. Packages that execute successfully can be backed out or committed. Execution Report. Report output when you run Endevor actions. The Execution Report documents the actions requested and the processing that took place. The report can be viewed on-line by browsing data sets userid.C1TEMPR1.MSGS or userid.C1TEMPR2.MSGS. Endevor prints the report as member C1MSGS1 on the batch SYSOUT. execution window. A start date and time and an end date and time within which a package must be executed.

Glossary X-5

export a package. To copy package SCL into an external data set. exit. The Endevor exit interface is designed for use with exits written in either assembler or in high-level languages such as COBOL. External Security Interface (ESI). Optional interface used to implement external security at your site. If installed, this interface replaces the native security facility supplied on the installation tape (and implemented through the security tables), with calls to RACF, eTrust CA-ACF2 Security, or eTrust CA-Top Secret Security. Also named AllFusion Endevor Change Manager Interface for External Security. fetch. See copyback. footprint. Encrypted data added by processors to individual source, object, or load modules, to identify the Endevor element associated with that module. Endevor uses this data to display or otherwise process information related to the element. A footprint includes (in encrypted format) the following information: site ID, environment name, stage number, system name, subsystem name, element name, element type, element version/level, and the date and time the footprint was assigned. foreground. An IBM term referring to an environment in which interactive programs are executed. In Endevor, you run actions in foreground by requesting those actions through the Endevor Foreground Options Menu. forward delta. A method for recording changes that stores a base version of code, then builds current versions by applying changes made to the base. forward recovery. The process of taking an old level of an element and making it the current (new) level, thereby backing out any changes made by the levels between. To perform forward recovery, you first retrieve the older (to-be-recovered) level, then add or update the element using the retrieved source to create the new level. Generate. An Endevor action used to translate source into executables, then populate output libraries with these executables by executing the generate processor for an element.

generate processor. Generate processors translate source into executables, then populate output libraries with these executables. group name. Within the definition of the Access and User Security Tables, a name associated with a particular security configuration that applies for multiple users. The name is then associated with any number of specific user IDs, to associate those IDs with the group-level security. This is a convenient way to assign security to several users having identical levels of access to the Endevor environment. identify record (IDR). An IBM term for a record in a load module that contains user-defined data. An IDR is created by the linkage editor when it encounters an IDENTIFY statement in the object deck. Within Endevor, IDRs are used to store the footprint(s) associated with load modules. image. The current level of an element, when that element is stored in reverse delta format, using non-encryption. See also base level. image library. A library that contains elements stored in reverse delta format, using non-encryption. See also base library. import a package. To create a package by copying SCL from an external data set. INCLUDE library. AllFusion CA-Panvalet library, an AllFusion CA-Librarian library, or partitioned data set (PDS) that contains INCLUDE members referenced within Endevor elements. This library is optional and can be defined for each element type. The INCLUDE library is used by Retrieve actions if you specify that you want to expand INCLUDEs at the time the element is retrieved. It is also used by the CONWRITE utility, if you specify that you want to expand INCLUDEs during CONWRITE processing. input component. When using Endevor ACM, the components that were included to produce an output when executing the generate or move processor. A copybook, for example, is the input component when compiling a COBOL program. inventory. The software components that make up your application software systems.

X-6 User Guide

Inventory Analyzer. Computer Associates product that allows you to analyze your software inventory, classifying it according to Endevor types. Used when implementing Endevor. inventory area. A subset of a software inventory, defined by its Endevor location (environment and stage) and classification (system, subsystem, and type). jump. To move an element from stage 2 in one environment to a stage in another environment on a map route, when a version of the element exists at an intermediate stage that is not part of the map route. last action. Most recent action executed for an element. Once executed, each action is recorded as the last action except Archive, Delete, Display, List, and Print. last action CCID. The CCID specified for the last action executed against an element. level. The source for an element at a particular time. When an element is first added to a stage there is one level, known as the base level. Each time Endevor actions change the source thereafter, a newdeltalevel is created. See also base level, delta level, and image. level number. Identifier for a specific level of an element. Endevor assigns each set of changes a level number that is one higher than the number assigned to the preceding level. library management. The classification, control, and storage of the physical components of a software inventory. List. An Endevor action used to list, in the form of action requests, elements from a Master Control File or archive data set, or members from a library. List can also be used for text scanning. If the Automated Configuration Manager facility is installed, List can also search a component list based on specified criteria. list panel. Panel used by Endevor to display lists of systems, subsystems, types, elements, or members; also displays selection options for users. List panels are prepared and processed by the ISPF Table Display Facility.

load utility. Endevor utility used to load members from an external data set into any stage in an environment. location. See Endevor location. map. The promotion routes established for software inventory at a site. Environments and stages are mapped to each other in the Endevor Defaults Table. Systems, subsystems, types, and processor groups are mapped to each other on their respective definition panels. mapping rule. See DSN mapping rule. Master Control File (MCF). Endevor file that contains the definitions of stages, systems, subsystems, element types, and elements themselves. This file is accessed and updated by Endevor, to manage the element definitions, to execute processors, and for other miscellaneous functions. There are two Master Control Files (MCFs) for each environmentone per stage. MAXRC. A processor keyword that defines the highest acceptable return code for a processor step. If a step exceeds this return code, the Endevor return code (NDVR RC) is set to 12. When this occurs the Element Master display shows *FAILED* in the NDVR RC field. MCF. See Master Control File (MCF). model transmission control statements. Statements that control the functioning of data transmission programs used by the package shipment utility. Move. An Endevor action used to move elements between stages, within or across environments. move processor. Move processors copy outputs, element information, and component lists from the source location to the target location of a Move or, optionally, a Transfer action. name mask. Name masking enables you to use the wildcard (*) and placeholder (%) characters when performing actions. The wildcard character enables you to specify all names or all names beginning with a particular search string. The placeholder character defines a specific position within the search string. For example, the search string UPD% would return all four character names beginning with UPD.

Glossary X-7

native security. Security option supplied with the Endevor installation tape. See also External Security Interface (ESI) and security. NDVR RC. See ENDEVOR return code (NDVR RC). notification facility. Endevor facility that allows you to notify users of events that require a response from them. output component. When using Endevor ACM, the components created as a result of executing the generate or move processor. For example, an object deck is an output component when compiling a COBOL program. output library. Any of several libraries used during output management, including the Endevor processor listing library, processor load library, and source output library; as well as user copy libraries, load libraries, listing libraries, macro libraries, JCL libraries, databases, etc. output management. That aspect of Endevor which deals with the creation and maintenance of various outputs that relate to an element. The exact nature of these outputs varies depending on the corresponding element type, and is defined by the output management for that type. For example, output management might store a copy of the current source for the element in the source output library, or it might create a load module for the element or a listing associated with that load module. package. A group of Endevor actions that requires approval before it can be executed. Creating packages allows you to do the following: Group specific actions so they can be maintained and tracked as a single unit. Establish formal approval procedures to ensure data integrity through modifications. Centralize specific action groups so you can see them across environments and reuse them. package data set. Data set where packages are stored. There is one package data set per environment. package events. An audit trail recording the events that have occurred involving a package, logged by user ID, date, and time. Package events relate to the

various steps of the package processing procedure, and include the following: Created Last Updated Cast Approved Executed Backed Out Backed In Committed package exits. Exits that are called before and/or after package functions and subfunctions. See also exit 7. package shipment. The transmission of package outputs, and optionally their backouts, from host sites to remote sites. package status. Indicates the status of a package at any given time. Status levels for packages include the following: In-editA package is initially set to this status. It can be modified only when in this status. When you reset a package, its status is automatically set to In-edit. In-approvalWhen a package is cast, its status changes to In-approval, indicating that approvers can now review and approve or deny the package. No editing can be done once the package is cast. DeniedThe status changes to Denied when an approver denies approval of the package during review. ApprovedThe status changes to Approved when all necessary approvers (required and optional) grant approval of the package during review, and when the quorum requirement is met for the package. A package is also considered Approved when it has been cast and no approvers have been identified. In-executionThe status changes to In-execution when package execution has begun. ExecutedWhen the package has been executed successfully, its status changes to Executed. Exec-failedWhen the package has aborted or failed execution, its status changes to Exec-failed.

X-8 User Guide

CommittedWhen a package has been committed, its status changes to Committed. Endevor Parallel Development Manager (PDM). Computer Associates product that automatically compares and integrates three versions of source code, allowing you to resolve conflicts resulting from concurrent development or from applying vendor updates to applications that have been customized in-house. Also named AllFusion Endevor Change Manager Parallel Development Option. partitioned data set (PDS). A data set in direct access storage that is divided into partitions, called members. Each member can contain a program, part of a program, or data. PDM. See Endevor Parallel Development Manager (PDM). PDS. See partitioned data set (PDS). Print. An Endevor action used to print element or member information. PROC RC. See processor return code (PROC RC). PROC statement. A job control statement used in catalogued or in-stream procedures. PROC statements can be used to assign default values to symbolic parameters contained in a procedure. A PROC statement is also used to mark the beginning of in-stream procedures. processors. Processors are standard OS JCL job streams that manipulate elements and their outputs: object modules, load modules, listings, and the like. There are three types of processors: Generate processors translate source to executables, then populate output libraries with these outputs. Delete processors delete outputs created by generate processors. Move processors copy or regenerate outputs, element information, and component lists from the source location to the target location of a MOVE or, optionally, a TRANSFER action. Endevor supports both Endevor symbolics and user-defined symbolics in processors. This capability allows you to write one processor that you can use in multiple processor groups by changing the values assigned to one or more symbolics.

Endevor also provides a set of utilities for use when writing processors, and supports the use of in-stream data in processors. See also delete processor, generate processor, and move processor. processor component. When using Endevor ACM, the part of a component list that includes processor information. This information includes the footprint of the processor. processor group. A processor group identifies a set of processors for a specific element type, as well as the default symbolic overrides for the processors' JCL. A group can include up to three processorsone generate, one delete, and one move processor, or any combination thereof. (For example, you could have a group that consisted only of a move processor and its symbolic overrides.) Processor groups are useful when elements of one type require slightly different processing. For example, a site may have programs coded in batch COBOL and CICS COBOL. In this case, processor groups allows you to create a single COBOL type with two processor groups, one to handle each variation of COBOL code. When you define a type to Endevor, you can also identify a default processor group for that type. Using symbolics when writing the processors for the default processor group can allow you to use the same processors, by changing symbolic definitions, for other processor groups associated with this type. processor group symbolics. Symbolics defined in PROC statements in one or more processors in a processor group. These symbolics and their default values appear on the Processor Group Symbolics panel. By modifying these default values, you can use one processor in more than one processor group. processor listing library. Optional library that stores the listings output from the Computer Associates-supplied processor named GPPROCSS. processor load library. Endevor library that contains the load-module form of each processor. The modules from this library are executed when processors are invoked. processor output library. Library referred to in a processor, to which that processor writes output.

Glossary X-9

Processor output libraries can be source libraries, executable libraries, or listing libraries. processor return code (PROC RC). Highest return code from the execution of a processor. Set to *FAILED* if the return code for any step in a processor exceeds the MAXRC for the processor. Set to *PROC'D?* if the element has not been generated after being restored or transferred from an archive data set or added/updated. production data set. Data set used to store production code. This term is used in the package shipment utility to refer to host and remote production data sets. program pathing. Security option under RACF, eTrust CA-ACF2 Security, and eTrust CA-Top Secret Security, that allows you to restrict the data sets available to particular users, as well as the programs and load libraries from which those data sets can be accessed. This is not an Endevor option, but is specific to RACF, eTrust CA-ACF2 Security, and eTrust CA-Top Secret Security. promote. To move an element from one inventory area to another inventory area. promotion management. The task of coordinating and validating successive changes to the various inventory areas in a software development setting. quorum (quorum size). The minimum number of approvers whose approval is required in order to execute a package. When a quorum size is indicated, at least that many approvers must review and approve a package. regression. Term that refers to the condition where one set of changes to element source is overwritten by a subsequent set of changes. Endevor flags regression when the changes stored for a specific level of an element overwrite more than a predefined percentage of the element statements. See also regression percent. regression percent. A percent of acceptable change to element source, defined for each element type. This is a percentage that, if exceeded, results in a user specifiable Endevor return code (0, 4, 8, or 12). Each time a new level is created for an element, Endevor checks the changes stored in that level against this percent, both in terms of change to the statements stored for the base level (known as base

regression) and change to the statements stored for the previous level (known as change regression). If the amount of change in either case exceeds the defined percent, Endevor issues a message of user-defined severity. Reload Utility. The Reload utility allows you to recover an Endevor VSAM control file (Master Control File, package data set) or a base/delta data set that was lost as a result of a physical device failure or site disaster. The RELOAD action restores data from data sets created by the unload process. remote footprint synchronization. Procedure in which footprinted executables are shipped from a remote site to a host site, where footprint reports are run to compare the executables' footprints with host Master Control File information. remote nodename. Part of a package shipment destination. Identifies the site to which package outputs are to be shipped. The name must be valid for the chosen data transmission program. request data set. Data set that contains action requests to be submitted for batch processing. You create request data sets in foreground, using the SCL Generation facility. request for data. Package exit capability, allowing package exit programs to make multiple, successive requests for Endevor information on a single invocation of the exit. reset a package. To erase all package event records, returning the package to In-edit status. Resource Security Table. Endevor table defining those element names that are restricted to a particular system(s) and subsystem(s), within a specific environment. The Resource Security Table is defined by the Endevor administrator, using the CONSDEF macro. There can be at most one Resource Security Table for each Endevor environment. Restore. An Endevor action used to restore an element to Endevor from an archive data set. Retrieve. An Endevor action used to copy any level of an element to an external data set. return code. See ENDEVOR return code (NDVR RC) or processor return code (PROC RC).

X-10 User Guide

reverse delta. A method for recording changes that stores the most recent version of the code, rebuilding prior versions by backing out individual changes from the current version. review a package. To review the contents of a package. After reviewing a package an approver either approves or denies the package. route. A series of environment and stage locations that make up the stages in a software life cycle. Taken together, all the routes at a site constitute the map for that site. See also map. SCL. See Software Control Language (SCL). security. Endevor feature that allows you to restrict action requests and access to elements. The security system supplied with Endevor, known as native security, is implemented using three tables. See also Access Security Table, Resource Security Table, External Security Interface (ESI), and User Security Table. sharable. Characteristic of a package. A sharable package can be edited by people who did not create the package. ship utility. Endevor utility that allows you to ship package outputs to remote sites. shipment confirmation. Confirmation occurs at two points in a package shipment: After execution of the data transmission utility. After execution of the remote copy/delete job step. shipment staging. Creation and population of host staging data sets with package outputs or backout members. Signin. An Endevor action used to remove the current signout for an element. Signin can be implicit or explicit. signout. The assignment of a user ID to an element, establishing ownership of that element. Signout is automatic when adding or updating elements in or when retrieving elements from Endevor. site. Location at which Endevor is installed. The site is defined in the Endevor Defaults Table, where it is assigned a site ID.

SMF records. Records written out if SMF recording is in effect, to document various Endevor processing, as follows: An Action Record is written out at the end of (any) action processing. A Security Record is written out for each security violation (or each error returned from the security exit, 01). SMF interface. Optional interface to IBM's System Management Facilities (SMF) that allows you to record historical information through SMF records (called Action Records or Security Records in Endevor). This information is used to generate Historical Reports. The implementation of the SMF interface is optional at each site. The recording of historical information is optional within each environment. Software Control Language (SCL). Endevor language used in batch to maintain or otherwise act against elements within Endevor. software distribution. The automated distribution and synchronization of software changes and the tracking of the implementation of those changes. software life cycle. The stages through which software passes at a site during the development and maintenance process. A software life cycle might consist of development, testing, quality assurance, and production. software management. The process of tracking changes to software components and their interrelationships over time. Includes configuration management, library management, software distribution, and version control. source. The non-executable form of an element. source library. Any of several libraries used during source management, including Endevor base libraries, delta libraries, and INCLUDE libraries. source management. The aspect of Endevor that deals with the creation and maintenance of element source. Element source is maintained in base and delta libraries, in either an internal format or in standard IBM format (if reverse deltas and non-encryption are selected).

Glossary X-11

source output library. Endevor library that contains the latest full source version of each element. This library is designed for use with copybooks, macros, procedures, etc., that are copied elsewhere. This library is optional but, if used, is specified in the definition of the corresponding element type. stage. A stage in the software life cycle. There are two stages defined for each Endevor environment. stage ID. Identifier for the stage, used during processing to select (identify) the stage you want to process. stage name. Name assigned to each stage during installation. A stage name can include any (and only) the following characters: A-Z, 0-9, @, #, and $. stage number. Relative number for the stage within the environment: 1 or 2. stage title. The 1- to 20-character title assigned to each stage, used in displays and reports to describe the stage. standard approval. One of two types of package approval. Standard packages can only be approved by standard approver groups. standard package. One of two types of packages. A package is identified as standard or as emergency when it is created. Standard packages require approval from standard approver groups. subsystem. Part of the Endevor classification of an element. Subsystems are used for specific applications within a system. For example, there might be a purchase order subsystem and an accounts payable subsystem within the financial system. symbolics. Endevor supports two kinds of symbolics in processors: Endevor symbolics. Any of several names, preceded by &C1, that are used within Endevor processors to represent a value specific to an individual run of the processor. Values are assigned to Endevor symbolics when the processor is executed. User symbolics. Defined by users in JCL PROC statements in processors. Allow one processor to be used in multiple processor groups. See also processors and processor group.

synchronize. When transferring or moving with history, if the current level of the target does not match any level of the source, a synchronize conflict is detected. Endevor searches for the level of the target to match a level of the source; this level becomes the synchronization level. When there is a synchronize conflict, Endevor does not allow the element to be transferred or moved unless the synchronization flag (SYNC option) is set to Y (SYNC=Y). The SYNC option tells Endevor to create a sync level at the target that reflects the differences. All levels after the sync level (the change history) associated with the FROM location element are then appended to the TO location element and renumbered. system. A means of classifying elements within Endevor. A system typically represents the applications at a site. For example, there might be financial and manufacturing applications. A system must be defined to each environment where it will be used. Transfer. An Endevor action used to transport elements from a source location to a target location. Each location can be either an Endevor location or an archive data set. transmission method. Part of package shipment destinations. Identifies the transmission utility to be used to ship packages to the destination. See also Tivoli NetView File Transfer Program (FTP), Bulk Data Transfer (BDT), and CONNECT:Direct. transportable footprints. Endevor footprints that can be imbedded in DOS/VSE- and VM/CMS-bound object modules, using a z/OS compiler, a VSE compiler, or a VM compiler. (See the Administration Guide for complete information.) type. A category of source code used as part of the classification of an element in Endevor. For example, there might be the following types: COBOL (for COBOL code); COPYBOOK (for copybooks); JCL (for JCL streams). type processing sequence. Relative sequence of processing for the element types defined to each system. By defining a processing sequence, you could ensure, for example, that copybooks (type COPYBOOK) are updated before any COBOL programs (type COB) that might use those copybooks.

X-12 User Guide

The Unload utility unloads and validates the contents of the VSAM Master Control File(s), base and delta files associated with the environments and systems specified on the job request. The file created by the Unload function contains a backup of all internal MCF definitions (system, subsystem, type, type sequence, data set, element master record) and base/delta data (element base, element delta, component base, component delta). Packages contained within a package data set can also be unloaded. Unload utility. The Unload utility may be run for an entire environment or for selected systems within an environment. Unload may also be directed to backup an entire package data set or individual packages. Update. An Endevor action used to add a member to Endevor when an element with the same name is located in the target entry stage. user exit table. Table identifying exit programs to be called at each Endevor exit point. user ID. For actions run in foreground, the TSO user ID for the session. For actions run in batch, the job name or the ID specified through the USER= parameter on the job card, depending on how your Endevor Defaults Table is set up. user menu facility. The user menu facility allows the Endevor administrator to attach user-defined functions to the Endevor TSO/ISPF front end.

User Security Table. Endevor table that defines the systems and subsystems to which each user has access, and for each system/subsystem, the type of processing (authorization level) allowed. There is one User Security Table for each environment. user symbolics. See symbolics. Validate. The Validate function allows you to ensure the integrity of one or more existing Endevor environments and systems, and their related elements and components. These are the same checks performed as part of Unload processing, allowing this function to operate in a stand-alone mode. version. Two-digit version identifier associated with an element. Two versions of an element are not allowed in the same environment. version control. The maintenance, tracking, and auditing of modifications to an application over time, allowing prior development versions to be restored. version number. Identifier for the version assigned to an element. vv.ll. Identifier that refers to a particular version (vv) and level (ll) of element source.

Glossary X-13

X-14 User Guide

Index
Special Characters
*LOADMOD 5-34 *PROC'D?* 5-16 % sign 5-21, 5-28

Action availability of 1-13 functions of 1-13 action number 4-26 Action Prompt Panel fields 4-21 multiple elements 4-22 Action prompt screen 4-21 Action request panels 2-11 Action summary report 4-26 action time 4-26 Action. job function, by 1-14 Actions initiating 2-22 MOVE 5-18 processing selection 4-2 prompt panels 4-21 retrieved 5-20 summary of 1-13 TANSFER 5-18 Activate Option 5-52 Activating esort 4-17 Adding user options 3-6 Allocation information 3-2 Approver group 5-2 Attaching user-defined functions Audit stamps 1-16 Auto consol 5-60, 5-63

Backing in & out, packages 5-14 Base fields 5-18 Base/Image Library 5-63 Batch execution report 4-23 C1MSGS1, C1MSGS2, C1TEMPRn how it is generated 4-23 syntax request report 4-23 Batch jobs 4-9 submitting 4-9 Batch options 4-4 Batch options menu 4-7, 4-9, 4-11 Batch Package Processing 2-24 Batch processing 2-23 Batch requests 4-5, 4-7 editing 4-7 validating 4-10 Browse panel, element 5-18 Browse panels 2-16 BUILD USING MAP 5-5 Building additional JCL 4-12 JCL 4-4 SCL 4-4, 4-5

4-23

3-6

CA-librarian 5-64 Cancelling processing confirmation panel, within CCID 4-21, 5-50 Column Sorting 4-17 Commands locate 4-15 recovery 4-7 VALIDATE 4-10 Comment 5-50 Compare from, to 5-60

4-13

Index X-15

Compress base/ encrypt name 5-60 Confirmation panel, the 4-13 Consol at lvl 5-60, 5-63 Creating batch requests 4-5 executable Forms of Elements 1-15 CSECT 5-33 CSECTS 5-29 Current Env 5-46, 5-49, 5-56, 5-68 Current Source fields 5-16

Data format 5-60 Data set security 1-22 Default values 2-19 Defining processor group 5-68 Definition of element 1-4 environment 1-4 generated 5-20 retrieved 5-20 stage 1-4 subsystem 1-4 system 1-4 type 1-4 Definition Panels 2-13 Delta information 5-60 Delta Library 5-64 Description field 5-60 Dflt proc grp 5-60 Display all existing statements (base level thru requested) 5-25 inserts & deletions 5-22 Options 5-2 options menu 5-2 Display MSGS When RC GE 3-4 Display Options Menu site definitions 5-36 subsystem definitions 5-55 Display-only fields element history, source level 5-26 Last system backup 5-53 panel title, element& source level 5-19 processor group definitions 5-68 Processor group identification 5-69 site information panel 5-45 stage information 5-46 subsystem definition 5-56

Display-only fields (continued) summary of levels 5-11 type definition 5-59 Display-onlyfields system definition 5-49 Displaying date, time, user-id 5-60 element/component lists 5-4 footprint information 5-29 library member 5-32 processor group definitions 5-66 stage information 5-46 subsystem definitions 5-55 system definitions 5-48 type definitions 5-57

Edit 4-4 Editing batch requests 4-7 Element 5-2, 5-6 browse panel 5-18 changes panel 5-21 history 5-25 history panel 5-24 master panels 5-12 processing, level of request 5-22 selection list panel fields 5-9 selection list, srting and supported statement 5-21 statements 5-24, 5-28 Element and member fields 4-16 selection lists 4-15 Element browse panel 2-16 Element Master control file information 5-12 identification fields 5-13 panel 5-12 panel 2 5-17 panel 2 fields 5-17 Element options field updated 5-60 Element selection list 4-16 uses 4-16 Element/component display fields 5-6 fields, list option 5-7 procedure steps 5-4

5-8

X-16 User Guide

Element/component lists 5-4 Elements audit stamps 1-16 classifying 1-11 executable, creating forms of 1-15 overview of 1-11 packages 1-16 reporting 1-15 source and output management 1-15 working with 1-13 Endevor action requests, creating 4-5 actions 1-13 basics 2-1 data set security 1-22 displaying information 5-1 encrypted i.d. information 5-29 exiting 2-4 explanation of 1-1 inventory structure 1-6 keyboard functions 2-2 Load Module IDR Display 5-33 overview 1-1 panels 2-10 setting up 1-7 specifying the element's location 5-11 structure query 1-12 using with other CA products 1-23 Endevor Logical Structure 1-4 overview of 1-4 Environment 5-2, 5-6, 5-48, 5-55, 5-57, 5-58, 5-67 Environment options menu 2-12 EONLY 4-18 EPRINT 4-19 Errors 4-11 return panel,example 4-11 ESORT column sorting feature 4-17 Executing action requests in batch 4-9 Execution report 4-25 Execution reports 3-4 Expand includes 5-64 Explanation of generated 5-20, 5-27 retrieved 5-27

failed 4-26, 5-16 Field 5-48 member 5-32

Field & decription action prompt panel(element and member) 4-21 Field & description element and member 4-16 element history 5-25 element statements (element history panel) 5-28 element statements(elment history panel) 5-24 footprint 5-34 footprints 5-32 general options, (system definitions) 5-50 job statement information 3-5 level & text (no title) 5-24 List Data Set Allocation Information 3-3 print option 3-4 source level (element history) 5-26 system definition 5-49 Field and Display CSECT 5-34 Field values, panel 2-19 Fields 3-3 base 5-18 current source 5-16 display-only 5-11 element master 5-13 element master, panel 2 5-17 element selection list 5-9 element/component 5-6 generate 5-17 ISPF library (footprint) 5-30 last element action 5-14 level & text 5-21 location fields 5-18 Panel title & element identification 5-22 Partitioned or Sequential Data Set (for footprints) 5-30 retrieve fields 5-17 Site Information panel 5-37 source level 5-22 source level, element changes 5-22 summary of element levels 5-19 Fields & description component list option 5-63 element option 5-59 Last system backup 5-53 output management 5-70 Processor translation output libraries 5-54 stage information 5-46 subsystem definitionpanel 5-56 subsystem display 5-55 summary of levels, identification 5-11 system display 5-48

Index X-17

Fields & description (continued) type definition 5-59 type definitions 5-57 type selection list 5-58 Fields and description processor group 5-67 Processor group identification 5-69 Footprint 5-2 footprint fields 5-32 Footprint information displaying 5-29 library selection list 5-31 Foreground options menu, panel 4-3 Foreground Execution Report Message 2-5 Foreground options 3-4 Foreground options menu 2-17 Foreground Processing 2-22 from information 4-26 Fwd/rev delta 5-60, 5-63

Information Request Panels 2-12 Initiating actions 2-22 Intercept ISPF Return CMD 3-4 Inventory structure 1-6 building the 1-7 steps of 1-7 using 1-6 ISPF 2-2 Browse Panel for a Footprinted Member commands 2-2 ISPF/PDF browse facility 4-10

5-35

JCL, including with other batch requests Job function 1-14 actions, associated with 1-14 Job statement information 3-5 Job submit confirmation code 4-10 JUMP key 2-3

4-12

K L
5-89

General options fields 5-50 Generate fields 5-17, 5-22 Generate, action 5-20, 5-27 Generating element display, an 4-6 Global Type Sequence Processing Order Group 5-67

Keyboard commands

2-2

H I

Help 2-5 History panel, element

5-24

Identification panel title & element 5-25 Identification fields element master, panel 2 5-17 panel title & element 5-19 system definition 5-49 Identifying environment & system for view Include Library 5-64 Information source level 5-19 Information fields, allocation of work & list data set 3-3

Language 5-60 Last Element Action fields 5-14 Last system backup Fields 5-53 library selection list 5-31 option field 5-31 Lines per page 3-4 list 4-26 List formats 2-15 List options extended 5-7 List panel 2-14, 2-16 Load library, stages of 5-54 Load module display fields load utility 5-32 Location fields, from endevor 5-18 Lvls to Consol 5-63

5-48

Master control file information fields 5-13 Member field, footprint 5-32

X-18 User Guide

member, library identification Menu batch options 4-4 Message help 2-5 Messages failed 5-16

5-30

Options menu (continued) foreground 2-22 Output mangement fields

5-70

Name masking 1-24, 2-20 Name prompt 5-4 ndvr rc 4-26, 5-15 Next Env 5-46, 5-49, 5-56, 5-68 Next Prcsgroup 5-69 Next subsystem 5-56 Next System 5-49

Option 5-48, 5-55, 5-57 Option & display endevor load module display 5-33 footprints, library selection list 5-31 Option field footprint use & display 5-30 Option fields Signin/signout 5-52 Option menus display 5-1 Options 4-4 "C" 5-21 "H", "Y" 5-24 add/update 4-3 adding, user 3-6 build JCL 4-4 building SCL 4-4 confirmation panel 4-13 delete 4-3 display 4-3 edit 4-4 foreground 3-4 generate 4-3 move 4-3 print 4-3 retrieve 4-3 setting 3-1 signin 4-3 submit 4-4 validate 4-4 Options menu availability and access 2-7

Package Foreground Options Menu 2-23 Package processing 2-23 Packages 1-16 Panel Load Module IDR Display 5-33 Panel Options SCL generation 4-6 Panel Title and Element Identification Fields Panels 2-10 action prompt 4-21 browse 2-16 confirmation 4-13 element changes 5-21 field values 2-19 footprint display 5-29 interaction, example of 2-17 Processor group definitions 5-68 processor group display 5-66 site information 5-36 stage information 5-46 subsystem definition 5-56 subsystem display 5-55 system definition 5-49 system display 5-48 type definition 5-59 type display 5-57 user defaults 3-2 Partitioned or Sequential Data Set (footprints) Pkg ID, (source) & (output) 5-14 platforms, element types 5-60 Primary options menu 3-2 batch 2-7 batch options 4-2 batch package 2-7 changes 2-7 defaults 2-7 display 2-7 display option menu 5-1 environment 2-7 exit 2-7 foreground 2-7, 4-2 foreground, in the 2-10 package 2-7 tutorial 2-7 user menu 2-7

5-30

Index X-19

Primary quantity 3-3 proc rc 4-26 Processing batch 2-23, 4-1, 4-2 batch package 2-24 foreground 2-22, 4-1, 4-2 syntax request report 4-24 Processing option 2-11 Processing Selection 4-2 Processor group 5-2 Processor group definitions description 5-68 fields 5-67 overview,display panel 5-66 panel 5-68 selection list 5-67 Processor translation output libraries PV/LB lang 5-60 PV/LB language values 5-64

5-54

Qualifying a system 4-15, 5-8 requesting selection list, when Qualifying information 2-11

4-15

Recovery 4-7 commands 4-7 Regr sev 5-60 Regression pct 5-60 Relate group 5-2 Reports action summary 4-26 batch execution 4-23 execution 4-25 Req Elm Jump Acknowledgment Request panels 2-11 Requesting 4-6 element display, an 4-6 element displays 5-29 Retrieve fields 5-17 Retrieved 5-20, 5-24 Retrieved of Retrieved, action 5-27 Return codes 4-26 RETURN key 2-3 Reviewing action requests 4-8

5-50

SCL generation 4-6 add/update 4-6 archive 4-6 delete 4-6 display 4-6 generate 4-6 list element 4-6 list member 4-6 move 4-6 print element 4-6 print member 4-6 retrieve 4-6 signin 4-6 transfer 4-6 SCL generation panel 4-6 scl written field 4-26 Secondary quantity 3-3 Security options 1-22 Selecting multiple elements 4-22 Selecting elements 5-8 Selection (no title) 5-58, 5-68 Selection list bypassing system and subsystem 4-17 element 5-8 element and member 4-15 subsystem 4-15 system 4-14 Selection lists 4-14 Site 5-2 Site definitions 5-36 Site Information panel fields 5-375-45 Software Life Cycle 1-2 change procedures 1-2 overview 1-2 stages of 1-2 Software life cycles emergency operations 1-3 Sorting characteristics 5-8 Source and output management 1-15 Source language 5-60 Source length 5-60 Source level information element history 5-26 fields 5-19 Source Level Information Fields 5-11 Source O/P library 5-64

X-20 User Guide

Space units 3-3 specific stages, particular systems 5-57 Specifying CCID 4-21 display list options, extended 5-7 element location 5-11 Specifying field information 4-5 append 4-5 include JCL 4-5 job statement information 4-5 partioned data set 4-5 request data set 4-5 sequential data set 4-5 Specifying request 2-14 Specifying search criteria 5-8 Stage 5-2, 5-6, 5-57, 5-58, 5-67 Stage 1 Information 5-46 Stage 2 Information 5-46 Stage ID 5-46, 5-68 Stage information 5-46 stage information fields statement number 4-26 Submit 4-4 SUBMIT option 4-10 Submit option fields 4-9 include JCL 4-9 job statement information 4-9 partitioned data set 4-9 request data set 4-9 sequential data set 4-9 Submitting batch jobs 4-9 Subsystem 5-2, 5-6, 5-55, 5-56 subsystem definitions 5-55 subsystem display fields 5-55 Subsystem selection list 4-15 fields 4-15 selection 4-15 subsystem 4-15 subsystem title 4-15 system 4-15 summary of element levels 5-19 Summary of levels identification fields 5-11 panel 5-10 reasons for appearance 5-10 Supported commands 5-8 Sychronizing source with executables 5-29 Syntax conventions 1-26 guidelines 1-31 sample diagram 1-29

Syntax request report 4-24 SCL statement 4-24 submitting a request 4-24 SYSOUT class 3-4 System 5-2, 5-6, 5-48, 5-49, 5-55, 5-56, 5-57, 5-58, 5-67, 5-68 System selection list 2-15 System selection list fields 4-14 CCID req'd 4-14 comments req'd 4-14 selection 4-14 system 4-14 system title 4-14 System Title 5-49, 5-56

Termination syntax request report, of 4-24 Title 5-56 Tutorials, accessing 2-6 Type 5-2, 5-6, 5-57, 5-58, 5-67, 5-68 Type definition 2-13 PV/LB language values 5-64 Type Description 5-58 Type display 5-57 Type selection list 5-58

Unit name 3-3 Updated 5-49, 5-56 User Defaults panel, saving & setting setting 3-1 User options menu 3-6

3-2

Validate 4-4 Validate Data Set 5-52 Validating 4-10 batch requests 4-10 SCL 4-10 Volume Serial 3-3

Work Data Set Allocation Information

3-3

Index X-21

THE LTSPICE XVII SIMULATOR: Commands and Applications
From Everand
THE LTSPICE XVII SIMULATOR: Commands and Applications
Gilles Brocard
5/5 (1)
CA-roscoe Manual (Ros60userguide)
No ratings yet
CA-roscoe Manual (Ros60userguide)
616 pages
Endevor Tool
No ratings yet
Endevor Tool
34 pages
ROSCOE - B001733e - User Guide
No ratings yet
ROSCOE - B001733e - User Guide
592 pages
Endevor User Guide
75% (4)
Endevor User Guide
52 pages
Ca Endevor Software Change Manager - Compress
No ratings yet
Ca Endevor Software Change Manager - Compress
290 pages
Endevor Admin
No ratings yet
Endevor Admin
358 pages
AllFusion Endevor Change Manager - r4 - Administration Guide
No ratings yet
AllFusion Endevor Change Manager - r4 - Administration Guide
216 pages
Smart Card Applications: Design models for using and programming smart cards
From Everand
Smart Card Applications: Design models for using and programming smart cards
Wolfgang Rankl
No ratings yet
Endevor Manual
100% (3)
Endevor Manual
142 pages
F001681E
No ratings yet
F001681E
224 pages
CA 7 Complete Commands
No ratings yet
CA 7 Complete Commands
664 pages
Developing Intelligent Agent Systems: A Practical Guide
From Everand
Developing Intelligent Agent Systems: A Practical Guide
Lin Padgham
3/5 (1)
Xpeditor UserGuide PDF
No ratings yet
Xpeditor UserGuide PDF
286 pages
CA Roscoe Ver6
100% (2)
CA Roscoe Ver6
616 pages
Tclug
No ratings yet
Tclug
102 pages
Gray Hat Hacking the Ethical Hacker's
From Everand
Gray Hat Hacking the Ethical Hacker's
Çağatay Şanlı
5/5 (1)
SysAdmin AG v2015EE
No ratings yet
SysAdmin AG v2015EE
310 pages
XPCICSCOBOLUserGuide PDF
No ratings yet
XPCICSCOBOLUserGuide PDF
194 pages
Companies and Environmental Impact: Identification and Visualization of Key Ecological Indicators
From Everand
Companies and Environmental Impact: Identification and Visualization of Key Ecological Indicators
Martin Knura
No ratings yet
Xpedref (Expediter Manual)
No ratings yet
Xpedref (Expediter Manual)
228 pages
Xpediter/Tso and Xpediter/Ims Reference Manual: Release 7.2
No ratings yet
Xpediter/Tso and Xpediter/Ims Reference Manual: Release 7.2
228 pages
Programming the Intel Galileo: Getting Started with the Arduino -Compatible Development Board
From Everand
Programming the Intel Galileo: Getting Started with the Arduino -Compatible Development Board
Christopher Rush
5/5 (1)
Prediction of Burnout: An Artificial Neural Network Approach
From Everand
Prediction of Burnout: An Artificial Neural Network Approach
Felix Ladstätter
No ratings yet
PC 81 TransformationGuide
No ratings yet
PC 81 TransformationGuide
552 pages
Pollution Prevention: Methodology, Technologies and Practices
From Everand
Pollution Prevention: Methodology, Technologies and Practices
Kenneth L. Mulholland
No ratings yet
Basic Research and Technologies for Two-Stage-to-Orbit Vehicles: Final Report of the Collaborative Research Centres 253, 255 and 259
From Everand
Basic Research and Technologies for Two-Stage-to-Orbit Vehicles: Final Report of the Collaborative Research Centres 253, 255 and 259
Dieter Jacob
No ratings yet
Programming the Photon: Getting Started with the Internet of Things
From Everand
Programming the Photon: Getting Started with the Internet of Things
Christopher Rush
5/5 (1)
Parallel Standard Practices DS
No ratings yet
Parallel Standard Practices DS
458 pages
Info Sphere DataStage Parallel Framework Standard Practices
No ratings yet
Info Sphere DataStage Parallel Framework Standard Practices
460 pages
Structural Health Monitoring
From Everand
Structural Health Monitoring
Daniel Balageas
No ratings yet
SDI April2023 Tasks en
No ratings yet
SDI April2023 Tasks en
69 pages
Matlab - Distributed Computing Toolbox
No ratings yet
Matlab - Distributed Computing Toolbox
162 pages
Open Data Structures: An Introduction
From Everand
Open Data Structures: An Introduction
Pat Morin
4/5 (4)
Teardowns: Learn How Electronics Work by Taking Them Apart
From Everand
Teardowns: Learn How Electronics Work by Taking Them Apart
Bryan Bergeron
No ratings yet
Unicenter CA-7 Job Management
No ratings yet
Unicenter CA-7 Job Management
698 pages
Communication and Control in Electric Power Systems: Applications of Parallel and Distributed Processing
From Everand
Communication and Control in Electric Power Systems: Applications of Parallel and Distributed Processing
Mohammad Shahidehpour
No ratings yet
SDI April2023 Monitor en
No ratings yet
SDI April2023 Monitor en
33 pages
EcoStruxure™ Process Expert
No ratings yet
EcoStruxure™ Process Expert
1,078 pages
Benefits of semantic data models. A study in the European goods transport industry
From Everand
Benefits of semantic data models. A study in the European goods transport industry
Andreas A. Pelekies
No ratings yet
Presentations with LaTeX: Which package, which command, which syntax?
From Everand
Presentations with LaTeX: Which package, which command, which syntax?
Herbert Voß
No ratings yet
CA7 Primer
No ratings yet
CA7 Primer
192 pages
SaltStackEnterpriseHelp-V6 1 0 October
No ratings yet
SaltStackEnterpriseHelp-V6 1 0 October
238 pages
F001851E
No ratings yet
F001851E
363 pages
Process Advisor Intro
No ratings yet
Process Advisor Intro
144 pages
Exercise Guide ESU03GX-3
No ratings yet
Exercise Guide ESU03GX-3
134 pages
Securing ChatGPT: Best Practices for Protecting Sensitive Data in AI Language Models
From Everand
Securing ChatGPT: Best Practices for Protecting Sensitive Data in AI Language Models
Matthew C. Smith
No ratings yet
MKS Implementer User Guide v.5.3 PDF
No ratings yet
MKS Implementer User Guide v.5.3 PDF
456 pages
Facility Management: Business Process Integration
From Everand
Facility Management: Business Process Integration
Alexander Redlein
No ratings yet
AA PDU1A-TC RT-11 IND Control Files Manual Aug91
No ratings yet
AA PDU1A-TC RT-11 IND Control Files Manual Aug91
178 pages
PC 81 CommandLineReference
No ratings yet
PC 81 CommandLineReference
352 pages
Ovation Developer Studio WIN60 00
No ratings yet
Ovation Developer Studio WIN60 00
306 pages
PC 811 TransformationGuide
No ratings yet
PC 811 TransformationGuide
642 pages
Application Development Guide EP-DSXX16
No ratings yet
Application Development Guide EP-DSXX16
522 pages
Software Patterns Made Easy
From Everand
Software Patterns Made Easy
Justice Nanhou
No ratings yet
Greening Your Home: Sustainable Options for Every System In Your House
From Everand
Greening Your Home: Sustainable Options for Every System In Your House
Clayton Bennett
4/5 (1)
Informix Dynamic Server 11
No ratings yet
Informix Dynamic Server 11
394 pages
PWX 1040 BulkDataMovementGuide en
No ratings yet
PWX 1040 BulkDataMovementGuide en
214 pages
Unicenter Jobtrac Management
No ratings yet
Unicenter Jobtrac Management
316 pages
Sourcebook on the Foundations of Social Protection Delivery Systems
From Everand
Sourcebook on the Foundations of Social Protection Delivery Systems
Kathy Lindert
No ratings yet
Before Using This Information and The Product It Supports, Be Sure To Read The General Information Under "Notices" On Page VII
No ratings yet
Before Using This Information and The Product It Supports, Be Sure To Read The General Information Under "Notices" On Page VII
110 pages
Re-Cording Lives: Governing Asylum in Switzerland and the Need to Resolve
From Everand
Re-Cording Lives: Governing Asylum in Switzerland and the Need to Resolve
Ephraim Pörtner
No ratings yet
E1UR010IF11SE
No ratings yet
E1UR010IF11SE
446 pages
How Useful is the Information Ratio to Evaluate the Performance of Portfolio Managers?
From Everand
How Useful is the Information Ratio to Evaluate the Performance of Portfolio Managers?
Christoph Schneider
No ratings yet
Ashmitha CV Application System Analyst
No ratings yet
Ashmitha CV Application System Analyst
11 pages
Smarttest Overview
No ratings yet
Smarttest Overview
3 pages
Smart Restart
No ratings yet
Smart Restart
27 pages
EndevorSCM Scenarios ENU
No ratings yet
EndevorSCM Scenarios ENU
260 pages
CA
No ratings yet
CA
138 pages
CA Endevor® SCM - 17.0 - ENU - Administrating - 20180504
No ratings yet
CA Endevor® SCM - 17.0 - ENU - Administrating - 20180504
1,109 pages
What Is Endevor?
No ratings yet
What Is Endevor?
27 pages
Ashmitha CV Application System Analyst ACS
No ratings yet
Ashmitha CV Application System Analyst ACS
11 pages
Endeavor Workflow
No ratings yet
Endeavor Workflow
69 pages
ENDEVOR Tutorial
100% (1)
ENDEVOR Tutorial
75 pages
Endevor
No ratings yet
Endevor
40 pages
Endevor User Guide
No ratings yet
Endevor User Guide
253 pages
Gnana Prasad Gopathi
No ratings yet
Gnana Prasad Gopathi
7 pages
EndevorSCM MessagesRef ENU
50% (2)
EndevorSCM MessagesRef ENU
1,032 pages
ENDEVOR
No ratings yet
ENDEVOR
67 pages
RDZ Search Options
No ratings yet
RDZ Search Options
74 pages
EndevorSCM Exits ENU PDF
No ratings yet
EndevorSCM Exits ENU PDF
360 pages
DUF User Guide
100% (1)
DUF User Guide
56 pages
Endevor Package
No ratings yet
Endevor Package
15 pages
ENDEVOR
No ratings yet
ENDEVOR
7 pages
Endevor QuickEdit
No ratings yet
Endevor QuickEdit
31 pages
All Projects List
No ratings yet
All Projects List
20 pages
Endevor Basics: Environment Type Level
No ratings yet
Endevor Basics: Environment Type Level
42 pages
CA Endevor
100% (1)
CA Endevor
11 pages